Amanualforwriters 10259859 by Terje Tønnessen

A M A N UA L F O R

W R IT C O V ERI N G

T HE

N EEDS

ER S OF

AU T H O R S

FOR

I N F O R M A T IO N ON R ULES OF W R ITI N G A N D PR A C TI C ES I N PRI N T I N G

JO H N M A T T HEW S MAN L Y Head 9f the Department of English The Univ ersity

f I

Chicag o

AN D

JO H N f the

AR T H UR Univ er sity

f Chizago

T H E UNI V E RSI T Y O F

C HICAG O

BO W ELL Pr ess

C H I CA G O I LLIN O IS

PR E SS

PREFACE

The M anual of S tyle o f the Uni versi ty o f Chicag o Press origi n a lly p ub li she d a s a guid e fo r p rin ters p roo f read ers a n d c opy edi tors w as soon foun d to be s o use ful to wri ters fo r the press s ec retari es sten o grap hers typi sts an d all other c lasses o fp ers ons in terested in wri t i ng tha t the d em an d fo r i t be came very gre a t a n d the volum e h a s pa ssed thr ou gh three e di ti ons e ach m ore volumi nou s than the p rec edi ng Several o f i ts c h ap ters however thou gh o f p rim e i nterest to p ri nters a re o f c ompa r a ti vely sli ght v alue to wri ters The p resent volum e has therefore been p re pa re d w i th the i ntenti on o f su pp ly i ng the i r s p ecia l nee d s I t i s b a se d u p on st a nda r d a uthori ti es su pp lem en te d by observati on o f re c ent p r ac ti c es a nd ten denci es am on g s chol a rs a n d ca reful wri ters Up on many p oin ts re pu t able usage i s o i c ours e divide d ; but fo r p r ac tical p ur p oses every news pap er o fďŹ ce every p rin tin g house has to make a choic e an d establi sh a unif orm rule in its prac tic e Fo r the sam e rea sons the s am e p olicy i s ad o p te d here T he p resent volum e i t i s beli eve d woul d lose mu ch o f i ts v alue if i t gave all allow able forms an d prac tic es instead o f givin g in eac h ca se a sin gle standard for m or p r ac tic e A sin gle small volum e cannot c ontain solu ti ons o f all the p roblem s which may c onfront a wri ter ; but the ,

â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;

PR E FACE

authors venture to hOpe th a t f ew ma tters o f imp o rtan c e h ave been negle c te d a nd th a t this volu m e wi ll b e o f s erv ic e to wri ter s o f a ll c l a sse s A cknowle dgm ent is made o f the assis t an ce re cei ve d f rom M r A C M cF arlan d gener al su perin ten dent o f the Univers i ty of Chicago Pres s who contr ibu te d the ma terial fo r ch ap ix The au thor s are also in de bte d to M rs C N Shup fo r hel pful su ggestions an d very care f ul re adin g of the proo fs T he s t andar d tex tbooks and author i ti es on the sub j ects co veie d by thi s wo r k are too num erous to m entio n i n d et ail T he authors can express the i r o bliga tion to these only i n a gener al manner J M M J A P .

Septemb er

I , 19 13

TABLE OF CON TEN T S CHAPTE R

PAG E

E N GLISH C OMP OSITION

II III

N OTE S

GRA MM A I ICAL ’ ‘

(With a Lis t o f .

Pitfalls in Dictio n

SPELLIN G ; WITH R ULE S F OR C OMP OUNDIN G WORDS

”

)

ABB REVIATIN G

CAPITALIZAI ION

’ ‘

P UNCTUATI ON THE USE

1 01

I TALIC

1 23

LETTE R WRITIN G (With Fo rms)

1 29

VIII

HINTS

THE

P REPAR ATION

MANU SCRIPT

P RI NTE R

151

I LLUSTRATIONS

1 68

STA GE S THROU GH WHICH M AKING XI

AN D

TYP O G RAP HI CAL P RACTICE S

B OOK

PASSE S 1 76

AND

MISCELLANE OUS I NF ORMA TION

TE RM S 2 00

211

vii

C HAPTER I

E NGL ISH CO MP O SIT IO N I WRITING A C RAF T AND AN AR T The a b ili ty to wri te well ca nnot be i mp rovi se d nor can a ny tre a ti se or te acher p rovid e an em er gen c y re cip e which wi ll en a ble its p o s ses s or to di sp ense wi th lon g an d m ore or less l a bori ous p repa r a ti on Li ke woo d carving p ottery a r chi tec ture a n d a d oz en other f o r m s o f work wri ti ng i s p rima ri ly a c r af t wi th the capaci ty o f b e in g tr ansf orm e d into an a rt I t i s a c r af t when pr ac tice d f or the uses o f dai ly lif e by p ersons o f or di n a ry endow m ents ; i t i s tr ansf orm e d into an a rt when to e xcellen ce of c r af tsmanship i s add e d the f or ma t ive prin ciple th at differentia tes an a rt f ro m a cr af t The a rt of wri ting like the other a rts cannot be t aught A rt i s in c ommunicable T he c r af t o f wri tin g li ke the other c r af ts can be le a rne d an d Si n c e the p ro ce s s o f le a rni ng can be h a stened an d made e a si er by s ugges tion c ri tici sm an d di re c ti on we may fai rly s ay a s we s ay i n a ll simil ar ca ses th a t i t can be t au ght We Sh a ll there fore i n wh a t f ollows de al wi th wri ti ng solely a s a c r af t Wherever there i s a n ade qu a te b a si s o f cr af ts ma nship a rt ca n ďŹ n d or cre a te i ts own i nstru ments a n d m etho d s I The cr aft can b e le ar n e d b y an y on e â&#x20AC;&#x201D;T he nu m ber o f p ersons who ca nnot und er favor able c ondi ti ons .

A MANUAL FO R WRI TE RS

le arn a ny c r af t is s o s mall a s to be ne gligi ble I n de e d the s uc c ess o f William M orri s a n d other s i n d evelo pi n g a ny and every chance comer i nto a s ki l ful arti s a n i n c r a f ts so d epen d ent up on te c hn ical e xc ellen c e a s to r a nk am on g the in d us trial arts a n d the gener a l e xp eri en ce o f mankin d in the tr ansmi ssi on o f a c r af t o r i n du s tria l a rt thro ugh ma ny gener a ti ons of a sin gle fami ly p rove th a t a lthough capaci ti es diff er wid ely s o m e capaci ty f or any and every c raf t may b e a ssu m e d f or every norma l hu man b eing T he c r af t of wri tin g is no e xc epti on to thi s gener al rul e An yone who is wi lli ng to t ake the tr o uble to do so can ac qui re i t The fun dam ent a l requi rem ent f or the r apid a n d f ort on the eﬁ ective l e a rni n g o f every c r af t i s ac t i ve ef pa rt o f the le a rner I n a c e rt ai n sense nothi n g ca n be t aught—no p ro c ess no c r af t no s ci enc e—a ll must be l ea rne d T he s imp les t p hysica l p ro cesses su c h a s w a lk i ng canno t be t aught ; a s lon g as the p upi l ref uses to participa te in the p ro c e s s ref uses to ma ke the effort to w alk i nstru c ti on is f uti le T he c r afts a n d the s ci en c e s are even m ore d e pend ent u pon the participat ion o f the le arner be cause in them the e le m ents o f phys ica l an d m ent al action are more co mpl ica te d an d more h ighly o r gan iz e d 2 Uncon s ciou s tr aini ng —T here a re to b e s ure some c r af ts—an d wri ting is o n e of them—whi c h see m to b e ac qui re d by c ert ain p ersons wi thout e ffort a n d wi thout any app rentic eship But i n every s u c h ca s e i t w i ll be foun d up on i nvestiga ti o n th a t the c r a f t i nvolves .

ENGL IS H CO MP O SI T I ON

only sp e cial applica ti ons o f p hysica l c ontr o l or m ent a l pro ces s es which h ave been ac qui red by ad equ a te p r ac tic e i n other for m s o f ac tivi ty N o man ever wrote w ell unless he ei th er h ad ac tively tri e d to le a rn to wri te or h ad a lre ady p r ac tice d i n som e oth er f or m the m ent a l op er a tions essentia l to goo d wri ti ng The whole world i s in a sense a s chool for wri ters a nd lif e gi ve s dai ly i nstru c ti on i n the c r af t to all who wi ll li sten a nd p r ac tic e T he u s e o f l angu age an d the organiz a tion o f thou ght—the only fundam ent als of the c r af t—a re ta ught daily E very n ew obje c t or id e a n am e d i n o ur he ar ing o fiers an in cre a se in vo ca bul a ry every well p hr a se d s enten c e i s a lesson i n synonym s i n gr amma r a n d i n style ; f ro m i nfa nc y onwa rd we re c e i ve lessons i n c le arne ss i n c oheren c e i n uni ty i n e mp h a si s ; an d alm ost every c onvers a tio n cont ai ns s o m e rhetorica l d evice o r figure Si n c e wri ting is o nly t alk s et d own on pap er an d even the best and m ost arti stic wri ti ng m erely a sub lima te of the best t alk i t is al most i nevi t a ble th a t anyone who li a s a ssocia te d f ro m i nfan cy w i th cultiva te d an d i ntelligent p eop le will h ave had su ch a train ing in l angu ag e a nd i n cl ea r a nd ord erly thi nkin g as wi ll en able hi m to wr i te d e c ently wi thout s p e cific “ trainin g in wri tin g T he word c o mp osi ti on i n c lu d es the or ganiz a ti on a n d exp ression o f thought both or a lly a n d i n wri ting a n d emp h a siz e s the imp ort a nt f ac t th a t the two a re one — n i n u u n e es s a r s r S e i a l t a i a ll c Why then c y 3 y g p are there s o many p ersons who t alk i n c ompa r a bly better .

”

A MANUAL FO R WRITE RS

th an they wri te an d so m e who tho u gh they t a lk e a s ily are helpless an d agh a st when they a re c o mp elle d to wri te Ther e are doubtless many causes whi c h si n gly or i n c ombi na tion acc ount f or these fac ts O nly a f ew of th em can be di s cusse d here i n d et ai l In s o m e ca ses p erh ap s the fan ci e d sup erio r i ty o f a brilliant t alker s c onvers a ti on to his wri tin g i s m er ely i llu s ory Hi s t alk if c ri tically c onsid ere d would be fo und to h ave the s am e d e fe c ts a s his wri ti ng His s u cc ess wo ul d be f o un d to d ep en d u p on the low st a n da r d s o f cri tici s m appli ed to co nvers a tio n up on th a t rel ax e d m ood o f s o cie ty whi c h acc ep t s mere r eadine ss i n retort qui ckn es s wi th a p etriﬁed c omm onp l ac e a s the equi valent of wit an d which so metim es c onfus e s the bright swif tne ss i gh p hysical vi t ali ty wi th i ntell ec tu a l bri llian c e o fh But we all kno w i ns t an c e s i n whi c h the s up eri ori ty of the c onver s a ti on to the wri ting is not i llusory T here a re men and wom en whose c onvers a ti on i s i nterestin g bri lli ant f a s ci n a ting wi th ﬂas hes of wi s d om or p ro fo un d sugg estiveness an d whose wri tin g i s a web o f the c omm onp l ac e shot thro ugh wi th str an d s o f d ulnes s The diff erential caus e in su ch ca ses lies usu a lly i n the temp er am ent T h ese p ersons e i ther h ave wh a t ps y “ c ho lo gis ts ca ll s ho rt re ac ti on times or they p osses s torpid min d s whi ch d evelop thei r full Sp ee d an d p ower o nly un d er s tron g Stimul ant s Su ch a s the e xci te m ent o f ba t tling wits o r the vi sible p resen c e o f a gallery Of pos dmi rers si ble a Hab i t too may c l aim i ts pa rt i n the cause j ust as many wri ters can thi nk only wi th a p en ,

’

”

E NGL ISH CO MP O SI T ION in

h an d a n d many or a tors can c omp ose thei r eloquent p eri o d s only when they st and an d see or fa n cy they see an a udien c e bef ore the m so also many bri lliant c onver s atio n ali s ts nee d the fami lia r c on di ti ons o f c onvers a t i on to set thei r i ntelle c tu a l machi nery in op er a ti on Self c ons ci ousness a lso i s a fac tor o f no m e a n imp ort an c e in som e ca ses an d o f ten co o p er a tes wi th h a bi t or the l ac k of i t Self c ons ciousness li ke any other di str ac t i on o f a ttenti on f rom the mai n ac tivi ty may w i th d r a w fro m th a t ac ti vi ty m uch or ne a rly a ll o f one s m ent al p ower An entirely different c la ss o f p ersons who sp e ak well but w ri te b ad ly i n c lu d es those who h ave not p r ac tic e d wri ting of ten enou gh to be c om e accustom e d to the m e c h ani cal ac t o f wri t ing I n the i r di stress there a re two main fac tors I n the ďŹ rst pl ac e the m ent a l p ower a vai l a ble f or thi nki ng is dimini she d by the am ount d r awn o ff to the i nstru m ent an d the ac t o f wri ting an d to sel f c ons ci ou s observ a ti on o fthei r uns a ti sfac tory men t a l p ro c esses I n the se c ond p l ac e wri tin g i s ne c ess ar ily a slower mo de of exp ressi on th a n s p ee ch an d su ch perso ns h a ve not yet le a rne d to think i n the temp o o f wri tin g to d well on a thou ght lon g enough to set i t down a n d then p ro ceed to the ne x t w i thout losi ng the imp etus o f co n Thi s c l a ss i s ve ry num erous T he tin uo us thi nki n g re m e dy fo r the c ondi ti on obvi ously is p ers i stent p r ac tic e i n wri ti ng M a ny i n dividu als in both these c l a sses a re seri ously h amp ere d i n thei r eff orts to wri te by the f eeli ng th a t wri t i n g esp e cially wri ti ng f or the p ubli c shoul d be som e ,

â&#x20AC;&#x2122;

M ANUAL FO R WRITE RS

thi ng sup erfin e sho ul d be a rtificially or a t le a st a rtfully de cor a ted th a t o ver the o rigi n a l f orm o f thei r thou ght should b e d r ape d a be autiful ga rm ent calle d style Thi s is of c ours e a thorou ghly p ernici ous ide a ; i t h a s not only p revente d many f ro m wri ting who mi ght h a ve wri tten s imp ly a nd agree ably but worse th an th a t h a s bur dened the worl d wi th thous an d s o f pages o f th a t “ useless an d b ad p ro duc t known a s fin e wri tin g “ F ortun a t ely fin e wri tin g is now c on d e mn e d by a ll who know an d teac hers an d wri ters uni te i n reco gn iz in g th a t style is not a ma tter o f sup erficia l de c or a ti on but re s id es i n the very f orm i n which the thought i s c on ceive d Phr a ses th a t d o not fit the thou ght are s een to dis figure not to orn am ent i t a n d the re m e d y f or a p oo r s tyle is not fin e wor d s but a better m o d e o f thinki ng ju s t as the re me dy f or a f eeble shrunken bo dy is not c lothe s but physica l d evelopm ent — W r i t i n n d t i n ki n T o wri te w ell is i n fac t a h 4 g g to thi n k or f eel s o methi ng worth s ayin g to gi ve the thought or f e eli ng clea r an d d e fini te f orm a n d then to s ay i t in p re ci sely thi s fo r m E very tre a ti se on wri ti n g theref ore m us t b e not a c olle c ti on o f tric ks but fun d amen tally a tre a ti se on thi nki n g A nyone who h a s ac quire d the h a bi t of thinki ng c onst antly o f mixin g thou ght wi th hi s obs erv ations an d e motions o f re fle c tin g up on the li kenesses a nd differen c es a n d causes o f thi ng s wi ll h ave ide a s i n a bun dan c e w i ll b e a ble to gi ve the m cl ea r a n d d efini te f orm a n d w ill nee d only p r ac tic e a n d a f ew simp le i nstru c ti ons to be c o m e a g oo d wri ter ,

”

ENGL IS H CO MP O SIT I ON

I N TE LLE C TUA L E QUIPllďŹ&#x201A;EN T The i ntelle c tu al equipm ent n ec e s s a ry f or c o mp osi ti on or al or wri tten i nvolve s two fac tors a store o f i nteresting ma terial a n d the p ower o f thi nki ng c le a rly an d i nteresti ngly I t i s not ne c ess a ry th a t the ma terial Shoul d be very gre a t i n am ount So me c h armi ng an d even gre a t wri ters h ave h ad li ttle knowledge an d co mpa r a ti vely few imp ort ant id e a s I t is o f c ourse d esi r a ble th a t there Should be enough knowle dge o f som e o n e subj e c t to make i t worth whi le f or your au di en c e to a tten d to wh a t you h a ve to s ay The part icula r n a ture o f the ma teria l is o f even less imp ort an c e th an the am ount There i s p erh ap s no p ossi ble subje c t of thought or f eelin g whi ch has a rouse d the i nterest of one hu man being th a t i s not capa ble of i nteresting many The fun dam ent al re quiremen t o fa well store d mi n d i s th a t i ts ma terial should c onsi st not o f c olorless re c ord s o f thi ngs re ad and he a r d an d f elt an d seen nor of rem em bere d p hr a se s in whic h others h ave e m bo die d the i r re ac ti ons to the manif old ele m ents o f lif e but of s in c ere p ers on al re co rd s c olore d by p erson al thought an d f eelin g e ac h c onn ec te d wi th multi tu d es of other re c or d s wi th whi c h i t has so m e afďŹ n i ty The m o d e o f thi nkin g i s obvi ously of mu ch m ore imp ort anc e than the am ount or the n a ture of the ma terial I t not only p rovides the ma teria l but a s we h ave just seen d etermin es to a l a rge e x tent the n a ture o f i t The enrichm ent of the min d then i s fundam ent ally d ep end ent up on thi nking succ essfully II

A MANUAL FO R WRITE RS

The p rim e c on di t ion o f s uc ces sf ul thi nkin g i s p erh ap s a n a tt i tu d e o f wh a t may be “ calle d ac ti ve re c e p tivi ty Thi s i nvolves not only alertnes s of mi nd to o bserve an d to seek a n d re adi ness to re c ord o b s erva ti ons e mo ti ons b i ts of knowledge f ro m books a nd fro m men but su ch an a tti tud e a s cau s es a ll the ide as whi c h alre ady inh a bi t the mi n d to be a le rt to f orm s om e as so cia ti on wi th the ne wc om er I n to o ma ny mind s a n ew ide a i s re c eive d a s a str anger is in a n E ngli sh hotel not a s a newc om er is i n a boo m to wn in the West Geni us is the capaci ty fo r maki n g n ew an d v a lu a ble c om bin a ti ons E dga r All a n Poe cert ai nly one o f the most origi na l o f m en held th a t origi n ali ty i s capa ble o f cultiva tio n by p ro c esses which i nvolve ac tive re ce p ti vi ty a s thei r p rin cipal ele m ent Wi lli am Ki ngd on C liff or d “ i n hi s es s ay o n The C ondi tions of Intelle c tu a l Develo p ment as serts th a t the p ri ncipa l c on di tions are two one “ p osi ti ve an d o n e ne ga ti ve T he p osi tive c on di tion “ he s ays is th a t the mi n d shoul d ac t r a ther th a n a ss imi l a te th a t its a tti tu de shoul d be o n e o f c re a ti on r a ther th a n o f ac qui si ti on T he nega tive c on di tio n is p l a stici ty : the avoidanc e o f all su c h c ryst alliz a t i on a s i s imme dia tely suggested by the envi ron m ent A mi n d th a t would grow must let no ide a s be c o m e p er ma nent e xc ep t su ch as lead to ac tion To w a r d a ll others i t m ust mai nt ai n a n a tti tu d e of absolute re c ep tivi ty ; admi tti n g a ll bei ng m odi ﬁed by all but p erma nently b ia sed by none T o be c om e c ryst alli z e d ﬁxe d i n opin i on a n d 1

Active r eceptivity

”

E NGL ISH CO MP O SI T I ON

m o d e o f thought is to lose the g re a t ch ar ac te ri stic o f ” li f e by whic h i t i s di stin gui she d f rom i n anima te n a ture Si nc e stu dy an d e xp eri en c e a re the two sourc e s o f ma teria l an d of style the a tti tud e o fwhi ch we h a ve been Sp ea ki ng is ne c ess a ry fo r e ach Som e p ersons f e a r to Sp oi l thei r origi n ali ty by re ading They wi sh to thi nk an d s ay wh a t h a s never been thou ght or s aid bef ore an d they fe a r th a t re adi ng wi ll make the m s ee wi th the eyes thi nk wi th the mi n d s an d sp e ak w i th the voic es o f others T he e ffort to avoid c omm on ide a s o f ten re s ul ts i n mi ssin g c omm on s ense But in d ep en d ently o f th a t da nger i t shoul d be re mem bere d tha t if we live in huma n so ci ety o ur ide a s a re stimul a te d an d organi z e d by the id e a s of others whether we will or not an d i t i s better to be i nﬂuen c e d by a n able thi nker th an by a mul ti tu d e o f loose t a lkers Wh a t counts i n re ading is the w ay in which o n e re ad s R eading — R e adi ng Shoul d furni sh not only ma 2 terials f or thoug ht but c entr al id e a s f or the orga ni z a ti on o f our id e a s an d the grouping of those f ugi ti ve imp ressi ons those pa ssing e m otions whi c h a re not the le a st imp ort ant pa rt o f a wri ter s equipm ent T o be n a tur a l does not m e an to susp en d thi nki ng to for get a ll th a t re adi ng a n d e xp eri en c e an d re ﬂe c tion h a ve wri tten i n he a rt an d mi n d N othin g i s m or e b a rren f or the p urp oses of e xp ressi on th an the he art th a t has not Sh are d i n the enrichm ent o f the whole n a ture T he n a tur a l l angu age o f pa ssi on is the c ry E m oti on m ust be enriche d by a sso cia ti on wi th id e a s be fore i t can yi el d ,

’

A MANUAL FO R WRITE RS

b eauty o r p o wer i n li ter a ture But pa s sive re adi n g fur ni she s n o thi ng but ma terials whether thes e be m ere fac ts or id ea s f or mula te d by other s Persons who r ead pas s i vely h a ve the h abi t o f s eei ng thi ngs i n f orm s c rea ted by the mi nds o f o ther s a n d of sp e aki n g i n p hr a se s th a t a re not thei r o wn When they loo k a t a pic ture o r a l an d scap e o r he a r a p oe m o r s ee a p l ay they summ o n to thei r aid not thei r i ntellig en c e but thei r n d n o t o nly the phr a ses they u s e to express m em ory ; a th ei r em oti ons an d ju dgm ents but the very ju dgm ents and e motions the m selve s are the work o f others T he long di sus e d machi nery of tho ught an d fe eli ng r efu s e s to turn o f i t s elf an d m ust be p ush ed r o un d by the h a n d s o f a noth er R e adi ng must be al ert s ympa thetic curi ous T he m ost proďŹ t able book s are tho s e th a t i rri t a te tho s e wi th which we di s agre e But they mu s t be re ad not wi th s c orn an d aloofnes s but sympa the tica lly th a t is wi th a n i ntense d e s i re to as cert ai n e xac tly wh a t the wri ter thi nks an d why M oreover re re adin g i s o f ten n eces s a ry T he re ad er who n ever re r ead s a book be fore he h a s h ad tim e to f orget i t ha s n o t yet ac qui re d the h a bi t o f r eading â&#x20AC;&#x201D; L i f e The a tti tud e tow a r d lif e a n d its exp eri en c e s 3 should not differ essentia lly f ro m th a t towa r d the wo rl d o f books A c tive re c ep ti vi ty i s d eman d e d everywhere M ost of u s live i n a leth argy h a lf the tim e a n d i n m or e th a n h alf o f o ur faculti e s The pa rt s o f our b ein g t ake turns i n somnolen c e When the i ntelle c t works the .

E NGLIS H CO MP O SIT I ON

sensib ili ty rep oses an d the intelli ge n ce goes to sle ep T he self is never aw ake as soon as the he a rt aw a kes as a whole We h ave d etermi ne d the times an d the thin gs to wh ich the intelligen c e m ust a ttend At other m oments a nd f or other obje c ts we make no us e o f i t ; an d yet i t is the univers a l i nstrum ent fitted fo r a ll the p henome na an d m om ents o f li f e T o wri te o f li f e o n e m ust h ave li ve d an d observe d lif e a s he w a s li vi ng T he b a si s o f i nventi on i s observa t ion a nd re fle c ti on A ll the si tu a ti ons an d e m oti ons o f c o me dy a n d tr age dy a re accessi ble to e ac h of us even if in mi nia ture ; an d the c onstru c ti ve imagi n a ti on ca n use a magnifie d e m otion or eve nt a s su cc ess fully a s the gre a t emotio n or event to which i t is a n alogous I f o ur e xp eri en c e i s s ma ll thi s i s not be cause we h a ve m et f ew events but be cause we ret ai n f ew imp ressi ons We li ve our days di s c onne c te d ly E vents pa ss over us a nd e m ot ions di e N othi ng is co n tin uo u s i n us but un c ons ci ous h a bi ts a n d automa t ic ac ti on s We f eel pa ssi vely a n d uni ntelli gently li ke brutes E vents stri ke u s p le a se us woun d us ; we rejoic e we suffer a nd th a t i s all we know o f the experi en ce There remain for m ost o f us from all our sorrows a nd our p le a sures only vague images whic h a re soon too i n di sti n c t f or the uses of li f e or o f li ter a ture — A ro e s s o f i n t e r r e t t i on T he applica tion o f a c 4 p p ac tive i ntelli gen c e to all the observa tions sens a ti ons a nd e moti ons o f lif e d oes not imp ly dry a n a lysi s a n d f or mal cl a ssifica ti on but p erson a l re ac ti on to eve ry stimulus I t i s re a lly only a Simp le ac t o f i nterp ret a ti on ,

MANUAL FO R WRITE RS

suc h a s a b a by makes of the manifol d imp r essions th a t throng up on him At ﬁrst these a re to the b aby not even p erc ep ti ons but m ere s en s e imp ressi on s o f color of soun d of he a t o f p ress ure o f t a ste o f o do r o f p le a s ure of pai n E ach imp re s sion i s sepa r a te i n i tself an d t aken alone be a rs no i ntelligi ble m ess age f rom the outer world Th a t there a re obje c ts the i nfa nt knows not ; he kn ows o nly imp ressi ons an d sen s a tio ns But a s i n hi s li ttle br ai n imp re s s i ons th a t belong toge ther ﬁn d o n e a nother qu ickly a n d uni t e to f or m a p er c e p t o f a n obje c t the work of i nterp ret a tion goe s on H ow fa r i t g oes de termi ne s the i ntelle c tu al life o f the i nf ant a n d the adult i nto w ho m he develop s In som e mi n d s the worl d r emains a hu ddle o f unrel a te d obje c ts an d events ; in others i t is a rich f abric wo ven c lo s e of dark an d light of p leas ur e an d pai n o f goo d an d evi l .

III I

The

s ub

WHA T

W RITE

OU T

j e ct —It might be s upp ose d th a t a nyone

who w i she d to wri te would know wh a t he wi she d to wri te about But many m erely w i s h to Wri te T o r ecomm end th a t su ch a p erson c hoose a subje c t which he knows well i s not so sup erfluous a s i t see m s Wh a t i s well known seem s co mmo np l ac e an d only the un fami lia r a llure s But obvi ously the unfami lia r must be le f t to som eone to whom i t is familia r Havi ng chosen hi s subje c t the wri ter will usu a lly fin d th a t as a t first c on c e ived i t is too l a rg e o r too g ener al Limi t a ti on o f the them e is then the wi se -

E NGL IS H CO MPO SI T ION

c ourse M a ny a man who can only b a bble vai nly a bout govern m ent ca n wri te a va lu a ble a n d interestin g acc ount o f the man age ment o f the county hospi t al o r the ci ty c ontroller s offi c e or the p oli ce c ourt in hi s p re ci n c t T he h a bi ts an d intelligen c e o f in s e c ts are h ar dly capable o f anythi n g but loose ane cdotic tre a t m ent a t secon d han d ; o n e o f the most origi nal an d interestin g books o f re c ent ye a rs i s d evote d to the hi story o f a sin gle family o f w a sp s F ew m en a re exp eri en c e d an d wi se enough to f orm l ar ge g ener aliz a ti ons an d f ew l a rg e g ener aliz a ti ons a re true enou gh o r d efini te enou gh to be v a lu able 2 What to s ay ab o ut it — T he very p ro c ess o f li mi t i ng the subje c t to man ag e able siz e w ill i nevi t ably result i n su ggesti ng s o m ethi ng to s ay a bout i t T he ide a s suggeste d may a ri se very di s c onne c te dly a n d i n ve ry c ru d e f orm T he first thi n g to make sure o f i s tha t y o u ca t c h an d fix the m all N o better w ay h a s yet been di s c overe d to d o thi s th a n to jot the m d own as they o ccur o n small ca r d s or sli p s o f pap er M anil a ca r d s a re better th an pap er unl ess i t i s thi ck an d s tifi be cause they a re m ore e a si ly han dled T hree by five in ches is a goo d s iz e thou gh so m e wri ters p refer the m larger an d som e smaller I t i s not ne cess a ry to wri te o ut your id e a s i n f ull a t thi s tim e The main thing is to get a s many o f the m a s p ossi ble re c or d e d As these id e a s a re wri tten d own others wi ll suggest thems elves Experi enc e w ill soon Show tha t i t is p oor p oli cy to p ut two id e a s however c losely rela te d on the s am e car d f or .

’

M ANUAL

FOR

WRI TE RS

you d o not yet kno w ho w or wh er e the id e a s are to be used I f a rou gh plan o f o rgani z a ti on has not yet di s c lose d i tself t ake the car d s an d try to a rr an ge them acc ord i ng to thei r rel a ti ons an d affin i ti es T he re adi ng whi ch you mus t give the m f or thi s p urp os e will d oubtless s ug N ote all o f the s e ges t n ew id eas o r d et ai ls o f tre a tm ent E ven i f you h ave a ro ugh p l an try to see if you ca nnot mak e o thers th a t are b ett er One o f the c hi e f advan t ages o f the car d s is th a t the makin g o f a new p l a n d oe s not i nvo lve rewri tin g ; but d o not he s i t a t e a t any tim e i n the c ourse o f your wo rk to rewri t e anythi n g th a t nee ds rewri ti ng N0 o n e ever s ave d tim e by such a ref u s a l T he first rough pla n an d p erh ap s sever a l l a ter ones shoul d be regar de d not as fin al but a s us eful only to evoke ideas an d give fl e xi bili ty to yo ur c on cep ti on o f the subj ec t T he fin al pla n s houl d not be un dert ake n unti l all the ide a s you can evo ke h ave been c olle c te d c l a sh ed together an d weighe d Other m e an s o f evoking id e as may be m entione d though none o f them i s so valu able a s those just sug geste d One o f the m ost frui tful i s the di s c overy of a gener al an a lo gy between your subje c t an d the l aws whic h I n thi s govern i t an d som e other subje c t an d its l a ws manner all br an che s o f hu man knowle dg e an d s p e cul a ti on h ave been tr ans for m e d by re al or s u pp ose d an a logi es to bi ology An alogi es suggest questi ons an d a questio n rightly a s ked i s a p r o blem h alf solve d I n the s am e .

E NGL IS H COMP O SI T I ON

w ay c ontr a st may serve to stimul a te questioni ng an d thought — r i n k l Pro c u s e c i a l no w e d e At so m e tim e e a rly 3 g p g i n the c ourse o f thi s p re par a tory work you o r l a te may feel the nee d o f sp e cia l knowle dg e I f your gener a l knowle dg e a n d your p ower o f th i nkin g are goo d you shoul d h ave som e ide a o f where to fin d the s p e cia l i nf or ma ti on you requ ire I f y o u nee d to consult books bi bli o gr aphi es may be o f a ssi st an ce U s ing your sour c es o f in forma ti on p rop erly i s of no less imp ort an c e th an L et your a tti tu d e be c ri tica l fin di n g the right s our ces ac tively re ce p t ive c re a ti ve At thi s a n d a t every e a rli er a n d l a ter 4 S ele ction st age o f your work id e a s an d ma terial n o t sui te d to your gener a l ide a o r to your pl a n o f tre a tm ent must be reje c te d So m e ide a s will app e a r unfit as so o n as c onsid ere d ; oth ers wi ll not manifest the i r un fitn ess unti l l a ter ; so m e not unti l your c omp osi tion is t aki ng or even h a s t aken its fin a l f or m Do not hesi t a te ei ther now or l a ter to s ac ri fic e a ny ide a or ma terial not stric tly g er mane to your p urp ose I t t akes cour ag e an d h a r dn ess to d o thi s but the s acrific e w ill be rew a rd e d E xc e llen c e li ves by s ac ri fic e Partia li ty to o ne s o wn ide a s unw ill in gn es s to omi t wh a t see m s to h a ve been well thou ght o r well s aid i s a mai n cause o f d e f or m e d di sp ro p orti one d wri ti ng T he mania to tell i t all hi n d ers c le a rness a n d p re ci si on a n d uni ty an d e mp h a si s M oreover a c omp o s itio n th a t e mp ti es the wri ter r a rely fills the re ad er ; an d the lees o f a ny subj e c t a re bi tter to the pal a te ,

’

”

A M ANUAL FO R WRITE RS

O R GAN IZATI ON T he two essentia l l aws o f co mp osi ti on a re those o f f o cu s an d of m ovem ent F ro m these a re d eri ve d the four usu ally sta te d a s fundam ent al those o f uni ty o f c le arness o f c oherenc e an d o f e mp h a si s b es id es all the mi n o r l aws an d ordi n an ces F o cus is the result o f selec ti on an d o f a rrange m ent M ovem ent i s se cure d i n part by a rr an gement an d in pa rt by e xp ressi on A rr angem ent or der organi z a ti on is theref ore the m os t imp ort a nt el em ent i n co mp osi ti on O r d er is essential for the re ad er f or wi thout i t a c o mp osi ti on i s unre adable a m ere ch a os of fac t s a n d id e a s I t i s equ ally essential for the wri ter Wi thout i t wr i tin g be co m es p rac tically imp ossi ble ; a book is not wr i tten T he wri ter as a whol e but one ch ap te r a t a tim e mus t di vid e hi s t a sk i n or d er to ma ster i t an d di vi si on i s imp ossi ble wi thout a rr ange m ent Goo d organi z a ti on c o m es not by i nspi r a ti on but by careful thi nk in g E ven m en of gen i us a rr an g e an d organiz e thei r work w i th care N a tive t alent o r lon g pr ac tic e may gre a tly abridge the p ro ce ss but the p ro c ess i s ne cess a ry B ad organiz a ti on an d c on fuse d a rr ang e ment h av e cause d a s many fai lures a s ha s p overty o f thou ght A p l an i s the only means o f se curin g p rop orti on o f avoidi ng superďŹ&#x201A;uity an d m e agerne s s a n d w an d er in g An ar chi te c t who truste d to i nspi ra ti on r a ther th a n to ca reful thought f or the a rr ang em ent o f the roo m s a n d h alls a n d st ai rw ays an d doors a n d wi n dows o f the house he w a s bui ldi ng woul d p ro du c e a sorry s tru c ture IV

E NGL IS H

C OM PO SI T ION

—As

i t i s the aim o f every c omp osi ti on to i t is ne c ess a ry th a t the s et f orth so m e g ener a l id e a ma terial shoul d be c hosen a n d a rr a n ge d wi th thi s i n vi ew T 0 f o cus the ma teria l up on thi s ide a the main topic s m ust be a rr ange d i n p rop er or d er ; e ach mu s t be sub di vid e d i nto i ts subor di n a te pa rts ; an d e ac h main a n d subor di n a te topic must be gi ven i ts p rop er p rop orti on an d no m ore of space a n d e mp h a s is O ne o f the gre a test foes o f the gener al ide a i s the subor din ate to pic favore d by the wri ter f or so m e re a son an d gi ven un due emp h a si s Another is the rebelli on of subor din a te id e a s T h acker ay a n d others tell us how i n fic ti on c h a r ac ters som etim es f ollow thei r own bent di sobey the i r ma s ters The youn g wri ter fin d s th a t id e a s of all sorts d o thi s c ontinu a lly But he Shoul d p er mi t rebellion only i n hi s p l an not i n his c o mp osi ti on a n d if he cannot supp re s s the rebel li on he Shoul d yiel d to the vic tors an d p ro du c e a new p l a n F o cus the e xp re s sion of the gener al ide a is im p ossi ble excep t u p on the b a si s o i defini te p l ann in g 2 The b egin n ing —T he be gi nni ng is one o f the m ost imp ort ant parts of a c omp osi tion The l a st thin g one le arns i n maki ng a book s ays P a s cal i s wh a t to put fir st T he ol d er rhetoricia ns an d wri ters fa vore d Sp e cia lly prepa re d begi nni ng s o f ten very re mote f rom the mai n the m e M o d ern wri ters f ollow only one fixe d rule : to begi n p ro mp tly — r r f to i s T he ord er o f topic s may be Th e o d e o c 3 p d eter mi ne d by any o n e of a num ber o f p ri n cip les T he or d er o f tim e the or d er o f p osi ti on i n spac e the cli mac t ic I

F o cus

MANUAL FO R WRI TE RS

order o r the ord er of i n cre a sin g c omplica ti on may d omi n a te T he o n e thi ng n ec ess a ry i s th a t no ne o f the s e p rin ciples s ho uld tyr ann iz e over the wri t er Hi s bu s i ne s s i s to have an d to give a c le a r V i ew o f the whol e an d o f the r el a tions o f the parts I t i s also d esi r a ble th a t the ord er Should b e s u ch th a t e ach pa rt is exp l ai ne d by wh a t h a s p re c e d e d Som etim e s however c le a rnes s o bt ai n a bl e i n thi s w ay m ust be s ac riﬁc e d to se cure s urp ri s e or emp h a s i s E ac h to pic e ach id e a s h o ul d be plac e d where i t will c on tri bute the gre a test eff ec ti ve n es s to the o th er s a n d to the who le I n gener a l e a ch id e a Shoul d be use d only o nce but a wri t er s hould n ever h es it a te to r ep e a t wh a t n ee d s rep eti ti on — The s urest 4 R e latio ns an d proportion s o f topics m e ans o f giving to topic s th ei r p rope r rel a t i on s a n d p ro po rti o n s is the f o rma ti on o f a ca ref ul stru c tur a l p lan of the whole c ompo s i ti on T hi s wi ll kee p h ead s a n d subhe ad s in th ei r p rop er rel a tions and s e cure to them a ttenti on p rop orti o n a te to thei r imp ort a n c e i n the p resen tatio n o f the p ri n cipa l id e a Sp e cia l d evic es f or the h an dli n g of difﬁ cult p robl em s of rel a tion and p ro p ortion i n different f orm s of di s c ourse may be foun d i n a ny goo d tre a ti se on c omposi tio n — M t ove m en Mo vem ent may b e d ef e c ti ve i n e i ther 5 of two w ays : the wri ter may d r ag the re ad er a lo ng s o f a st th a t he has not time to s ee wh a t i s shown him or to re ac t to the new id e as p re s ented ; or he may hi n d er the re ad er s p rogress by p ointing out i n d et ai l wh a t w a s alre ady familiar o r wh a t be cam e cle ar a t a Si ngle gl a n c e ,

’

C O M PO SIT I ON

E NGL ISH

In gener al if the or d er of topic s an d subtopic s i s right ,

the m ovem ent o f the c omp osi ti on a s a whole wi ll be goo d unless there a re unusu a lly gr ave d efe c ts o f e xp ressi on 6 The en d —T he en d i s a s imp ortant a s the be gi n n in g Like the be gin nin g i t s houl d c om e p romp tly but the abruptness p e rmi s s ible in a begi nnin g i s r a rely toler able i n a n end The end may be o f any one of many typ es O f ten i ts fun c ti on i s to summariz e an d e m T he o n e unpar d on able d ef e c t phasiz e the main the me i s to blur o r we aken what p re c e des ,

E X PR E S S I ON

T o m ost p erson s who a re not i n som e w ay pro fes sio n ally c on c erne d wi th wri tin g style m e a ns d e c or a tive d et ai l T hi s is pa rtly be cause i n thei r o wn e xp eri en c e the ma teria ls throu gh which thei r thought fin d s e xp res si on the subor di n a te id e a s which d evelop exp l ai n i llustr a te an d enf orc e the i r gener al id e a are brou ght to thei r c ons ci ousness by auto ma tic suggesti on a rr ange d by a uto ma tic p ro cesses o f logic a nd a sso cia ti on an d there f ore seem no t in a ny sense forma l elem ents o f style but m ere ma terials essential an d i nsepar a ble parts o f the thought I n a sense thi s i s of c ourse true We d o very li ttle thi nkin g in abstr ac t fo rmul ae Our thou ghts are usu a lly no t b a re s keletons but c o mplete bo di es o f bone a n d flesh But just a s p hysi cal beauty i s dep en d ent not upo n the ski n o nly but no less up on the am ount a n d di stri buti on o f the fl esh an d up on the siz e a s well a s the sh ap e of e ach bone so style i n ,

A M ANUAL F OR WRITE RS

li ter a ture is d ep en d ent up on every elem ent o f f or m f ro m the general p l an o r organiz a ti on o f a c o mp o s i tion to the choic e an d p l ac e o f the s mallest word E xp ressi on i s A thou ght is not wholly the p erf e cti n g o f thi nki n g born unti l it i s exp ress e d ,

DE TAI LS OF COM P OSIT I ON

P a s s i ng to the smaller f e a tures o f a c omp osi ti on we may note th a t the go verni n g p ri n cipl e s a re i n the main the s ame th a t app ly to the c omp os i ti on as a whole an d to the larger f e a tures H ere to o the m ost imp ort ant ma tter i s arr angem ent organi z a ti on I A ll l arge c o mp osi ti ons a re di The par agr aph â&#x20AC;&#x201D; vided an d sub di vid ed acc or di n g to the i r len g th a n d c omp lexi ty i nto books parts ch ap ters se c ti ons et c an d agai n s ub di vide d i nto pa r agr ap hs a n d s enten c e s N one of these divi si ons has a ny ďŹ x e d o r st an da r d siz e or leng th A ll are p l a stic an d may be m o di ďŹ e d to sui t the i nner stru c ture o f the whol e o fwhi c h e ac h is a pa rt T he l aws o f all these pa rts are f un dament ally the s ame ; a nd sin c e they a re parts the l aws a re o f two c l a sses those o f c onne c ti on a n d those o f inn er stru c ture Co nn ecti ons a re so m etim es mad e e xp li ci tly by m e a ns of li nks i e wor d s p hr a ses senten c es pa r agr ap hs or c h ap ters as the ca se may be But o f ten the rel a ti on of the id e a s the m selves i s cle ar enough w i thout e xpli ci t exp ressi on if they f ollow in the right ord er an d when thi s i s not the ca se i nteri or a rr ang e m ent o f ten wi ll ma ke c onne c t ing li nks unne cess a ry T he best w ay to ,

ENGL IS H

COM PO SI T I ON

le arn how to c onne c t the sub di vi si on s of a c omp osi tion is to stu dy care fully the m etho d s o f goo d wri ters notin g where the c onne c ti on i s e xp lici t a n d by wh a t m e an s i t is mad e an d where i t i s impli ci t i n the id e a s or i n the a rr angem ent of d et ai ls There is no o n e rule f or c onstru c t in g pa r agr ap hs a s there i s none f or c onstru c ting ch ap ters or senten c es E fforts to f orm ul a te a sin gle rule a re su cc ess ful only when they exc lud e from c onsider a ti on a s b ad all examples th a t T he p ri n cipa l qu ali ti es to do n o t c onf orm to the rule aim a t a re uni ty c oherenc e c le arness a nd e mph a si s Uni ty i s l a rgely de p en dent up on exc ludin g in app rop ria te ide a s ; c oheren c e de p end s u p on a rr angeme nt an d sen ten c e c onne c ti on ; cle a rness is a fun c ti on o f organ iz a ti on c onne c ti on senten c e stru c ture gr amma r an d vo ca bul a ry ; e mp h a si s i s usu ally a ma tter o f climax but even wi thout c limac tic a rr angem ent the end o f the pa r agr ap h i s f or p urely m e c ha nica l re a sons the m ost emp h a tic p osi ti on 2 The s ente n ce â&#x20AC;&#x201D;The essentials o f the senten c e a re g oo d c onne c ti on soun d or ga niz a ti on a n d c orre c t gr amma r To the untr ai ne d wri ter senten c es a re h a r d c ryst a lli z e d affai rs When on c e a thought has t aken form i n word s i t seem s p r ac tica lly imp ossible to c h ange i t T he exp eri enc e d wri ter knows th a t a senten c e i s as e a sy to mani p ul a te a s a lu mp of p utty H e can ch ang e i ts Sh ap e twi st i t a bout di vid e i t joi n i t wi th another d o wh a t he wi ll wi th i t F o r style f or eff e c ti ve ness ski l ful organ iz a ti on o f the senten c e i s even m ore ,

A MANUAL F O R WRI TE RS

imp ortant th an c orr ec t gr amma r T he intelli gent re ad er can usu ally c orre c t fa ults of gramma r wi th li ttle eflo rt; b adly c onstru c ted senten c e s can be cure d only by rewriti ng The genera l p r in cip les of s enten c e stru c ture a re a s h a s been said the s am e as tho s e o f pa r agr ap h s truc ture M a ny Sp e cial d evic es of i nterest a n d v a lue a re di scusse d i n books o n c omp o s i ti on Stu dy esp e cia lly re ferenc e a nd c onnec ti on the p osi ti o n o f m o difiers the retenti on o f the subj ec t the us e o fpa r a llel struc ture a n d phr a sin g a nd the r edu c ti on o f p redic a ti on — V o bu r c a l a Word s are the ultima te elem ents o f 3 y sp ee ch So import ant i s ca re ful stu dy o f the m th a t style h a s been d efined a s c on s i s ting o f the right wor d s i n the right p l aces a nd thi s defini ti on is c o rre c t if t aken i n a ll i ts imp lica ti ons T he w ay to ac qui re a vo cab ul a ry is to m eet new word s ei ther i n books or i n s pee c h and le arn wh a t they m e a n an d how they a re us ed M any o f us t ake no pai ns to le arn ac cur a tely wh a t a new wor d m e a ns o r how i t i s use d a nd c onsequ ently there a re l arg e nu mbers of wor d s whi ch we kn ow by sight a s i t w ere but ca nnot use be cause we h ave never re a lly kn own the m T o note new word s an d then stu dy their me aning s rela ti ons di stin c ti ons an d u s e s i n dic ti on a ri es tre a ti ses on synonym s a nd anto nym s and o ther books o n us age i s imp er a tive The fun dam ental l a w o f l an gu age is us age M u ch ha s been wri tten about p rovi n ciali s m s colloquiali s m s “ fin e wri ti n g sl ang neolo gi sm s p oetic dic ti on a n d .

”

ENGL IS H C O MP O SI T ION

2 3,

the li ke Questi ons o f d et ail must o f c ou rse be t aken u p i n d et ai l but m ost questi ons th a t a ri se wi ll be ren dere d e a si er of solution if we re me mber the b a si s o f the l a w o f us ag e L anguage i s a so cia l p ro du c t C orre c tne s s i n l a nguage i s not li ke keepi ng the m or a l l a w or the l a ws of the state but li ke d ressing p rop erly or beh avi ng p r o p erly Vi ol a ti ons o f us age i n l angu ag e a re li ke vi ol a ti ons o f other so ci al us ag es ih the main o f f enses agai nst c ustom an d g oo d t a ste T here a re d egrees of c ourse Som e li nguis tic errors a re an alogous to the weari n g o f a ski rt by a man ; others to a ttendin g an eveni n g pa rty w i thout a c o a t o r a c olla r ; others to we ari ng a gau dy w ai stc o a t ; a n d s o on Word s a n d exp ressi ons tha t a re p er fec tly fit f or one o cca si on or purp ose a re in b ad ta s te f or oth er s — R r a e T he hab i t which i njures m d e h s s e a d a y p 4 one s vo cabul a ry m ost i s the h ab i t of usi ng c ryst alliz e d phr a ses T hou ght a n d the re a l p hr a sin g of thought soon be c om e imp oss i ble Sl ang is not b ad in i tself ; in dee d mu ch sl an g is f resh vigorous pic turesque a re a l addi ti on to the resour ce s o f the l an gu age But the us er o f sl ang is a user o f re ady mad e phr a ses not a us e r an d he soon be c om es in capable o f o f li vin g wor d s any i n d ep en d ent organi z a ti on o f hi s thou ght A d oz en c urrent p hr a ses suffic e f or a ll hi s re ac ti ons to the man i fol d obje c ts a nd influenc es o f life At first the use o f the re ad y mad e phr a se re ac ts only up on the user s faculty o f exp ressi on but soon his thoughts a nd e m oti ons be c om e as v ague as ill defin ed as f or m less as the e xp ress i ons he .

—

’

A MANUAL F O R WRITE RS

cultiva te d the h ab i t o f using Thi s result i s n o t p e culia r to sl an g ; i t i s n o t a t all due to the un co n ven tio nal c h a r ac ter o f Sl an g but r a ther to its c onventi ona l use ; i t is just a s mu ch to be f e are d i n c onne c ti on wi th the hab i tual use o f quotatio ns o r o f an y c o nventi on a l j a r gon 5 R evis ion â&#x20AC;&#x201D;M u c h wri ti n g i s d one un der s u c h c on ditio n s tha t c orre c ti on o r r evis i on i s imp ossi ble A nyone who h abi tu ally wri tes under these c ondi ti ons m ust le arn to thi nk r apid ly an d cle arly an d must red u c e the or gan i z atio n a n d exp ressi on o f his id e a s to auto ma tic p ro c ess es Wri tin g o f very hi gh qu ali ty can be p ro du ced an d i s daily p rodu c ed in thi s w ay The wri ter whos e am b i ti on i s lim i ted to bei ng a li ter ary a rti s a n m ust tr ai n him sel f to th ese r apid automa tic p ro c esses But even he wi ll imp rove hi s p ro du c t a nd his p ower o f p ro du c ti on if when o cca si on p ermi ts he will p r ac tic e revi sion a n d reorganiz ati on The wri ter who wi shes to be c o m e a n a rti st m ust d evote m u ch o f his a ttenti on an d ener gy to reor ga niz a ti on co rre c ti on a nd rewr i tin g I d e a s an d l an gu age a re i nd ee d p l a stic and the ma ster ca n do wh a t he w ill w i th them but even he m ust o f ten rewr i te a page ma ny tim es an d the novic e cann ot le a rn the a rt w i tho ut givin g hi s days an d nights to p roblem s o f rem od elin g a n d re p hr a si ng has

CHA PTER II

GRAMM AT I CAL

N O TE S

A gr amma r o f a l an gu age is a systema tic acc ount o f i ts stru c tur a l l aws a s est a bli she d by us age L ogic an d .

gr ammar a re c losely rel a te d an d lingui s tic us age ten d s to be c om e logica l ; but the two s ci en c es di ffer funda m ent ally L ogica l p ro c esses h ave no rela ti on to tim e ; they never we a r n o r w a rp nor be c om e dis torte d ; they be a r no ma rk o f pa st us e A l an gu age li k e a livin g c re a ture be ars i ts whole hi story in its own bein g ; i t is wh a t i t i s to day be cause o f wh a t i t did an d was y es terday U s age is the fin al l aw o f l a ngu age a nd vi ol ati ons of u s ag e though they may on o cca s i on be justifia ble a re li ngui stic errors Wh a t was on c e an error may b e c om e us ag e ; i t then c e a ses to b e an error an d be c om es c orre c t E xamp les o f thi s tr ans fo r ma ti on a re num er o us : the first d i n s o un ded w a s on c e a n e rr o r o f the s am e sort as the first (I i n dro wn ded; the I i n if I pleas e w a s on ce a n error f or me L ogic an d a n a logy a re uns afe guides i n gr amm ar ; they le ad one a right only where they h ave a lre ady been i n c orp or a te d i n us age Gr amm a r c onsi sts o f a c ert ai n nu m ber o f genera l f orm s and l aws o f very wid e va lidi ty an d a c ert ain nu m ber of sp e cia l ca ses e xc ep tion a l form s a nd u s ages an d idio m s a ll of the m re c or d s an d results o f cert ain parts o f the lif e hi story o f the l an gu age Sca r c ely any ,

M ANUAL FO R WRI TE RS

tre a ti se on E ngli s h gr amma r is ex hausti ve enough to gi ve all the det ails c onc erni ng whi c h wri ter s o cca s i on ally w i sh i nforma ti on Here a s we h a ve s pac e f or b ut a f ew we Sh a ll p re sent only s u ch a s e xp erie n c e Shows to be i n nee d o f s pecial emp h as i s .

NO U NS

—A ttention sho ul d be given to i rre gul ar p lura ls an d to exc ep tion al uses o f s ingul a r a n d p lur a l f orm s Li s t s w ill be f ound i n all gr amma rs Poss es s ive s —T he ten d en cy to tre a t a wor d 2 group a s a whole i s ca rried o ut p erfe c tly i n the p oss essive ca se T he p ossessive en di n g is a tt ac he d to the l a s t word of the group however l a rge the g rou p may b e : “ “ the King o f E ngl an d s c rown Jo nes the h a tter s “ house C o mpa re the Smi th an d Brown s sho p p lur al s o n s i n law wi th the p ossess ive s on in law s Sc hola rs now generally re co gn i z e th a t the p ossess ive o f “ s o m ebo dy [ so m eone a nybo dy a nyone] e l s e i s f orm e d by a tt aching the p os s es s ive sign to the en d o f the “ g r o up : som ebo dy e ls e s N ote th a t when se pa r a te ownership is to be i ndica te d s epa r a te po s ses s ive fo rm s “ mus t be u s e d : Smi th s an d B rown s hors e s The p ossessive f orm i s gener a lly u s e d only of p er “ “ sons or animals but we s ay a day s work a night s “ rest a yea r s vaca t ion — l l t i C c v s o e e noun C olle c tive nouns a re g r am 3 matically Sin gula r s but may be tre a te d as p lur a ls if i ndi vidu a l ra ther th an c olle c tive ac tion is to be e xp resse d : M ur als

’

”

’

”

’

”

’

”

’

”

’

”

’

”

’

GR AMMAT I CAL NOTE S

“

T he c ommi ttee i s p re pari ng its re p ort but : T he c ommi ttee wi ll not trouble their he ad s a bout your di s app rova l I n no ca se is in c onsi stency o f tre a tm ent “ a llow a ble T he c ommi ttee have g one to thei r roo m “ a n d i s p repa ring i ts rep ort ; Samar ia f or their sins i s destroye d E xp ressi ons of qu anti ty a nd multip le s o f num bers when formi ng a S in gle ide a a re tre a te d as S in gul a r : “ “ T en doll a rs is a low p ric e ; T hi s ﬁf ty dolla rs i s “ yours ; Three t im es three is ni ne I t see m s best to c onstrue the sum o f two or m ore num bers in the s am e “ w ay : T hree a n d four i s [or makes ] seven N ouns p lural in form but S ingul a r in m ea ning a re n o t c o lle c t i ves but are c onstrue d a s s in gul a r ; su ch a re : “ “ “ “ news a thletic s p hysic s ma thema tic s etc ”

”

R ONOU N S

I n the use o f p ronouns c onst ant care i s ne cess a ry to ,

“

H e told the c o ac hman th a t he p revent amb igui ty : woul d k ill hi m if he w a s not ca reful O f ten a s here the only w ay to a vo id am bigu i ty i s to c h ang e in di re c t “ di s c ourse into di re c t John Smi th the s o n of the mayor who was k i lle d a t San Ju an was my best fri en d ; thi s i s enti rely am biguous an d shoul d be reca st “ I t was pi tiful to I t Shoul d not be use d ca relessly : he a r hi s c on fess ion ; I p romi se d tha t no use should be mad e o f i t but he insi s te d up on i t th a t he m ust tell a ll a bout i t In g ener a l i t i s da ngerous to all ow a ny noun to c o m e between a p ronoun a nd i ts ante c e d ent ”

”

M AN UAL F O R WRITE RS

The use of the obje c ti ve af te r fini te for m s o f the co pul a i s c omm on in sp ee ch but not a llow a ble i n a style “ “ wi th a ny p retenti ons to ele gan ce : I t i s me [I ] It is him et c Who for who m i s c olloqu ial an d careless Who m f or “ “ I did not who i n Who m do you thin k I am " an d know who m he w a s i s due to an unenlightene d eff ort a t c orre c tness O ne e xc ep tio n al u s e however may be noted : the phra se than whom i s i n goo d use i nste ad o f “ than who : M r Jones than who m there i s no m ore co mp etent judge et c “ In li ke m anner John an d me went i s in c orre c t an d “ Keep a vulga ri sm whi le T hey went w i th John an d I i t between you an d I whic h a re equ a lly c ommon an d equ ally in c orre c t a re due to the eff ort to be c orre c t “ Af ter let s a sup erfluous i ts is o f ten i nserte d : L et s us g o Som e spe cial difficulti es wi th relati ve p ronouns may be m enti one d The comm onest i s the use o f and who “ o r and wh He i ch when no rel a t ive h a s p re c e de d : intro du ce d m e to a very fin e p layer f rom E ngl an d an d “ who h ad won many m e da ls there ; H e picke d u p a book lying on the w ind ow s ea t and which I h ad not ” As an d c onne c t s only ele m ents o f the se en be fore s am e order su ch e xp ressi on s a re obvi ously i n co rre c t Another error consi sts in shif tin g f rom which to that or f ro m that to whi ch; for the s ake o fc le a rness a n d elegan c e “ the s am e form shoul d be used i n pa r a llel cl auses : A man who m you can trust a n d that [who m] every bo dy likes .

”

’

”

GRAMMAT I CAL N OTE S

Another c omm on error is d ue to c on fus i on o f ante “

ce d ents : He i s one o f the best s chola rs th a t goes [go] ” to our s chool T he exc essive use o f rel a ti ve cl a uses o f ten results i n he aviness a nd slowness of m ove m ent T he rem e dy i s to substi tute word s or p hra ses for the cl auses wherever th i s i s p oss i ble In d eﬁn i te p ronouns (a n d adj e c ti ves) gi ve li ttle trouble exc ep t in the case of the di stri buti ves any every each Sin c e these a re a ll sin gular p ronoun s tha t “ refer to the m must be sin gula r : E very man must hear ” “ his o wn burd ens ; E veryone did a s he p le a se d .

”

III

ADJ

E CTIV E S

T wo

topic s requi re di s cussion : I T he artic le shoul d be rep e a te d wi th two or m ore c onne c te d nouns or adje c ti ves when separ a te p er s ons or “ thi ng s are m e ant : H e h ad a black an d whi te ti e me ans th a t he had one ti e whi ch was black an d whi te ; “ He h ad a black a nd a whi te t i e m e an s th a t he h ad a black ti e an d a whi te one The s am e rule should be observe d wi th the his her thi s an d other d em ons tr a “ in di ca tes o n e tives : The se c retary a n d tre a surer “ p erson ; i ndica tes The se c ret a ry a n d the tre a surer two But where the two thi n gs a re c lo sely c onne c te d o r where no c on f us i on can a ri se us ag e a llows the use o f “ only o n e d e m onstra tive wor d : T he l aws o f the M e des “ ” “ an d Persians ; H e love s his fa ther a nd m other ; H e i nvi te d all the boys a nd girls .

”

MANUAL

WRITE RS

F OR

On the other h a nd when there is no p ossi b ili ty ,

amb igui ty the a rt icl e is o f ten r ep e a te d for e mph a s i s : “ “ He is a g entleman an d a s c ho l a r ; H e w as a c ruel a tre acherous an d a relentle s s foe 2 When speakin g o f two p ersons or thing s n o t the “ sup erl a tive but the c ompa ra t ive Should b e us e d : Thi s i s the better o f the two When any p erson o r th in g is compa red wi th o th er s o f the s am e c l a ss o ther must be “ use d to exclud e the p erson or thin g c ompa re d : H e i s qu icker th an a ny o ther b o y on the te am Wi th s up erl atives the p ro p er wo rd to us e i s not any “ but all: I t is the l ar ge st ca na l o fan y [ a ll] in the worl d ; “ I t i s the best fru i t o f any ,

”

IV I

RB S

Agree ment —A verb shoul d agree wi th i ts s ubje c t

i n num b er an d i n p erso n In E ngli sh two S i ngul a r subje c ts c onne c te d by ei ther o r (or n ei th er n o r) t a ke the verb i n the “ s ingul a r : E i th er he or she go es to town every day C omp oun d subj ec ts requ i re p lur a l verbs a s a rule ; but i f the subje c t is a single id e a the verb may be “ s i n gul ar : Bre ad an d mi lk is a ll She can eat A p lur a l subje c t if rega rd e d as f ormi n g a sin gle qu anti ty “ may be tre a te d a s si n gula r : T en mi les i s noth in g to “ h im ; but : T en men are here Phra ses joi ne d to the s ubje c t by with or as well as d o not affe c t the num ber of the s ubje c t or the verb : “ John wi th hi s two b rothers was there .

”

GRAMMAT I CAL NOTE S

3 1:

T he gre a test cause of l ack o f agreem ent of the verb wi th i ts subje c t i s the o ccurren c e between the two o f a lon g e xp ressi on cont ain in g o n e or m ore wor d s differ in g “ i n nu m ber from the subje c t : The cause o f all hi s troubles wi th the workm en are [i s] h i s c onst ant d e man d s f or e x tr a wor T wo or m ore subje c ts differi ng in p erson if c onne c te d by o r t ake the verb form requi re d by the subjec t ne a rest “ “ Do you or he know the p l ace " the verb : She “ o r I go to s ee h i m every day ; Do es he or I help you m ost " But when su ch senten ces s oun d a wkw a rd “ they s hould be re c onstru c te d : H e or I am a t hom e all day whi le corre c t i s better a void e d T he cop ul a ag rees wi th the subje c t even if the “ p re dica te i s o f a different p erson o r nu mber : I am “ “ he ; Yo u are he ; The many comp l aints are the “ cause o f hi s le aving ; T he cause o f hi s le aving i s “ the many c omp l ai nts ; The three are one T he explet ive (or Sham) s ubjec t i t t akes i ts p re dica te “ “ in the thi rd p ers o n sin gul a r : I t i s I I t is o ur f ri end s who wrong us T he e xp letive there is not a Sh am subje c t an d d oes “ not aff e c t the num ber o f the verb : T here are ten 2 O mis s ion o f the s ub j ect —In adverbia l c l auses o f manner a n d d eg ree the Subje c t i s o f ten omi tte d : “ Geor ge re ce i ve d these p resents gr aciously a s be cam e “ hi s sup eri or m eri t ; I guessed an d as a lways h app ens “ guesse d wrong ; AS may be imagin e d we were “ “ f rightene d ; We set o ut as happy a s c ould be ; A s ,

”

” ”

”

A M ANUAL F OR WRI TE RS

sur e a s can be here he c om es But the o mi ssi on o f the s ubj ec t of an i n dep en dent c l au s e i s b ad E n gli s h : “ Wen t to to wn ye s terday Saw an a erop lan e — h am o j e In vulgar an d co lloqui a l E n g li sh t S b c 3 “ many verbs take a s ham obj ec t i t: Yo u wi ll ca t c h i t “ “ I h a ve mad e i t up w ith him ; Yo u a re t akin g ho t ; “ “ He i s goin g i t p retty f a st ; He h ad rou ghe d i t e as y ; T his locuti on alm o st a lway s has a i t all his li f e collo quia l ton e — ense T s It shoul d b e note d th a t the p r es ent 4 p erfe c t ten s e i s not a pa st but a p resent ten se I t makes a s t a te ment f ro m the p oint o f V i ew of the p re sent though being a p erf e c t tense i t i s c on cerne d onl y wi th ac tion th a t is co mplete d th a t i s th a t o ccurr ed i n the “ pa st : I s aw hi m is a st a tem ent concernin g the pa s t ; “ I have s een him is a s t a tement co n c erni ng the p r esent and therefore mu s t n o t b e u s ed wi th a ny ter m in di “ ca ting a p oint o f V i ew o f the pa st I have s een your “ f a ther yester day is not goo d E ngli sh I n ever s aw a better ca r is a gener a l denia l wi th r egar d to pa s t “ ac ti o n ; I have n ever s een a better ca r covers the s am e f ac ts but impli es the p re s ent as the b a se or p oint o f ref eren c e — t m i t t on a n a e ense f or m C d s C ar el ess Sp e ak ers 5 som etimes p ro du ce i ncorr ec t f or m s o f the verbs th a t a re “ due to c ontami n a tion : I w i sh you had have gone ; “ I would have let him go n e 6 S e quen ce o f ten s e s —In g ener a l the u s ag e i n re gar d to the tenses o f subordi n a te c l auses i s c lea r a n d well ”

”

‘

”

GRAMMAT I CAL NOTE S

un derstoo d But a gener a l truth is of ten wron gly put i n the pa st tense i n a subor din a te c l ause dep en d ent “ up on a verb i n the pa st tense : Ke a ts s aid tha t be auty was [i s] truth T he subjun c ti ve is use d in 7 The s ub j un ctive i n d ep en d ent c l auses : a) I n the p resent tense to e xp ress a wi sh f or the “ “ f uture : Go d help u s " L ong li ve the ki ng " b) I n the pa st tense to e xp ress an imp ossible wi sh “ wi th re ga r d to the p re s ent : O h th a t he were here now " p erf e c t tense to e xp ress an imp ossi ble c) I n the pa st— “ wi sh wi th re gar d to the pa st : O h th a t I had been there " In subordi n a te cl auses the subjunc tive i s li ttle used i n current E ngli sh T he only f orm in regula r use i s the pa st tense o f the verb be to e xp re ss a c on di ti on untrue “ i n the p resent : If he were here I should not be af r aid But i n p oetry an d eleva te d p ros e the subjun c tive i s use d i n clau s es o f c ondi ti on c on cess ion or purp ose an d in “ temp or a l cl auses rel a tin g to the future : I f thi s be true “ make the be s t o f i t ; T hough H e s lay m e yet w ill I “ trust Him ; Take hee d lest he fin d you sleepin g ; “ I wi ll depa rt ere he co me up on m e 8 The impe rative —It may be note d th a t a con di tion may som et imes be p resente d vi vid ly by the us e “ of the imp er a tive : S tri p a kin g of hi s robes an d he “ S pare the ro d an d s po i l is but a ma n l ike ourselves the c h il d — n fin i t ive has tense— T he i f orm s but i t h i n fi n i v e T e 9 they exp ress not the tim e but the st age of the ac tion .

”

: 3

”

A MANUAL FO R WRI TE RS

F ai lure to

r eco gni z e thi s is resp on s i b le f or o n e o f the c omm onest error s in the u s e o f the infin i ti ve T he p res ent infin i tive m er ely indi ca tes th a t the ac ti o n exp ressed is in co mp le te a t the tim e i n di ca te d by the pri n cipa l verb ; the p erfe c t i nfin i tive th a t i t i s c o mp lete “ a t the tim e of the p ri n cipal verb : I am gl ad to s ee “ “ you ; I am glad to have s een you ; H e tol d him to “ He is reported to have gon e I t is e vid ent th a t go ; the p er f e c t i nfin i ti ve cannot be us ed af ter verbs o f p ur C onsequently a ll s u ch sent en ces po s e o r anticipa tio n “ I int en d ed to have as the f o ll owin g a re i n c o rr ec t : “ “ I hop ed to have s een him ; I e xp e c te d to have go n e ; But wi th o ught the p erf ec t i nfin i ti ve may been ther e be u sed even though the ac t io n cannot b e con c e i ve d a s “ c omplete d b ef ore the obliga tion b ecam e va lid : They were a ske d to go an d they ought to have gon e Am bigu i ty of ten ari se s f rom the ca reless use of in fin i “ tives : He s aid th a t he wi shed to take his f ri en d wi th him to vis i t the capi ta l an d to s tudy m ed cine Am b i gui ty may som etime s be re m e di e d by the i nserti o n o f exp lici t c onnec ti ves ; but o f ten the am b iguou s senten c e must be recas t Io P articiples —P a rticip les Shoul d a lw ays be at “ tached to so m e noun o r p ronoun : Go in g ho m e I f oun d “ a dim e ; T he leader havin g been killed the rebel s fl e d A very c omm on erro r c ons i sts i n usin g a pa rticipia l “ phra se wi th no a tt ach ment : Gettin g no rep ly i t was “ c le a r th a t we had b een d e c eive d ; Op en ing the d oor the ol d ch ai r c ould e a s i ly be seen .

”

GRAMMAT I CAL NO TE S

a participia l p hr a se is d evoid of rel a t ion a l i n dica tions am b igui ty som etim e s ari s e s unless the rel a “ ti on i s c le arly in di ca te d by an adverb : While go ing hom e I he a r d a f rightful no i se II The ge run d — T he gerun d or verb a l noun i n — i ng o f ten c losely resem bles the p resent pa rt icip le M any p ersons a re c onf use d by thi s rese mbl an c e an d a re “ a t a loss to know whether to s ay : I w a s af r aid o f hi s “ d e c e ivin g m e or I w a s af raid o f hi m d e cei vin g m e A f ter a p ronoun or a simp le noun us age favors the f or m er But there a re inst an c es i n whi ch the p ossessive f ollowe d by the gerun d woul d be awkw a r d an d i n these ca ses care ful wri ters use the obje c ti ve f ollowe d by the “ pa rticip le : There i s no su c h thin g as a l angu age “ H e s aw the p r o p ri ety o f the style beco min g corrup t ; bein g fas hio n ed to the ma teria l I t shoul d be note d th a t the noun in in g when p re c e d e d by the a rticle (d efin ite or in d efin i te) lo s es i ts verb a l f un c tions a n d requi res a p rep osi ti on to s how i ts “ rela t ion to a noun o r p ronoun followi ng i t : T he finding “ The clo s ing of the of the c o mpa ss w a s the i r s a lv a ti on ; door w a s the S ign al agree d up on 12 The copula —T he verb be when i t m erely c on c omp lem ent is n ects i ts subje c t w i th i ts p re di ca te ca lle d the li n k verb or co pula Si n ce i t m erely c onne c ts wi thout e xp ressi ng an ac ti on i ts p redica te comp lem ent belon gs to the subje c t an d is in the nomin a t ive ca se “ “ “ I t is I I t i s they A m erry old s o ul So we s ay : w a s he I f the p redica te comp lem ent i s a m o difi er o f Sin c e

”

A M ANUAL F O R WRI TE RS

“

”

the subje c t i t is usu a lly an adj ec ti ve a s H e was late “ Be quick" But the co mp lement may be an ad verb “ (or an adverb p hra se) o f p l ace : I wa s thereyesterday “ He w a s in the wreck I3 Copul ative verb s —Su ch verbs a s s eem appear loo k feel tas te s mell s ou nd beco me remain con tin ue are of ten use d as link — verb s ; but i n addi ti on to c onne c t i ng the subje c t an d the p redi cate c omp le m ent they st a te the n a ture o f the c onne c ti on T he wor d use d after su ch verbs to e xp ress the qu a li ty o f the subje c t i s not an “ “ adverb but an adje c t ive : I t s eem s go od I t app e a rs “ “ “ i mp o ssi ble H e look s ill H e f eels ill I t tastes “ “ s o ur The fl ower s s m ell s weet The bell soun d s “ “ “ hars h I t be cam e dark She re maine d s ad Yo u “ “ She k ep t qui et c ontinue d s ilen t He turne d pale “ He went craz y Wi th s o m e of these verbs thi s con struc ti on origin a te d by the omi ss i on of the co mp le “ m entary infini ti ve to be ; w i th others by the omi s si on o f a refle xi ve p ronoun as obje c t Som e re c ent wri ters h ave use d i n the s am e w ay many other verbs “ simil a r i n m e anin g to these : The le aves tou che d co o l et c ; but su ch us age is bol d an d Should be le f t to the e xp eri en c e d wri ter O f c ourse these verbs may t ake an adverb to e xp ress “ i fi a m od ca ti on o f the ac t ion e xp resse d by the verb : H e “ “ s u l ill f elt dden y I t be cam e gradually da rk ; She ; remaine d long si lent “ ” I4 S hall an d affi rma ti ve senten c es sh all in the first p erson s ign ifies e xp e c t an cy future ,

”

GRAMMAT I C AL NOTE S

ac ti on ; i ts m e ani n g is reverse d in the se c on d an d thi r d p ersons an d signi fies determi n a tion on the pa rt o f the sp e aker ; will in the first p erson s ignifies will in gness o r d etermi n a ti on or p ro mi se ; i n the se con d an d th i r d “ p ersons i t signi fies m erely future ac ti on : I [o r we] “ sh all go to town w i th h im ; He [o r you they] wi ll g o to town w i th him (both these senten c es e xpress future “ “ ac ti on) I [or we] will go to town wi th him He [o r you they] s hall go to town wi th him e xp res s determina ti on or a p romi se on the part o f the sp e aker In i nterroga t ive senten ces will (or wo uld) i s used in the first p erson only in re p e a tin g a questi o n add resse d to the sp e aker ; in the s e c on d p erson i t consults the wi sh o f the p erson add resse d a nd i n the thi rd p erson i nqui re s c onc erni ng the future ac ti on o f the p erson (s ) s p oken “ of Will I [o r we] go to town w i th you " i s imp o s s ible excep t in rhetorica l rep eti tion o f a questi on addre s se d to “ the Sp e aker ; Will you go to town wi th m e cons ults the wi sh o f the p erson or p ersons add resse d or a sks for “ a p romi se ; Will they go to town wi th m e P i nqui res c on c ernin g future ac ti on S hould an d wo uld f ollow the rules for s hall an d will: “ “ I [or we] s hould travel if I h ad the m e ans He [or you they] wo uld tr avel if he had the m e ans both exp ress “ c onc lusi on m erely as a fac t I [o r we] wo uld tra vel “ if I h ad the m e ans He [or you they] s ho uld tr avel if I h ad the m e an s both exp ress a d e ci s i on or a tti tu d e o f the s p e aker S hould must never be use d in the sense “ “ I w an t y o u s ho uld [to ] go to town ; i t may : o f to ,

”

MANUAL FO R WRI TE RS

“

”

“

however be use d i n the sense o f ought to M y wi f e s ho uld [ ought to ] a rr ive soon T he u s e o f s hould a nd wo uld in in di r ec t di s c ourse i s in gener al determine d by the fo rm use d i n the s p ee c h reporte d ; but there are many s ubtle ti e s whic h ca n be le a rned only by care ful a nd minute ob s erva tion :

”

ADV E

RB S

negatives — In Old an d M idd le E n g li s h d oubling o r trebling a n ega ti ve m erely strengthene d i t but the in ﬂuen ce of La tin an d the d omi n an ce o f logic h ave cause d the reje c ti on of thi s idi om fro m En gli sh wri ting I t is s till he ar d in the Sp ee ch o f c hi l dr en an d of the une du ca te d who s ay wi th emp h a tic intenti on : “ He n ever did no thing wron g to n o bo dy Double nega tives cancel e ach other in su ch p hr a ses as n o t impas s ible n o t un li kely et c C areless wri ter s s ti ll u se e xpr ess i ons in which a n e xp r e sse d ne ga “ t ive c onﬂi c ts wi th another exp resse d or im p lie d : T he woman does n t l ive who is n o t afr aid to be a lone i n the o p en n o t even o n the brightest day 2 Adverb s re s e mblin g a dj ectives —M a ny adverbs h ave the s am e for m a s the corresp on di ng adje c ti ves Som e o f thes e had i n e arli er E ngli s h the adverb ia l en ding e which h a s s in c e been dropp e d ; su c h a re : fas t low lo ud lo ng an d many other s So m e origina te d by ana l o gy wi th these some i n other w ays “ H e f ou ght “ “ “ hard Go s lo w He w a lke d fas t L ove m e lo n g “ “ H e t alke d lo ud I bought i t cheap are goo d E n gli sh 1

Do uble

”

’

”

GR AMMAT I CAL NO TE S Se curi ty i n the use o f these

“

”

ﬂa t ad verbs can be a tt aine d only by careful observa ti on o f idio ma tic sp ee c h an d wri tin g — n n R e d u d t a r t i l es a c Wi th some verbs up is 3 p use d a s an adverb (or a separ a ble partic le) to e xp ress “ c omp leteness of the ac ti on a sserte d by the verb : H e “ shot up the town The strikers ti e d up the r ai lw ay “ “ H e cleane d up the gan g H e intend s to rest up All the s e e xp ressi ons a s be fore be ginnin g hi s duti es wi ll be note d a re c olloqu ia l if not vul ga r In others mad e on the s am e m o del up se em s to add nothin g to “ “ the m e anin g o f the verb : a s cen d up ; bree d up ; “ “ ” “ mix up ; freshen up ; Op en up O ther adverbs or pa rtic les a re use d in the s am e w a y : “ “ “ follow after ; conne c t [o r jo in] together ; so f ten “ ” “ e xamine in to ; acc ep t a But eup hony do wn ; o r rhyth m so m etim es just iﬁes su c h f orm s “ “ ” Like She sin g s li ke a In su ch senten ces a s 4 “ ” “ b ir d Wh a t i s the use o f ta lk in g li ke tha t " H e w alks like him like i s an adverb wi th p rep osi ti on a l f or c e Ca reless wri ters an d s pe akers use like as a “ c onjun c tion wi th the f or ce o f as : Dre adin g thi s day “ Do i t li ke I d o T hi s li ke I use d to dre ad Sun day ; us ag e i s very slovenly .

”

RE PO SITION S

p re pos i tions most o f ten c onfuse d in use a re at C are ful stu dy shoul d an d to by an d wi th i n an d i n to be given to thes e an d to the sta nda r d form s o f su ch The ,

A M ANUAL FO R WRI TE RS

40 “

“

phra ses as wi th rega rd to wi th a vi ew to c ompa re “ “ “ “ to compare with agree to agree wi th di ff er “ “ fro m diff er wi th different fro m (not to or than ) “ “ di s appo inted by di s app ointe d in T he corre ct a n d idioma tic u s e o f p rep osi ti on s i s very h a rd to l ea rn ; but there a re f ew subj ec ts wh ich wi ll better repay the Ca reful stu dent o f l angu ag e n

”

V II

ONJU NC TI ON S

the di st in c ti on b etween and an d but an d to th a t between and an d o r C areles s n es s may c au s e inel egan c e or even o b s cur i ty : “ “ He s ees the I did not s ee Thomas and [or] Jo hn right an d [but] d oes the wro ng 2 Ei ther or n ei ther no r a re c orrela tive conjun c ti on s C are s hould be t ak en th a t e ac h m em ber o f the pai r use d be p l ac e d i n the s am e rel a ti ve p os i tio n—th a t is b efo re the s am e pa rt o f s p e ech T he “ f ollowi ng is wrong : I c ould n ei ther s ee him n o r his f a ther Never u se either n o r or n ei th er o r as c orr e l a t i ves T he rule ju s t given for the p o s i ti on o f ei ther o r n ei ther n o r hold s g oo d f or all o ther c orrel a t ives ; th a t is S in ce they are correl a tive i n f orm they s ho ul d “ be correl a tive in p o s i tion als o So we may s ay : It “ belong s bo th to you an d to m e or I t belong s to bo th “ you and m e but n o t I t belon gs bo th to you an d m e ; fo r i n the l as t e xamp le the p osi ti on o f the two m em bers o f the correla tive pai r i s not simi l a r I n li ke ma nner I

A ttenti on Shoul d be given

”

GRAMMAT I C AL

N OT E S

“

H e n o t o nly gave m e a ticket but als o lent m e ﬁve “ d olla rs i s corre c t whi le N at o nly he ga ve m e a ticket but als o lent m e ﬁve d ollars i s in c orre c t E ven wri ters who a re ca reful about correlati ve word s som etim es vi ol a te the p ri ncip le o f c orrelative arr a nge “ i n m ent the ca se o f he adi ng s o r sub divi si ons : Henc e our di s cussi on fa lls un d er two he ad s : (a) T he rel a ti on o f the envi ronm ent to inventi on ; (b) to the sele c tion or so cia li z a ti on o f i nventi ons Thi s obviously should “ be : Henc e our di s cussion fa lls un d er two he ad s : The rel a ti on of envi ronm ent (a) to inventi on ; (b) to the sele c ti on or so cializ a ti on o f inventions 3 One o f the c ommonest causes o f a loose a nd sh am blin g style is the exc essive use o f c omp oun d sen ten ces The re m e dy i s to re constru c t su ch senten c es Thi s may be d one by omi tting c onjunc ti ons by ch angin g one o f the clauses into a p hr a se or by subordin a tin g one o f the c l auses A li ttle pr ac tic e in su ch ch anges wi ll gre a tly in cre a se the wri ter s sk i ll an d p ower o f c ontrol ”

”

’

M I SCE LLAN E OU S

NO TE S

r de r —The usu a l or der of the de cl ar a tive sentenc e is o f ten le gi tima tely i nverte d f or emph a si s or f or rhyth mica l re a sons An abuse o f thi s p r ac tic e is c urrent no w wi th c ertai n magaz ine wri ters who, p erhap s in ﬂuen c e d by lega l form s h ave mad e a manneri sm o f “ “ su ch exp ressions a s C om es John an d s ays ; C am e a day when he was no longer a ble to w a lk I.

In verte d

”

M ANUAL FO R WRI TE RS

The in dir ect ques ti o n

— A

in dire c t questi on i s not rhetorica lly a questi on an d co nse quently Shoul d not “ be f ollowe d by a question ma rk I a s ke d whe ther he could go wi th me " i s i n c orre c tly p unc tu a te d should ha ve a p eri o d i nste ad o f a n i nterro ga ti on p oint) — T t i on f m ifi ers M o difiers whether h e o s i o o d 3 p s ingle wor d s or phr a ses or c l aus es requ ire a ttenti on I n s p ee ch we a re o f ten ca reless a s to the p osi ti on o fthe m ; i n wri tin g careles sne s s on thi s p oint of ten gi ves ri s e to “ amb iguous or absurd exp ressio ns : I o n ly s aw him “ Wh a t does this me an " M oss grows o n the roof als o ; “ Wante d a c omf ortable r o om for two b achelors wi th “ O ne o f the la r gest cave s i n I ndia na s team heat ; whi ch has o nly been di s co vered recen tly i s i n Posey In gener al m o difiers should be ke p t c lose to C ounty the wor d or phr a se o r cl ause which they m o dify If giving a m odifier su ch a p osi tion results in awkw ar dness the s enten ce Sho ul d be re co nstru c te d A n appa rent e xc ep ti on to the gener a l rule tha t a m o difier sho uld b e p l ac e d a s close a s p ossi ble to the wor d i t m o difies is fo und in c onne c ti on w i th the infi n i ti ve Goo d wri ters avo id p laci n g a ny word between the to a nd the verb to whic h i t belong s a n d p uri sts a re vi olent i n th ei r o pp osi ti on to thi s s o calle d s pli t or c le f t in fini tive There are however few wri ter s who h ave not a t s o m e tim e ei ther c arelessly or p ur p osely been gu i lty o f thi s inelega nc e ; a nd p erh ap s the m ost tha t can be s aid about i t i s th a t sinc e i t is seld o m ne c ess a ry o r “ justifiable i t should be avoid e d if p ossi ble : It is 2.

”

GR AMM AT I C AL NOTE S diﬂ iéult to

j udge [rightly to ju dge] suc h a man ; “ He tri e d to bo dily as s ault m e [ to a ss ault m e bo di ly] I t i s easi er to ﬁrst i mperfectly co nceive a n id ea [ﬁr st to c on c eive a n id e a — a r a ll l m P i e s Pa r alleli s m o f p hr a sin g i s a gre a t 4 aid to c le arness an d to emph a si s Simi l ar ide a s shoul d be e xp resse d i n Simil a r l a nguage a nd in S imi la r co nstrue tions if i t i s d esire d to brin g out their rel a ti on But e xcessive par alleli s m bec om es we a r isom e esp ecially if emph a tic as in anti thetical e xp ressi ons — R e t i t i n Do not hes i t a te to rep e a t any wor d e o 5 p or phr ase if the rep eti ti on i s ne cess ary to secure cle arness or e mpha si s Re p eti ti on is n o t un p leasant if i t seem s d esigne d O nly when i t seem s to be the result o f negli gen ce d oes i t e c ho unp le a s antly 6 Ellips is — A wor d or a p hr a se th a t can be supp lie d f rom the c ontex t i s of ten omi tte d (s ee c hap v sec O f ten thi s results i n c on ci se ness an d vig or ; but when the omi ssi on is due to ca relessness confus ion or ambigui ty i s the frequent result : M an never i s but a lw ays [i s] to be blest ; R ich m on d is ne arer New York th a n “ “ He li kes m e better th an you ; I am ol d ; Chicago ; they young I n ordi n ary sp ee c h many wor d s a re tr ansf or m e d or o mi tte d as a result o f r apid a rticul a ti on Som etim es we sp e ak s o r apidly th a t unstres se d sylla bles or s ma ll word s a re p ronoun c e d only m ent ally not p hys ically Thi s inner a rticul a ti on gives ri se to su ch f orm s a s M o m “ “ ing f or Goo d m orn in g He worke d a ll m orning righ tly

”

M AN UAL FO R WRI TE RS

may be due to thi s or to the an a logy o f

“

”

a ll day “ a ll night Su ch c olloqui ali sm s a re admi ssible i n wri ti ng only when c onvers a ti on i s re p e a te d or a c onver s atio n al tone i s aim e d a t The objec ti onable vu lgari sm s a ri si ng fro m the omi s si on of to be fore place or places may h a ve a ri sen from “ careless a rticula tion : L et s go s o me place [som ewhere] “ “ He She won t go an y place [a nywhere] wi th him ; a lways wa nts m e to go [to ] p l ac es wi th him ,

”

’

”

’

”

IN DI C T I ON ‘

PIT FALL S

Und er thi s he ad h ave bee n c olle c te d som e of the m ost c ommon i nst an ces of the mi suse of wor d s an d phra ses The li st is by no m e ans exh au s ti ve ; a n d i n gener al an effort h a s b een mad e to exc lu d e f ro m i t examp le s of faulty dic tion which illustr a te the p rin cip les of gr ammar di s cusse d i n the f orego in g Gr amma ti cal “ Notes A ca re ful stu dy o f the N ote s is reco m m en de d in c onne c ti on wi th the f ollowin g li st .

”

Ab breviate

metimes

us ed

fo r abridge

is abridged when it is given in when s ho rten ed in an y way

co n d en s ed

A bo o k

fo rm ;

a lecture

it is abbrevi ated

Dictio n is di scuss ed in gen eral an d in d e tail in every textb o o k o f En glish co mpo sitio n Lo n g an d valuab le l is ts o f faul ts in dictio n are ’ “ i v n i n t h t a a D t g e e S nd rd ic i on ary ; G en un g s Outli n es ofRhetori c; Al fred ’” Ay res The Verbalis t; Fitz edward Hall’s R ecen t E xempliﬁcatio ns of F als e P hi lo lo gy an d M o dern E n gli s h; Ho dg s o n ’s E rro rs in the Us e of .

E ng is h; Lo n g

S lips

f Ton g ue and

llectio n and dis cuss io n o fvul g ar an d co llo q uial E n g lishis in Sto rm s En glis che P hilo lo i e g V ery valuab le are J espe rsen s Gro wth and S tructure of the En glis h Lan ’

P en

The bes t

’

gua e, and

G reen o ugh and Kittredge ’s

Words

an d Their

Ways

GRAMMAT I CAL NOTE S Ab ove

s ho uld no t

the above sectio n

used

”

as an adj ective, as :

“

Rules

s tated

Sub s titute preceding, foregoing,

o r so

milar adjective

Ad apt

dramatiz ed;

dramatiz e

fro m

b e dis tinguis hed

s ho uld

no vel

a play is adapted when it is changed to s uit changed co n di tio ns “ m i n i e s t r is wro ngly us ed in the s entence Ad He ad minis tered a .

applied in “ He a d minis tered ” a do s e o fmedicine ; the laws ; an o ath; the go vernmen t dmi t s ho uld b e dis tinguis hed fro m co nfess : “ She admitted the

fatal

blo w

”

It is

co rrectly

“

accusatio n ; She confess ed her s ins Advent means an epo ch making arrival o f Chris t, but o f the arri v al o f a train ”

”

We speak o fthe ad vent

Aﬁ ect is to b e dis tinguis hed to in ﬂ uence ; to ej ect is to

ects

the

fro m

the

cause o r

versio n o f a s inn er ;

co n

verb ej

To a j

ect

bring abo ut

he aj

ects

the

ect is

A minis ter

feelings

o f his

audien ce

“

Aggravate Sho uld no t be us ed in the sense o f to pro vo ke o r to an n o y It pro perly expresses a heightening o r in tens ify ing : ”

“

”

“

” i His o f fense was aggravated by h s inso len ce ; ” was aggravated by his fals ehoo d

“

His guilt

Alike

s ho uld

alike in this “

example : ” Sam

no t

rein fo rc ed

by both:

“

They are

[bo th]

”

T he abs urdity is easily seen in the s to ck and Jim are bo th very much alike, es pecially

res pect

Sam

All, in co nnectio n with right, is a separate wo rd : all right, never alright All an d un ivers ally S ho uld never be us ed to gether : “ “ u n i v T he prae o s r r o r t e d t e r a ll b a l l The p actice is es ] y [ y Avo id the redundan t tice is reso rted to [univers ally ] by at ” “ He received all [o f] the vo tes use o fof: “ The legis lato rs , it is alleged Allege is a co mmo n erro r fo r s ay : .

[s aid] , will adjo urn is b ad ; the wo rd means to d eclare " “ “ with the idea o f po sitiveness an d it i rm to ass ert to aﬂ “

”

applicable to an emphas is

no t

rdinary

men t o ffact no t n eeding

s tate

Allo w

M ANUAL FO R WR ITE R S “

“

m eans perm it n ever think o r admit “ A perso n o r t hing Allud e to do es no t m ean men tio n “

”

“

”

re erred

o fhis

to , n o t

name ,

b ut in directly :

b es t frien d , he allud ed to his b ro ther

‘

“

’

alluded

s p eaking

”

mpanied an d sho uld be dis “ I fo und Henry tin guis hed fro m on ly whichmeans n o o t her “ It can b e do n e by him alo n e ; alo n e d is turb ed by the news “ All these are ambiguo us Virtue alon e is happ iness b elo w “ S everal Altern ative indicates a p o ss ibility o f two co urs es altern atives are o p en to me is therefo re b ad See A ll Alto gether mus t be d iﬂeren tiated fro m all together T hey divided his Amo n g is e n e used with o n e an other: mo n ey amo ng o ne an other [ amo n g An d is frequen tly misused in a variety o f way s o f w hich the fo l “ “ r He w r e x a mp l s : T r a a k e s o m e e x e c i s e lo in g a e e nd t ; y o wn ed a vio lin m ade by S tradivarius an d w hich was fo rmerly “ I have received y o ur the p ro perty o f his gran dfather ; o r w hich I b eg to thank y o u See Try rem ittan ce and f “ M en o f An o ther sho uld no t b e fo llo wed by fro m b ut by than : an o ther temp er from [ than] the Greek s See Diﬂ eren t An s w er is that whichis given to a ques tio n ; reply to an ass ertio n : He an swered the q ues tio n ; he repli ed to the argum en t “ An ticipate s ho uld no t b e us ed in the sen s e o f exp ect It “ “ m ean s fo res tall fo retaste to an ti ci pate his death “ to an ti ci pate o ne s in co m e is faulty ; in the sen s e o f in currin g o bligatio ns in advance o f its receip t is co rrect “ “ l i n i Anxi o us mean s fee g anx ety ; it d o es n o t m ean des iro us “ I am an xious abo ut her health is co rrect ; I am an xio us [desiro us ] to o b tain a p o sitio n is b ad “ A n y o f them Any is s o metim es ambiguo us may b e either “ r o r l r l a u l a u S o a l o : It is n o t in ten d ed fo r an y sing p s “ m n ay m ea m achin e T here is n o machine fo r which it is “ or It is n o t in ten d ed fo r every m achin e b ut o n ly in ten ded fo r a s pecial ty p e Alo n e

ex resses

”

the s en se o f un acco

”

“

”

“

”

“

”

’

”

“

”

G RAMM AT I CAL NOTE S An y place See p 44 An yway , anyhow, as co n j unctive adverb s , are .

[o r

way

please

how]

[ N evertheles s

At any

or .

“

co llo q uial :

] I shall

rate

An y

do as

”

generally used witho ut any implicatio n o f the “ truth o f the m atter s tated He did it with apparent will

Apparen t is

no w

ingn ess

is to b e dis tinguis hed fro m

”

willingne s

“

He did it

with evident

” .

Appear is physical, external, in its meaning, and sho uld be dis tinguis hed fro m s eem, which expresses a men tal exp erience : “

“

The fo res t appears to be impenetrable ” ; ” m h seem to e to b e rig t

This

do es

no t

Apt sho uld n ever b e used in ” “ ” “ ca pable o r skilled “

place “

o f li kely o r

He is an apt

He is apt to arrive so o n ” is in co rrect

apt to

As to is

ten dency

r us t

At is

co rrect ;

mean s “ havin g

T he child is apt to learn

”

;

“

Iro n is

“

As to ho w far he can b e trus ted is aq ues ” o d e c i d e t .

red un da nt .

”

means

red un dant in

vulgaris m

“

as :

See Liable

tio n fo r y o u

”

pupil

I t also

a n atural

liable

“

Where

See To

is he at

T he

p ssio n

ex re

is a

preferable to At the bes t At the first A t the las t b ecaus e they are well es tabli shed idio ms They aro se fro m fo rms in which the definite article co alesced ving atte which when final unaccented with the p repos itio n t e becam e silent gave a At length is by s o m e writers res tricted to the m eani ng “ fully “ in detail ; b ut there is go o d autho rity fo r us ing it to m ean “ after a lo n g tim e Audi en ce is o f ten impro perly used fo r s pectators An audien ce lis ten s ; s pectators lo o k o n o r w itn ess Aught (any thing) is frequen tly co nfused w ith naught (no ught) :

At b es t, A t

ﬁrs t,

A t las t are

”

“

Six times aught [naught] is aught is written with a o n e an d two aughts

“

[naughts

On e hundred

M AN UAL FO R WR I TE R S

mean s to

ss the wro ngs do n e to o thers ; revenge the wro ng do ne to o urselves ; avenge usually implies j us t retri b utio n ; revenge may b e us ed o f m alicio us retaliatio n Avo catio n is no t the s am e as vo cati on A m an s vacati on is his call Aven ge

redre

’

princip al o ccupatio n ; his avocation is a seco ndary o cen patio u which ho wever may in teres t him mo re than his vocati on “ “ I am Awful s ho uld be u sed o nly to mean awe in s pirin g : is a vulgar co llo q uialis m awful[ly] s o rry “ “ res t H ence the Balan ce do es no t m ean rem ain der o r balan ce o fthe cro p is a mis use o fthe w o rd ing, his

”

“

”

B an k

is slang, an d sho uld

B eg is

ften

u ed

in the

no t

u ed in the

sen se o f “ b eg leave

“ I b e t o s a i s I beg leave to s ay of y g B etween applies o nly to two p erso n s o r is un grammatical three “

”

sen s e o f T he

“

rely o n

co rrect

” .

fo rm

”

thin gs :

“

B etw een y o u

”

Big is

u ed co llo q uially

fo r large o r great, but s o m etimes it

can n o t

placed by either o f thes e wo rd s : A big man may m ean a man w itho u t p etty q u alities o f heart o r o f m ind Blame o n as a verb is a vulgaris m : Do n t blame i t o n me “ “ n n m i mea s D o t accus e e o f t o r D o n t putthe blame o n me B o th See A li ke an d p 40 sec 2 “ B o un d in the s en s e o f determined is an Americanis m : “ He is bo und [determ in ed ] to d o it Brainy is a co llo quial Americani s m “ n n Bri g m ea s to tran s fer to ward the s peaker an d m us t b e “ diﬁeren tiated fro m fetch which m ean s to go to an d b rin g b ack an d fro m carry w hichimplies a tran s fer o pp o s ite to that “ “ b ring an d “ fetch express ed by F etch go an d b rin g] me a glass o f water ; “ B ri n g a b o o k ho m e fro m the s to re ; be

“

”

“

’

”

’

”

’

”

;

”

“

” h i k m Carry t s b as et to hi But used in co n nectio n with that is .

red un d an t, unle

in ten ded

ppo site o f what the m ean ing wo uld b e w itho ut “ it : in I have n o do ub t but that he w ill die but s ho uld no t “ i be used ; n I have no fear but that he w ill co m e the mean to

ex press

the o

”

G R AM M AT I CAL N OTE S in g in ten ded is

“

but is

T he

co rrect

“

fo r but that:

am s ure he

will co me and here the us e o f co llo quialis m but wh at freq uen tly o ccurs ”

b elieve but what he is guilty generally ” “ canno t but b elieve that he is guilty a n d I cann o t ;

“

mean s I

cann o t

”

mean s I mus t believe Calculate d is o ften wro n gly used in the s ens e o f “ likely : “ His inn o cen t actio n is calculated to cause great in j ury The w o rd “ m ean s in tended o r planned fo r the purp o se “ Can has the meaning o f “ ability po wer and s ho uld no t be “ co n fused w ith may which implies perm issio n : Yo u may but b elieve

“

”

s kate

Carry

if y o u can See Bring

” .

a way that it may m ean either “ s ure ” o r “ s o me ” : “ They bro ught him certain in fo rmatio n ” “ ” h e C aply , fo r cheap, s o un d s affected He s o ld it cheap is co rrect

C ertain is

f ten

u ed

s u ch

w ell as an

Cheap is an adverb as Claim, in the

sense

“

assert,

adj ective “

”

“

s anctio ned by go o d usage : He ” i h o und s sho uld be e g s s ixty

Clever “

m eans

kin d ,

“

”

“

b rillian t,

“

”

go o d n atured

acco “

”

maintain

clai “

”

“

sa y,

”

no t

ms that a bushel o f wheat

He ass erts

mplished

”

“

etc

skilful

”

b ut

no t

That is very clever o fy o u m eans ”

“

That sho ws y o u to b e very s kilful C o me is frequen tly us ed when go s ho uld be emplo y ed ; come “ d en o tes m o tio n to ward ; go m o tio n fro m : They go fro m us ”

to their ho

C o mmo n is

me ; ften

me fro m their ho m e to us ” “ co n fused with mutual ; a common frien d is a they

”

f riend who m two o r m o re p erso n s have in co mmo n ; a “ mutual ” frien dship is the friendship o f two perso n s fo r each o ther .

C o mmo nly

Co mpare to or

“

See F requently

m eans

“

lik en to

”

;

“

mpare wi th mean s meas ure by

po in t o ut similarities and differen ces

C o mpelled Co n dign

See Bound

“

mean s s uitable

fo rm erly it was

” .

” ,

“

deserved ,

wards

u ed o f re

”

ssarily s o f p unishm en ts

no t nece

as well as

“

evere .

”

;

WR I TE R S

A M AN UAL FOR

50 Co n d o n e do es

mean

no t

wo rd o r act again s t J am es

fy by

n ulli

mmitted

are

s ho uld

co n s ci o us

“

”

don ed her fault

Co n s cio us

m ake amen d s

“

b ut

fo rgive

”

Jo hn co nd on ed the o ffen s e he had “

is in co rrect

Her husb an d

con

co rrect

no t

o n ly

”

fo r,

”

facts

the

facts

s ens ible o f extern al

o r s ens ible

fo r aware

u ed

o f o ur

can

inn er lif e ; we

o wn

which affect

feelin gs ; we

o ur

w hatever extern al facts o r general truths are “ kno wn to us I was co ns cio us o f his treachery is in co rrect “ n r a lo o k up o n as sho uld Co n s ider in the s e s e o f rega d s I co n s id er him abrillian t man us ually n o t b e fo llo wed by as : C o n temptible is used o f an o b j ect o f co n temp t; co n temptuo us o f “ w hat is directed at s uch an o b j ect : He is a contempti ble “ fello w ; I gave him a contemptuous lo o k ; “ He acted of

are aware

”

’

”

mpti bly

an d was treated

conte

C o n tinually

See F requen tly

mptuo us ly by

fro m

sho wers vo ked ] no t

Crime

f ten

seven

mbly

ho urs

”

fo rm er

the latter,

“

”

“

m ean s

He “

[ co n

con ven ed

to gether,

”

“

o f right ;

mo s t

The

”

b rin g to gether : The co mm ittee co nven ed ” is lo o s ely us ed fo r an o f fen s e again s t the s p eaker’s “

s o me

s uccessio n

T he

mo n th

co n vo ke:

Co n ven e

“

;

thro ugho ut the

fo r

the

in terrup tio n s :

with

b ut

ro ngly u s ed

asse

the

fo r

con ti n ual

was

C o n ven e

recurrin g,

co n tinuo us

was

con tin ual;

un cea in g ;

rain

”

mus t b e dis tinguished implies s o methin g un in terrup ted f requen tly

all

co nte

C o n tinuo us thing

”

pro perly m ean s

cruel o r

o nly

dis ho n es t actio n is

an no

o f en e

cri

s en se

again s t law ; the

if there is

law

again s t it

D angero us fo r dangero usly ill is a pro vin cialis m “ Data is plural : This data is as b ad as this facts D ecid ed mus t no t b e co n fused with decis ive; the fo rmer has mo re “ “ n s tro n g “ o fsettled than o e shad e o f m eani n g e g ﬁrm ,

“

”

co n vic tio n

ean s

“

”

“

He is a man

”

o f decid ed co nvictio n

deciding o r determ inin g an

even t

”

“

”

T he

; the latter

en e

wo n

GR AM M ATI CAL a decis ive victo ry

”

o ne

an d

unm i takably

which decided the o utco me o f the

might have b een

war] ; the victo ry clearly

N OTE S

a decided victo ry , that is ,

a victo ry , an d y et

no t

have been

decis i ve

D ecimate mean s s peciﬁcally

“

tak e a ay ,

kill,

des tro y ,

”

o ne ten th -

D efinitive s ho uld b e distinguished fro m defin ite; the latter “ mean s having certain limits the fo rmer mean s es tablishing “ “ i n i o r u n n n o : He gave a defin ite lim ts p tti g a e d t certa reply b ut it was b y n o m ean s defin itive “ D emean is related to demean or an d m ean s behave as demean o r “ “ “ m ean s b ehavio r ; it do es n o t mean to lo wer o r degrade ”

”

It is

s ugges tio n

likely that the

no t

bemean as a s ub s titute

will ever generally b e ado p ted “ D eprecate which pro perly m ean s [ try to ] avert by pray er “ is s till used by careless w riters in the s en s e o f d is app ro ve “ I deprecate [disappro ve] the actio n o f the co mmittee D e s iro us See Anxi o us D etermi n e d See B o und “ “ I differ with y o u is co rrect in the s en s e o f disagree ; Diﬁ er “ An d This ho us e differs from the o ther b ut o b j ectively : “ I d isagree [differ] wi th y o u is to in like m an n er the p hrase “ p f I dis agree [d iffer] fro m y o u r e e r re d t o be Diﬁ eren t s ho uld b e fo llo wed by fro m never by than o r to “ Directly mean s ins tan tly s o metim es with a s uggestio n o f the “ It s ho uld n o t I am co m ing directly immed iate f uture : “ “ “ or w hen : Directly b e used in the s en s e o f as s o o n as .

”

[as s o o n

as ]

the train

arrived , he alighted

” .

D is agre e See Difier Dis tin guis h mus t no t b e co nfused with difieren tiate; dis tin guis h m ean s to perceive differen ces b etween thin gs o r p erso n s ; “ m s m ake o r co n stitute a difi eren ce n o eren ti ate ea t difl “ '

”

Due

sho uld

[o w ing to

no t

because

u ed

]

fo r

o win g

his b ehavio r,

to , becaus e

Due to

o :

he was o s traciz ed

” .

A M AN

UAL

FOR

WR ITE R S

E ach is

dis tribu tive an d therefo re is sin gular, o f us have [ has ] o ur [ his ] o wn d uties to

plural : perfo rm

no t

”

Each

E very ,

is alway s s ingular E ach o ther is co mmo nly dis tinguished fro m al

“

fo rmer is than

pplicable

u ed as a

two

“

bro thers an d

Husb an d

an d

s is ters lo ve

Eﬁ ect

to two

w ife

on e

the

ano ther;

on e

o re ; the latter, to lo ve each o ther; several o nly

ano ther

”

See Aﬁect Ego tis t sho uld be dis tin guished fro m ego is t; the fo rmer is o n e with a high o r co n ceited Opini o n o f him s elf ; the latter, a b eliever .

s m (the do ctrine o f in dividual co ns cio usness) Either is distributive an d therefo re s ingular an d sho uld n ever be “ f o r t h a n t w o : Have [has ] either o fy o u s een my pen used o m e Elegant is o ne o f the m any ad j ectives in co mmo n us e as a s lang term o f gen eral appro val ; pro p erly used it alw ay s implies “ d elicacy reﬁn em en t : What a p erfectly elegant b ull do g " is n o t an elegan t exp ress io n “ “ n m i n a t e a t a k e o u t remo ve fro m E li s e m ; we may eli mi n ate an unk no w n q uan tity fro m an equatio n o r elimin ate a pdis o n in

ego i

”

fro m the b o dy ; ifwe eli min ate a truth fro m d o an inj ury

Els e s ho uld

either

to truth o r to lan guage

be fo llo w ed by than ,

no t

p o fideas we

a gro u .

by but:

“

o n e el e

but

s o m uch En o rmi ty is n o lo nger used to express m erely great siz e ; it is app lied to wick edn ess cruelty o r s o m e mo n s tro u s o f fen s e

[than] he

co uld

have do n e

”

s to mean great s iz e “ n h u s e h t a s no t e t o b t a i n E ed the s anctio n o f go o d usage : He is y “ r en th us ed o ve the in ven tio n s ho uld be He is enthus ias tic E normo us n es s is

o ver,

”

etc

o cca io n ally u ed

metimes used when testimo ny wo uld be preferab le T he tes timony o fawitness may co n tain no eviden ce

Evid en ce is

Evid en t See Apparent Except sho uld n ever b e us ed in the s ens e o f un less o r N 0 o ne will be emplo y ed except [ unless] he is qualiﬁed .

“

”

“

;

bu t “

”

T he

GRAM M AT ICAL

N OTE S

farm wo uld have been pro ductive except [but] fo r his unin telli ” en t m manage ent g “ “ ” ” c Ex eptio nal means un us ual , fo rmin g an excep tio n ; excep “ tionable means O pen to o bj ectio n o r exceptio n ” : “ He was a man o fexceptional character” is the o ppo s ite o f “ He was a .

man o fexceptionable character

”

“

Expect invo lves a sense o f the future ; hence I expect y o u kno w ” all abo ut it is in co rrect, an d s uch a wo rd as “ s uppo se sho uld be subs tituted fo r it “ Factor is lo osely used fo r caus e by careles s writers : One facto r " i n [cause o f] his refus al was his dislike o f no to riety “ The a l s i t a s ns : F y pplies to things o r ideas ; fals enes to perso falsi ty o f his argument is as evident as the falsenes s o f the ” man himself ” “ Fault At fault means at a lo s s what to d o next, as when a ” “ “ to d o g has lo s t the trail ; i n fault m ean s in the wro ng, .

blame

”

Favo r, in

s [ resembles] the

sen e o f

“

s mble

re e

”

is a

his father favors F emale fo r wo man is a vulgaris m : females [ men and wo men]

pro vincialis m:

“

”

“

Clo thing fo r

males

and

F etch See Brin g F ew s ho uld b e dis tinguished fro m afew; few emp has iz es the fact that the number is s m all ; afew, the fact that there is anumb er, “ ” “ A F ew shall part where many meet ; tho ugh it b e small : few perso ns were saved in the ar “ Fewer applies to nu mb er; less , to q uan tity : I have fewer [no t .

less] bo o ks than y o u Firs tly sho uld no t be emplo y ed fo r ﬁrs t, even tho ugh s ucceeded ” ” “ “ Firs t is thirdly, etc in an enumeratio n by se co n dly , an adverb , as well as an ad j ective ” “ ” “ ” “ a e se t e Fix, in the s ense o f rep air, arr ng , tl , is bad usage : ” “ “ F ix ro Fix the b ken table ; avo id all s uch exp res s io ns as : “ ” “ ” “ ” We are F ix y o ur affairs ; Fix the rules ; y o ur hair ; ”

xed.

ﬁ

”

M AN UAL

WR ITE R S

FOR

F o rmer, an d its an tithesis latter,

sho uld be used to designate o ne In cas e o f mo re than two o f two p ers o n s thin gs ideas e tc “ “ “ “ the the third the exp ressio n s the ﬁrs t the seco n d last s ho uld b e emplo y ed Fre quently s ho uld b e dis tin guis hed fro m commo n ly gen erally per ,

”

petually us ually ; each has its o wn reﬁnem en t o f mean ing ” “ Co mmon ly exp ress es the an tithes is o f rarely ; frequen tly .

“

an d gen erally , the an tithes is o f seldo “ ” : cas ually us ually is the o o s ite o f

acco rd

sp ect

religio n

”

;

He us ually rises

F ro m

See

“

o cca io n ally

M ankin d

eno ugh

;

mmon ly

win ter cause s no w ;

rain

frequen tly

”

” .

When ce

F unn y s ho u ld

G en erally

severe

tho ugh the co ld is gen erally “

“

”

no t

b e us ed to

See F requen tly

mark able

“

m ean s trange

” .

See Co me

mis used in the sens e o f well ; shuns uch an “ p r ss i n : I am feelin g go od ex e o as uo us an d is to b e avo ided : G o t in the s en s e o fp o ssess io n is s up erﬂ “ T o express o bligatio n o r co mpul I have go t a large ho use sio n avo id s uch terms as : I have got to [am o bliged to ] catch a train Gotten is an o b so lete fo rm o f the pas t parti Such a use ciple rein tro duced in to E n glis h fro m S co tlan d “ r i n It has gotten to b e a co mmo n thing has o f the wo d as Go od

“

is freq uen tly

”

“

”

n ever

G ues s

b een

reco gn i ed

“

suppo se thin k ( I gues s he is a rich is a p ro vincialis m s anctio ned in co n vers a tio n b u t co n demn ed in writin g This applies equally to the ,

in the

sen se

as go o d

“

imagine ,

”

“

”

“

pro vin cial reckon Han dy sho uld

the

e q uivalen t o f guess

pro ximity : They had s everal neighb o rs quite handy [very near is pro vin cial H an ged s ho uld b e us ed to expres s the executio n o fahuman b ein g ; “ s r i n o t h r u hun g a the pas t pa ticiple e ses : It is the s en ten ce “ T he drap eries o f the co urt that y o u b e han ged by the neck ; were no t hun g with go o d tas te never

“

u ed to ex ress

”

GR AM M AT I CAL NOTE S

Healthy sho uld b e distin guished f ro m healthful an d fro m whole “ “ h s o me: T e child is healthy ; Exercise is healthful ; “ ” Who leso me fo o d an d healthful exercis e make him healthy H ence See When ce High sho uld b e distin guished fro m tall It is a mis tak e to s ay ”

”

ws pap er

Yo rk

as a N ew

did :

recen tly

“

Walwo rth tho usan ds o f

T he

” building is the highes t in the wo rld ; there are huts an d cab in s that are higher by tho us an d s o f f eet

H o me

home

no t

may

”

sy no ny m

mere

no t

b e true,

“

He has a b eautif ul See if he has a b eautiful ho us e

fo r ho us e:

even

R es ide

Hun g

If is

See Han ged

ften

m isus ed

fo r whether :

“

d o ub t if [ whether]

“

I wo uld [sho uld] like to ab le to go ; [o pinio n ] if [as to whether] I co uld o btain ”

by law [legal Ilk is careles s ly

u ed

mean

“

kin d ,

”

“

o b tain

s o rt

y o ur advi ce

[ p ro cure] ”

I shall

this letter

pro perly

“ m ean s “ the s ame R o b M acGrego r an d o thers o f that “ In R o b M acGrego r an d o ther M ac Grego rs i lk m ean s “ phrases like this it was m is un ders to o d to m ean clan Ill like well is an adverb Illy is avo ided by careful w riters “ w j v : His illy [ ill] fo rmulated views hardly as ell as an ad ecti e ”

”

d es erve

n o tice

” .

In augurate a wo rd which implies the acco mpan imen t o f fo rm al an d dign iﬁed ceremo nies is lo o s ely used fo r begin T he ﬁrs t s tep s in this by w riters who like big wo rd s refo rm have recen tly b een in augurated an d are no w m aking was recen tly written by a teacher o f m any rap id p ro gress S teps canno t b e in augurated no r can they y ears exp erience ,

“

”

’

make progres s

It is In divi dual mean s a p ers o n o r thin g regarded “ E ight impro perly us ed as a m ere sy n o ny m o f pers on : indivi duals [p ers o n s] w ere s aved in the ark In s id e o f expressing the idea o f tim e is pro vincial and co llo q uial : “ I n side of[ within ] ay ear I s hall b e o ut o fdeb t “

as a unit

”

WR IT E R S

A M AN UAL F OR

Invite s ho uld no t be used fo r i n vitatio n : [ invitatio n] to the wedd in g

“

She

sen t

an in vi te

”

Kin d is no t plural ; do no t s ay these (o r tho se) kind “ Kin d o fs ho uld never b e fo llo wed by the in deﬁnite article : What ” kind of [a] man is he " K ind of an d s ort of in the sense o f ” “ ” “ rather I feel kind of[ rather] ill are co llo quial : Kin dly Withs tran ge co nfusio n o ftho ught, many p ers o n s write : “

o f things

“

Yo u are kindly

req ues ted

reco

mm end a teacher o f E nglis h

N o do ub t the in ten tio n is that kindly s ho uld mo dify recommend , but its p o s itio n prevents it fro m do in g so I t is b etter to write : “ Yo u are req ues ted to have the kindnes s fo r

”

o u r s cho o l

reco

etc

mmend

” ,

“

Will y o u have the kindness to

” m d reco m en ,

Las t is o ften mis used fo r lates t His lates t letter o r bo o k may no t b e his las t; he may wri te m o re Latter applies o nly to the las t o f two See F ormer Lay as a verb express es causative actio n ; lie exp ress es pass ivity : .

“

She lays the bo o k do wn ; He lays He lies quite s till ; ” “ ” l a n n r p s ; A ship lies at a cho T he pas t tense o flay is laid ; “ that o f li e is lay : She laid the bo o k do wn ; it lay there “

”

unn o ticed

L earn

” .

is a vulgaris a

hen

mplo y ed

in the

” I ll learn [ teac h] y o u to be go o d " “ ” es s h T e h r L p as e no thin g les s than

“

He was

n othin g les s

Liab le is passive

than

“

mo dern .

p ss

ex re

“

liable to acciden t

o b ligatio n :

See Lay

“

his

teach

a biguo us : ” anner See .

u ua lly

in j ury

fo llo wed by

me at an y implies

mo m ent

”

weakn ess

It is als o

” .

He is liable fo r this deb t ”

u ed

See Apt

Like mus t n ever be used ”

o f ten

us age is rarely

He is liable to

He is li able to b e hurt ”

d efect :

co n d escen d ing in

and in go o d

an inﬁnitive ; do no t s ay ,

Li e

”

’

“

sense o f

“

his father ;

“

in the

s en se

He died as he lived

” .

“

”

“

He lo o ked like

GRAM M ATI CAL N O TE S

See Love

Lik ely

See A pt

Literally implies that a s tatem en t to which it is attached is accu “ rately an d precisely true : T he audien ce was literally m elted to tears ,

”

o an , used as

literally true

no t

a verb , is

y o ur umb rella

”

no un

n o t in

w ithgo o d usage :

ex re

to b e avo ided

“

Lo an me

Loan is a

s ay o f a man

ex ress

be “

the ta tes :

air, bo o ks ,

”

as a vulgaris m ; do

regarded

that he located in the

s ho uld o rdinarily

acco rd

p ss io n

is an

Lo cate in the sen se o f “ settle Love

co un ty

mplo y ed

no t

p s affectio n ; like family ; he likes fresh

ex re s

A man lo ves his

fo o d , a p leas an t acquaintance ,

etc

” .

Lo vely like elegant is a greatly o verwo rked wo rd Luxurian t as dis tinguished fro m luxurio us m ean s s uperabundant “ “ in gro w th o r p ro d uctio n : T he vegetatio n is luxuriant ; He ,

”

lead

M ad , in be

a luxuri o us [in dulgen t, given o ver to luxury ] life ” n the sen s e o f a gry , is a ro vin cialis hich can hardly ”

mned

co n de

fo rb idden , b ut is better avo ided

M ale See F emale M ay See Can “ n f M ighty , in the se se o very .

us e o f uch an ex ress io n

M in d , in

the

sen se

“

”

is to be avo ided

“

as :

o b ey ,

It s mighty hard is to be avo ided ’

no t

make

Shun

s uch

”

make y o u mind me " “ “ h s en s o f w i t h o u t lackin g is co llo quial e M inus in t e M o s t has been used in s tead o falmost fo r almo s t a tho usan d y ears “ It rain ed mos t every day b ut this us e is no t p ermiss ible p ssio n s as :

ex re

“

”

’

I ll

”

is bad

M utual

u age

See Co mmon

N ece s s iti e s has almo s t in

curren t

s p

en tirely u ur ed

E nglis h

T he

to the b are n ecess aries

betw een the

wo rds

necess i ties

It is

the of

place

life

o f necess aries

f ten

un fo rtun ate that the

lo n ger

o b erved

red uce o ne

dis tinctio n

M ANUAL

WR I T E R S

F OR

d en o te a q uality o f character ; n eglect, to “ p ss f o : The accid en t was caus ed thro ugh ex re a ailure t act agman [ o r b y his n eglect to dis play a the n egligen ce o f the ﬂ

N egligen ce is

u ed to

N either deno tes “

o r n o o n e: “

o ne o f

two , and s ho uld

Of the two men ,

n ei ther

N o ne o f tho se p resent heard him

sho uld

neither

b e fo llo wed ,

n ei ther mo ney n o r lan d has be co m e co llo q uially

o wn ed

N ever

lo o k ed at it

N ice , in the its elf in

o n ce

s en se

an d

co llo q uial,

“

pleasant

but

N o ho w, a vulgaris m , is the do uble

no t

rarely “

negative :

” .

or,

b ut by

mphatic

wo rd

He d o n

“

[d o esn t] ’

“

40 ,

s ec

He .

“

n egative :

u ed exce t

s hed

es tabli .

perso n s

who

lik e her,

N on e O f the m was

There is n on e o fthem that doethgo o d

us e

n oho w

presen t

” .

See N either; N at

N or

mus t

as :

b e fo llo w ed by the co rrelative nor in “ N o t fo r w ealth n or fo r fame d id he

was

n ot

Not

has agreeable, go o d literary , us age ’

”

n or:

”

n one

”

“

”

N o n e sho uld be treated as as in gular :

presen t

to lerated

”

See

N o thin g lik e and

s ho uld

u ed

rich

38, as

un der

as :

” .

s uch sen tences strive ; “ She ”

See N either

”

is a vulgaris m no t to b e “ I have n o t had but o n e

D o uble N egatives “ such phrases as T he mine “

re o rted ,

”

“

She is

n owhere n ear

frequently met wi th in b e avo ided in all careful w riting

tho ught,

b ut are to

n egative,

n owhere n ear,

li ke as

b eautiful as s atio n ,

ex re

S hun s uch a phrase

meal to day n o thi n g

was her hus b an d

n or

p ss

b ut, to

N ot

ever s een

See N o t; als o

” .

s aid

n ever

no t

fo r

again ; As a co n j un ctio n ,

was

speak

u ed

no t

are

with the

vo cative, an d

witho ut pun ctuatio n ; fo llo wed by a co mma

”

ho w

”

co nver

j aculatio n and s ho uld be “ o r a po in t o fexclam atio n : 0 C aes ar hear me " “ Oh “ happy I Oh"is it p o ssible " See chap v s ecs 5 p 7 2 s ec 6 Oh, fo r the

35 ;

GR AM M AT I CAL Ob ligate d fo r

[

o bli ged

warran t:

is witho ut

o bliged , und er o bligatio n

]

N OTE S

to go

59 “

He felt o bligated

” .

Ob s ervatio n sho uld n o t b e used fo r o bservance: “ T he o bservati on ” o [ b servance] o f thes e p recautio ns will b e necess ary Oﬁ mus t n ever b e u sed with of; o ne o r the o ther is s up erﬂuo us : .

“

Cut me a piece

that rib bo n

f [o f] the lo in

”

“

;

[o ﬂ] of

Cut me a y ard

” .

On e an o ther See E ach o ther On ly See Alon e Oral See Verbal O ther Af ter n o o ther us e than , .

no t

n o o th er

was

Ought,

u ed

but [ than ]

Wilso n

co nnectio n “

to b e avo ided :

“

but:

”

s o o n s aw that

See An other

wi th had, is a vulgaris m

Yo u hadn t ’

ough t

to have

paid

s tudio usly

much

”

Owin g See Due Pan acea is ludicro us ly .

fo r a

mis used to mean an eﬂective remedy diseas e ; it mean s s o mething that cures all

s ingle

diseases

what seem s

Parado x m ean s

in g is therefo re

Partak e

Such an

p s

b e avo ided Party , of

as :

“

s elf

co n tradicto ry

a seemin g

to eat,

”

parado x

S eem

”

an d aﬂected

s tilted

He partakes of a light lunch is ”

legal do cum ents , is

pt in

exce “

sen se o f

re s io n

“

redunda n t in

in the

o f,

abs urd

pers o n

”

“

have an

n ever

engage

sed in

to b e u

men t w ith an

the sen se

inﬂ uen tial

party Per s ho uld b e “

Per diem,

“

day ,

”

“

week

etc

with o ther wo rds o fLatin fo rm : “ “ He is paid per cen t ; but :

used in co nnectio n

”

per annum , is to

”

b e avo ided

Use a with

“

week,

”

P erpen di cular merely

means

right

angles to

men tio ned; it sho uld no t be used fo r vertical “ witho ut interruptio n o r Perpetually m ean s

s o mething else

F requen tly

ssatio n

’ .

See

A M AN UAL

Pers o n

FO R WR ITE R S

See Party “ ” Place , when used in the sense o f where, is a vulgaris m ; s hun “ See such a phrase as : Let us go s o me place “ p 44 , un der Ellipsis ” “ Po pular means “pleas ing to m an y p eo ple It is n o t very papu ” lar with me is therefo re ab s urd Po s t and posted , fo r inform an d informed , are to o co llo quial fo r serio us writing Practical and practi cable are o ften co nfused A plan may b e cap able o f b eing carried o ut] , b ut no t practical practicable [because o f its co s t o r so m e o ther feature] In the sen se o f “ ” “ ” “ s kilful or experien ced , Practical practical is abs urd : ” ho rs es ho er “ Pre dicate is m is used in two way s : (I ) to mean predict” ; (2 ) “ “ ” “ ” to m ean b ase, fo un d : H is early return was predicted b y ” his f rien ds ; He predicates [b as es] his assertio n o n these facts ” Pre mature To call a false repo rt premature is lud icro us , unless .

there

later

reaso n

wo rd

Pro po s e is “

sense o f

as :

“

ass ure

I p unis hed

ften mis used fo r

”

slang

purpo se

o ne

will

o ccur

who

”

has the

entertains

as the b es t

plan P

”

als o Propos iti on

ni ng o f ea

the “

;

s ucha use o f

promis e y o u " “ purpo se, in the s ense o f to him,

in ten d

Avo id

To propo s e m ean s s ub mit a p ro po s itio n fo r the

even t re o rted

Pro mi s e in the the

to believe that the

plan :

“

purpos e

“

”

“

plan

to o ﬂ er a prOpo s al,

co n s ideratio n

to d es ign

”

” ,

so m eo n e ;

the

p art

What do y o u propose [ o ﬂer] See [ plan] to write a bo o k ”

ften mis used fo r propos al A propos iti on is a statement o fa j udgment o r a plan ; a propo s al is the presenta

Pro po s itio n is

ment o f an o ffer See Pro pose Pro vidin g is so metim es misuse d fo r provid ed : “ Yo u may eiding [ pro vided] y o u are acco mp a nied tio n

o r s tate

”

Purpo s e

See Propose

go pro

GR AMM ATI CAL Q uali ty is is

use

ean s

“

are do n e to the language :

fro m the mo s t exclus ive

B uilt uite

gross ly mis used as an adj ective ; fo rtun ately the mis co nﬁned a lmos t en tirely to ad vertisements , where all

o f vio lence

s o rt

N OTE S

entirely ,

“

”

who lly

”

des igns

Quality

” .

It is therefo re

clo thes

mis used in the

“

” h sentence She was quite [very m uc ] pleased with the boo k ; “ ” “ quite dark s ho uld expres s the meaning o f co mpletely

“

dar avo ided

Quite in the sens e o f so mewhat is equally to be Quite a j aw is no n s en se as well as bad E nglish .

R ais e is mis used in

”

o ld

R eal, in the

[very ]

“

;

sense o f

angry

” .

as :

in the

“

very ,

”

a no un, an d

s ens e o f

“

co nse

o b ta ined

As a verb , it mus t b e dis

She was

T he lan dlo rd rais ed

; we rear children

[bro ught up] [increas ed] my ren t rais ed

” .

”

is a vulgaris m

Avo id :

“

1 was

real

See also R eal quen tl

”

“

with the prepo sitio n in : In ” ” “ l s ho uld be With reference, etc ref eren ce to yo ur p ro p os a “ o a r d a n re s e c t : With d The s am e rule applies to the w rds reg p ” ’ “ “ c t o Withres pe t rega rd to is preferable to I n regard to use d

preferable to

“

res

pect to

” .

See Reference R emain d er See Balance R es earcher is a vulgaris m o f the w o rs t s o rt R e si de is us ed fo r live by tho se who like ﬁne wo rds , as res id ence “ He resides in a p alatial res id ence [ He : is fo r ho us e, dwelli ng R egard

lives in a ﬁn e

See Reference R es t See Balance ected : R etire, fo r go to bed, is aﬂ R es pe ct

an d go to b

“

Yo u may

retire

to y o ur

ro o

FO R WR IT E R S

A M AN UAL

62 R even ge

R everen d

See Aven ge Co mmo n us age has .

u ed

as a title , this

that

it sho uld

no t

ho w ever, chap iii, .

s tab lis hed

rule

the

wo rd sho uld b e abb reviated b e preceded b y the d eﬁnite

sec

“

R ev A V .

and article

S mith was p “

when

that,

(see

res en t

”

“

Right sho uld n ever b e us ed in the sens e o f du ty : Yo u had a “ ” t to warn me is avulgaris m fo r Yo u o ught to have w arned righ “ ” ” r s o u r d u o w a n m R ight, in the s en s e o f t e I a t me , tw y y ”

“

”

very ,

a pro vin cialis m :

ex res sio n s

“

right no w ,

It is right [very ] pretty ” “ ” right o f f, right away ,

S uch

”

“

right

merly in go o d use R ubb ers o r I ndia rubbers fo r o vers hoes is pro vin cial Avo id the co mmo nly S ame sho uld n ever b e used as a p ro no un “ i : Yo ur letter received ; in reply to s ame used express o n s I have to s ay etc (s ee chap vii p Likewis e the expres “ “ sio n s ame as in the sens e o f jus t as in the same mann er “ A i a r i s m v o d : He treated me the s o me as if I were is a vulg here

”

are

no w

pro vincial

“

tho ugh fo r

”

his

o wn child

” .

“

S co re is to be avo ided in the fo llo wing : She s cored [achieved] a co mplete success S eem See Appear “ S et m eaning s it is a vulgarism n eedin g o nly to b e p o in ted “ nce: S et [s it] in this chair is en tirely o ut to in s ure its avo ida “ His clo thes s et well is mo re frequently co n in def ens ible ; ”

”

do ued, b ut equally

S ettle S hall

ungrammatical

See Lo cate

“

See un der S ho uld See S hall .

Grammatical N o tes p 3 6 “ (under Grammatical N o tes ”

” ,

“ ” ‘ ” “ e o f n w i n h se l a e r o r m c S ho , t e s p y, p f an e, is b ad : Let s go to see a s how “ ” S ho w up, in the sens e o f expo s e, is a vulgaris m : “ I will s how ” him up [ exp o s e him] at all co s ts “ ” “ ” n e e o f s i a t e u i n t h e s s e t m e i we gh, is also a vulgaris m : S iz , p, “ I want y o u to s iz e him up [estimate his ’

G RAM M ATICAL So

me , fo r b etter

mewhat is

N OTE S “

a vulgaris m :

feel

me [so mewhat]

”

See Kind

S o rt

See Kind

S o rt o f

means “ s hining “ b rilliant ; it sho uld n o t be used as Avo id s uch expressio n s as : a term o f gen eral co mm en datio n “ M y car run s s plendid ly ; M y watch keeps s plendid time ; “ He is do in g as plendid wo rk “ n b e res po n s ible fo r has S tan d fo r w hich pro p erly mea s recen tly co m e in to co mm o n us e in the Un ited S tates fo r I wo n t s tand for [s tan d] s tand end ure an d also fo r permit: It is s till if n o t a vulgarism at bes t his treatmen t O f me co llo q uial and p ro vincial “ I s tated [s aid] that I tho ught S tate is no w us ed vulgarly fo r s ay: so methin g o ught to b e do ne abo ut it and he ﬁn ally s tated [ replied] in an in differen t way fo r me to co me in [ that I sho uld “ I pressed him fo r an an swer co m e in ] again this week ; ”

S plen did

”

“

’

”

an d he s tated ,

‘

No ,

S ure, as an adverb , is n o t

will co m e s ure

”

tence to

T each

read :

See Learn

permissible :

b e s ure to do

will do it ; “ I o r remo del the s en ”

s ure

each ca e us e s urely ,

I s hall

“

”

Team is a

pro vin cialis m used co mmo nly in N ew England fo r a ho rse drawn vehicle an d its use has sp read to o ther p arts o f -

thi

That,

s co un try in the s en se .

“

”

“

s uch

”

is a vulgaris m :

“

was “

p ss my self clearly ; I The w o rd that has so many didn t kn o w it was that [s o ] b ad fun ctio n s that care m us t b e taken to avo id the awkward S uch a s en tence as the fo llo wing needs rep etitio n o f it “ w ﬁce i n : The p o lice had a bo o k that they fo un d in his o f re rit g that co n tain ed the n am es o f p eo ple that he to o k o rders fo r an d

that

[ so ] pleas ed I ,

co uld

”

n o t ex re ”

’

that was valuable fo r the

rea o n

peo ple

” .

See

41 ,

s ec

that we

co uld

inq uire

o f these

Thin k sho uld

no t

MAN UAL FO R WR ITE R S “

wo rd

have the

fo r

”

added :

“

He is

See p 39 , sec 3 blame than y o u thin k for ” “ Thro ugh s ho uld no t b e used in the sens e o f ﬁn ished

mo re

”

my wo r

thro ugh [ have ﬁni hed]

s uperﬂuo us

To is

w ro n g

and

“

Where

“

have y o u b een to " ”

See A t

Tran s pire do es no t m ean to light,

“

”

b eco m e

fo r two y ears Try See An d .

avo ided :

“

kn o w n

”

T he treas o n did

“

Try and [ to ] of

eat

s o methin g

bad temp ered ,

“

He keep s an

ugly ”

Un les s Upward “

o f is

Wi tho ut no t go o d us age w hen

tran s pi re

co llo q uial

”

“

V ery

to s up

s ee

”

sho uld

”

un ique,

“

”

mo re

us ed to ex res

have b een

a y ear

no t

vicio us ,

an d the like , are therefo re ab s urd

”

See E xcept an d

“

”

mpered] do g “ Odd as m any

[ bad

Unique do es n o t m ean “ rare o r “ po s e ; it m ean s alo n e o f its kin d un ique,

pro p erly used fo r

; it is

“

s ense

in the

happ en

”

Ugly ,

“

co nﬁned

s “ mo re than

to the ho use fo r upward

”

f [ mo re than]

Us ually

See F requen tly

“

Ve rb al.

mess age m ean s o nly “ a m essage in wo rds ; “ “ wo rd O f mo uth is an o ral m essage : He gave

message by them verbal [o ral] .

”

verbal

Vo cati o n

”

ins tructio n s

See A vo cati o n

eas t

” .

s Way sho uld sto o d way [ aw ay ] b ack no t

”

u ed

in the

sen s e o f

in the

w o o ds

”

“

w : T he “ Way [ away ]

a ay

;

”

ho us e

do w n

”

Way s is O ften misused fo r way : It is quite a ways [way ] Oil Well See Good and Illy What See B ut Who les o me See Healthy “ When ce mean s fro m what place o r cause an d hence in the “ R eturn to the p lace fro m when ce y o u cam e n r i o exp ess from is redun dan t This applies eq ually to hence which sho uld no t b e preceded by from “

”

N OTE S

GR AMM AT I CAL

Will See S hall (under Grammatical N o tes p “ Witho ut fo r unles s is pro vin cial : I will no t go without [un les s] See E xcept y o u go w ith me Witnes s is used fo r s ee by perso n s who like large wo rds We “ h no er o n o r a t i n : T his is may wi tn ess an even t but t ap s g the larges t audien ce I ever wi tn es s ed Wo rs t kind is slang N ever use such an expres sio n as I want to “ [ o f a way is s o metimes go to the theater the wors t kind “ very added to this o b j ectio n able p hras e] in the s ense O f m uch “ “ Wo uld in the sense o f the auxiliary do o r did is a vulgar “ See o wers wo uldn t gro w there is m : It s a wo nder the ﬂ “ p S hall (under G rammatical N o tes “

”

’

”

CHAPT ER III

S PELLIN G ; WI TH

AN D

E S FO R ABBR EV IATIN G COM POUN D I N G WOR D S R UL

in ten d ed : (I ) to in di cate the b etter fo rm where two o r m o re spellin gs Of a wo rd are reco gn iz ed ; (2 ) to m ak e clear when abb revi ati o n s when go o d fo rm requires wo rd s s ho ul d n o t b e used i e o r ﬁgures to b e spelled o ut in s tead o f abb revi ated an d vice vers a; (3) to Offer co n s tru ctive rul es whi ch ﬁ cul t s ubj ect Of will en ab l e a wri ter to mas ter the d if co mpo un ding wo rd s M o s t o f the rul es gi ven are s o framed as to rel ate Several Of thes e are taken fro m the to co n crete cas e s M an ual of S ty le (T he Un ivers ity o f Chi cago A few gen eral rul es are added in the b eli ef th at they wi ll pro ve servi ceab l e to wri ters an d o thers who may It has n o t b een tho ugh t wise to co n sul t thi s b o o k nor o n the cumb er the b o o k wi th elem en tary rul es o th er h an d wi th rul es go vern in g co mpli cated o r un u s ual cases T he

ru es

whi ch fo ll o w are

SPE LLI N G

R ules fo r s pe llin g d erivatives —a) In derivatives fo rmed fro m wo rd s en din g in c by addin g a termi n atio n 1

b egin n in g wi th the

wh en the l atter is

co lic, co licky

;

y , the no t

k is

in s erted after b e pro n o un ced li k e s : l etter

i c, trafficked , traf trafl ficking, traf ficker

S PELLIN G

b) In d erivatives fo rmed by add in g a termin atio n b eginn in g wi th a vo wel to mo n o s y llab les o r to wo rd s '

accen ted

the las t

y llab le when thes e wo rd s

en d

preceded by a s in gle vo wel , that do ub l ed :

s ng e co n s o n an t so n an t

ab et, ab etted , ab etting , ab etto r ; beﬁt, beﬁtting;

(exceptio n :

mbat

mbated)

co n

clan , clann is h

) When a diph tho n g o r a digraph repres en tin g a vo wel s o un d precedes the ﬁn al co n s o n an t o f a wo rd o r when the accen t o f a wo rd en din g in a s in gle co n so n an t falls o n an y o th er s y llab le th an the las t the ﬁn al co n s o n an t is n o t do ub led in d erivatives fo rmed by the addi tio n Of a termi n ati o n b eginnin g wi th a vo wel : c

d aub , d aub ed , d aub er ; b enefit, b enefited , b en efiting; reveled , revelin g;

kidn ap ed

travel, traveling, traveler ;

(exceptio n :

B ut the ﬁn al

han dicapped)

kidn ap , kidnap er,

is do ub led in the derivatives

co n s o n an t

g, in o rder to dimin i s h the Of its b ein g pro no unced l i k e j b efo re e o r

few wo rd s

en d ng in

humb ug, humbugged , humb ugging

il en t e the e is b egin s wi th a ,

incite, in citem en t ; .

ackno

p tio ns )

exce

(except e) it is (s ee s ec 4 b elo w) :

s te

cha

wi th

Of ten

d ro pped

ss ;

chas ten e

argue, argu en t ; true, is do , abridg en t,

who lly nursling w m m lo dgm ent j udgm en t and their co mp o unds

(The wo rds :

wledgm ent

en d n g

fro m the derivative truly

li kelihoo d

gen erall y retain ed wh en the termin atio n co n s o n an t When , ho wever, the e is

by ano th er vo wel

preceded

Of a

d) In derivatives fo rmed fro m wo rds s

revel,

are

In derivatives fo rmed fro m wo rds

)

FOR WR I TE R S

A M AN UAL

en d

ing

wi th

when the termin atio n b egin s wi th a vo wel , the is generall y o mi tted :

i len t e

us age

In e

us e, u able ,

o rder

plum e plumage ;

bride, bridal ; guide , guidance ;

to guard again s t

metimes

ho e,

reta ned

sho e

ho eing ;

changeab le ;

mi spro n un ci atio n

(

s ee s ec

sho eing ;

4 b elo w)

i len t

Â°

peace p eaceable ; ,

advan tage, advan tageo us

change ,

In d erivatives fo rmed fro m wo rd s

the

in y , preced ed b y a co n so n an t, by appen din g an y termi n atio n except o n e b eginn in g wi th i , the y is usuall y ch an ed g

in to i : m ercy m erciful ; mo dify mo diďŹ es ; ,

T he

en d n gs

s i on

an d

en d n g

gay , gaiety

ti on are di s tin gui s h ed in

practice as fo llo ws : s i o n is gen erall y the fo rm in the cas e o f no uns rel ated to verb s en d ing in nd , de, ge, re, s e, s s , mi t, -

vert:

pprehensio n ; pro vide pro visio n ; subm erge subm ersio n ; co here co hes io n ; immerse immers io n ; co n fess co n fess io n ; p erm it p ermissio n ; pervert p ervers io n Exceptio n s to the rule are : atten tio n co n tentio n in ten tio n (als o with diff eren t m eanin g pprehen d

in ten sio n) -

cases

wi th few exceptio n s :

ti on is the fo rm in all o th er

co n

vate,

struct

co ns tructio n ;

cultivatio n ;

migrate

re urrect, resurrectio n

co n travene, ,

migratio n ;

co n traven tio n ;

culti

po llute po llutio n ; ,

S PELLIN G Exceptio ns to the co ercio n,

ru e

diss ens io n ,

are :

scansio n ,

m ans io n

to rs io n ,

di s to rs io n

Give preference to the fo llo wi ng fo rms o f spelling: favo r abridgmen t cen ter J udea 2

acco uter acknowledgment

check

aegis'

cla

aes thetic‘

clue

fib er flavo r fluo rid fo rward fulfil

clinch

co eva l

aluminum

kidn aper‘ Ko ran labo r

chlo rid

mo r

after ard

j udgment

fetid’

co tillio n

gai ety

co un cilo r

amo n g anemiaI

co un elo r

arbo r archaeo lo gy x ardo r

cue

defen se demean o r d iarrhea‘ disk dispatch di stil do wnward d raft

mo r

ascen dancy ascendent Athenaeum‘ ax ay e

bark (vessel) b az aar B ed uin b ehavio r blessed bo wlder burned

can do r ca nno neer

canyo n

carca

(ro ller)

caviler I

H in du

caro led

d ueler d uln ess dwe lt embitter emir emplo y ee ' en cy clo pedic endeavo r engulf enro l en sn a re en velo pe (n ) E skimo exhibito r fan tasy

cae ura'

ca to r

ps m

si ) " gla o r gly c erin go o db y e gray grue o me guaran tee (v ) guaran ty (n ) harb o r he o rrhaget

See sec 9 . be ow .

maneuverx Markan meager

mediaevalx

meter miter

Mo hammedan mo ld mo lder mo lt mo vable

mustache

imb ed incase in clo se incrust

n eighbo r

niter

o do r o ﬁense

s self (not

’

o ne

in graft in stal ( en t) in stil ins ure in tren ch in trust in ard j e eler

w w I

See

sec

r c) ,

paean

‘

‘ r a h a l eo y g p I n o eo t o l a l gy p aro le parq uet arti san

p peddler abo ve

A M AN UAL

Pho en ixI ig y lo practice (n an d v )

saber salab le

p m p w

renco un ter

reverie

preten e rimeval pro gram reco n no iter reinfo rce

mo r

N O TE —M ake “

to n ight,

“

”

so metimes

]

wo rd o f

o ne

”

“

an d

”

mb er

o f the n u

o re

“

canno t

any o ne,

(s ee

s ec

”

“

46 , “b elo w)

every o n e,

f f

”

“

so meo ne

”

“

”

to day , to o rro w, Di tinguis h b et een

”

an d

“

so me o n e [ o r

the termin atio n s

feren ti ate b etween 3 Dif .

while3 whis ey wil ul wo e ul wo o len wo rs hiper Yahweh

s ubpo en a

v vapo r vend o r vigo r

talc techniq ue2 theater thraldo m thras h to rmen to r to ward tran q uili e tran q uilli ty traveler

staun ch steadfast

ruble

tro us ers tum o r upward alo r

tab o o

pecter

rigo r

“

subtle succo r sumac sy rup

Savio r

savo r scepter sepulcher sergean t Skepticism skilful smo lder so mb er

FO R WR IT E R S

is e an d

iz e as fo llo ws : SPE LL

adverti e advi e affranchi e a pri e (to info rm) ari e

p s

excis e

exerci e exo rcis e

fran chise im ro vise p inci se

mcis e

circu

mprise

manuprise

WITH i z e — y z e) apo stro phiz e brutaliz e apprize (to can o n i e SPE LL

aggran di e ago n i e an aly e an ato i e anglici e a o lo gi e

z z

See

x =

the

z auto ly z e b aptize

In “

s ec

premise reprise revise rise su ervise surmise sur rise

catechiz e

catho liciz e cauteriz e cen traliz e

z christian iz e civiliz e classicize co lo n iz e criticiz e

characteri e

9 , be o w

i l

med ca wo rk

Whilst" is

merchandise

apprai e) autho ri e

en ter ri e

m p

s chastise co

mpro mise

de ise des ise devise d isfranchise dis guise em rise en fran chise

p s

WITH is e

Un ted States

no w

ll ll ally p f

genera y spe ed

the fo rm gener .

“

techn

re erred

” .

in Eng and , but it is to b e avo ded in

SPELLIN G

immo rtaliz e italiciz e j eo pardiz e legaliz e liberaliz e lo caliz e magn etiz e man umiz e memo rializ e merceriz e mesmeriz e metamo rphiz metho diz e min imiz e mo dern iz e mo n o po liz e mo raliz e n atio n aliz e n aturaliz e ne utraliz e o rgan iz e

lliz e cr s ta

demo raliz e deputiz e do gmatiz e eco no miz e emphasiz e energiz e epito miz e eq ualiz e eulo giz e evangeliz e extempo riz e familiariz e fertiliz e fo ssiliz e fratem iz e galvaniz e generaliz e go rmandiz e harmo niz e hellen iz e human iz e

T he

primary

o s traciz e

s o lilo q uiz e

o xid iz e

s peciali z e

paralyz e particulariz e pas teuriz e patro niz e philo so phiz e plagiariz e po lariz e pro es s io n aliz e pro tes tan tiz e pul eriz e realiz e reco gn iz e reo rgan iz e re o lutio niz e s atiriz e s candaliz e scrutiniz e s ign aliz e s o lemniz e

s piritualiz e s tan dardiz e

matiz

s tig

s u s idiz e s ummariz e

yllo giz e symbo liz e s

mpathiz

sec

tran q uili z e t rann iz e u tiliz e

vapo riz e visualiz e vitaliz e vo cali e vulcaniz e z

ulgariz e

o f the

) above) : ho ein g s ho ein g

e eing

1 (1

agreeing d ein g

tan taliz e tempo riz e

f ollowin g participles ret ain the ﬁn al

word (see

hieing

s ingeing

tin gein g

following participles illustrate the omiss ion o f be f ore the termin al (see sec 1 (1) above) :

T he

the 6 abridging ackn o wledging

bluing

changing enco uragin g

arguin g awing

ﬁlin g ﬁring

biting

mo vin g

gluing grudging icing is s uing j udgin g “

o rgan iz o wing

trudgin g

truing

Differentiate between farther bY usin8 the form er in the s ense o f 5

at a gre ater distan ce

over

”

“

;

”

an d

“

”

further “ more remote “ the latter in the sense of more

”

in addition

r end ;

the arthe

a further

”

ing

reaso n

he wen t s till farther ;

further

s ugges ted ;

M AN UAL F OR

WRITER S “

”

f orms of add ress (vocative) use the O wi th “ out a comma following ; f or an exclamation use Oh f ollowed by a commaor an exclamation point (see p 58 ch ap iv s ec 3 2 ; ch ap v se cs 5 O tho u mo s t mighty ruler " Oh that I had n ever b een bo rn 6

”

F orm the possessive o f proper names en din g in if m onosyllabic by addin g an s or another sibilant apostrophe an d 3 ; ifo f more than o n e syllable by addin g an apostrophe alone : King James s Vers io n B urns s po ems M arx s theo ries ; M o ses law Jesus birth Demo s thenes o ratio n s B erlio z co m po s itio ns ; fo r co nvenien ce s ak e But in the case o f proper n am es en ding in a s ilent sib i l ant the po ssessive is fo rmed by the addition o f the apos tro phe an d 3 whether the word is m onosy ll ab ic or not : Charlevo ix s dis co veries ; Illin o is s legislature ; Des M o in es s 7

’

po pulatio n ;

’

M aupas ’s writin gs

Be fo re soun de d h long u (or eu an d the wor d s “ “ o ne on ce use a as the form o f the indeﬁni te article (not 8

”

( i

”

a ho tel, a harmo n ic, ahis to rical, a un io n , a eupho nio us wo rd , s uch a o n e ,

day ,

a o n ce

read

bo o k

T he ligatures ce an d (2 are not use d at the present either in Latin an d Greek word s , or in word s

from these langu ages In English these words are written either with ac o e separ ately or with e alone The ligature is retained however in Old E nglish an d in F r en ch an d other m od ern langu ages : aetas ; Oedi pus Tyram ms ; aes thetic ; (e uvre b ut : man euv er ; lElfred bu t : Alfred

ad opted in t o English

SPELLIN G

to the exceptions note d in s ec 2 7 spell out religious civil an d mi li tary titles o f honor an d respe ct and f orm s o f address pre ceding the nam e : Admiral Dewey ; General M cclellan ; Bis ho p Kan e Subje c t

1 0.

out Christian names as George Charles “ an d von as part o f a John (not : G eo Ch as person s n ame except where the abbreviated form is used in quoted matter or in original signatures (see chap v sec I ) 12 T reat all numbers in conne cted groups ali ke as far as possible ; do not use ﬁgures f or som e an d spell out others ; if the largest contai ns three or more di gits use ﬁgures for all (see below s ec The fo rce emplo yed during the three mo n ths was 8 7 9 3 and 1 0 6 res pectiv ely Spell

I I.

”

’

A s ageneral rule however d ecimals d egrees dimensions distances enumerations money percentage weights an d like expressions shoul d be given in ﬁgures : 4 5 miles 3 cubic feet 2 4 pages I I I bus hels 9 per etc cen t (see chap v s ec 43 po un ds .

Spell out roun d numbers nu mbers in tens , hundred s , thous and s , 13

bo ut three tho usand

approximate

T he attendan ce was

or millions) :

mated at ﬁve hundred ;

es ti

wo rd s

a thes is

out all numbers no matter how high a senten ce : ,

ldren und er

chi

and

y three men

n ine t

eighteen ,

Spell

men cin g F ive hundred the s hip

bes ides

4 1 7 wo men , an d

o f the crew ,

m 1 89

wen t do wn wi th

A M AN UAL F OR

WR ITERS

When this is imprac ticable or f or an y reason und esirable re constru ct the sentence ; e g T he to tal numb er o f tho se who wen t do wn with the s hip was

5 9 3 men ,

etc

Spell

15.

out the time o f

day in

ordinary re adi ng

matter :

fo ur ;

’

at ha pas t two in the a tern o o n ; at se en -

l k

o c oc

enum erations an d always in conne ction wi th A M an d P M use ﬁgures : “ at 4 : 1 5 P M (o mit o clo ck in such co nnectio ns ) Statistically , in .

’

1 6.

Spell

o ut

y years

eight

fo urteen

”

ages :

and

fo ur

mo n ths

ldren b etween

o ld ;

chi

s ix

and

out numbers o f sessions o f Congress o f mi litary bo dies o f thoroughfares o f centuries o f Egyp tian dynasties an d o f all sim ilar categories unless brevity is an import ant consid er ation (see ch ap iv se cs 2 1 Fifty eighth Co ngres s s eco nd sessio n ; Fifteenth Infan try Sixth Co ngres s io nal Dis trict; Seco nd Ward ; Fifth Avenue ; n ineteenth cen tury ; Fifth Dynas ty 17.

Spell

1 8.

Spell

in the

out re ferences to

nin eties

particular decades :

out n ames o f m on ths except in statis tical matter or in long enumerations (see pp 1 30 fro m January 1 to April 1 5 (o mit after dates st d rd nd 19

Spell

and th)

2 0.

and in

Spell

“

out Unite d St ates except in quotations su ch conne ctions as : Gener al Scho ﬁeld ”

SPE LLIN G

“ .

Oregon

; in

”

Geological Survey

75 an d simi lar

footnotes

re f erences :

“

Spell out R ai lro ad F ort , M ount , “ ” Port in geographi cal appellations (see lists on an d 2 1.

”

p C hicago , M ilwaukee

Fo rt Wayne

St Paul R ailro ad .

Po rt Huro n , M o un t Elias

In most

(no t:

R R .

ses spell out all names o f publications T hi s rule like many another is open to modiﬁcation in particular instan ces f or whi ch no dire ctions can here be Expe dien cy n ature o f context an d est ablishe d given custom may be consid ere d Generally ifin d oubt spell out ; good taste will condone offenses in this direction more re adily than in the opposite 22.

AB B RE VIA TION S AN D CON TRACTION S

Word s are of ten shortened by me ans o f the omission o f a letter or o f letters f rom the midd le o f the word the omission being indicated by an apostrophe T hese are called contr actions ; (see chap v secs 1 they are not followe d by a perio d : 23 .

’ ’

manufacturin

ass

’

ass o ciatio n

A bbreviate names o f states territories an d possessions of the Uni ted States f ollowing those o f towns as f ollows : 2 4.

Ala Alas a Ariz Ark Cal .

k .

C o lo Co n n DC Del F la .

Ga Idaho Ill In d .

Kan

Me M ass .

76 Md M ich M in n M is s Mo M o nt

M AN UAL F OR PI

N ev N H NJ N M N Y Ohio Okla Ore Pa

PR R I SC SD T enn T ex .

N eb

Philipp ine T H = T errito ry o f H awaii Islands Po rto R ico Utah Va Vt as h Wis W Va .

WR IT ER S

Wy o

techn ical matter (f ootnote re f erences bibliog “ “ Company an d Brothers ra phies etc ) abbreviate “ in names o f commer cial ﬁrms : an d the word an d In

25.

”

The M acmillan Co

M ilwaukee

M acmillan

St Paul R ailro ad .

Harper B ro s ; Chicago , .

text matter not o f a te chnical ch arac ter Company “ an d Brothers shoul d however be spelled out : Harper B ro thers have recen tly publis hed two wo rk s o f travel ; The C en tury C o mpan y ann o un ces a new s eries ; T he extrao r d inary s to ry o f the So uth Sea Co mpan y An d when the n ame o f a commercial con cern does not “ an d should be spelle d out : consist o f proper n ames the American Steel an d Wire Co ”

”

A bbreviate

2 6.

n am

“

Saint

”

“

Saints

”

be fore

proper

es :

St Lo uis , St Peter s Church, SS Peter and Paul ’

A bbreviate M r M essrs M rs (F rench M M M M me M lle) Dr (but see pp 1 3 3 R ev Ho n St an d Es q Spell out all other religi ous civi l an d mi li t ary ti tles o f honor an d f orms o f add ress Do not except on the envelope an d in the address line of letters write the R ev the Ho n (see s ec 1 0 above ; ch ap iv s ec 6 an d chap vii p 27. .

SPELLIN G

ref erences to Scripture passages the books o f the B ible and o f the Apoc ryph a and vers ions o f the B ible should be abbreviated as f ollows (see chap iv 2 8.

sec

OLD TESTAI ENT

Exo d Lev

Deut

Jer

R uth I an d H Sam I an d II ings .

Song

Dan

Ho s

Hab

Amo s O ad

So l

(or Can t )

Zeph

Jo el

M ic

Lam Ez e

Jo nah

Is a

Jo sh Judg

I and II Chro n Ez ra N eh Esther Jo b Ps (Pss ) Pro v

M al

NE W TESTAMENT

I and II T hese I and II T im T itus Philem Heb

I and II Co r Gal Eph Phil Co l

M att M ark

I an d II Pet I, II , and III Jo hn Jude R ev

Luke Jo hn Acts Ro m

Jas

C Y

APO R P HA

I and II E sd To b = T o b it Ith Judith

VE R SI ON S OF THE BIB LE

ER V .

RE ERRED T O

Autho riz ed Vers io n R evised Vers io n R evised Vers io n margin American Standard R evised Vers io n American Standard R evised Vers io n margin nglis h R evis ed Versio n English R evised Vers io n margin Englis h Vers io n (s ) o f the Bible Vulgate Septuagint ,

E V

COMM ONLY

R V R V

P1 o fM an I , II , HI , and IV

So ng o f Children Sus B el and Drago n

R es t o fEs ther isd o f So l Ecclus Bar

(APOC )

Vulg

= .

LXX

M AN UAL F OR

WRITER S

re feren c es in f ootnotes an d in matter “ o f a bibliographical char acter abbreviate volum e “ “ “ “ “ article nu mber division ch apter ps alm “ “ “ “ “ “ se ction c olu m n verse line note page “ ﬁgure f ollowed by their num ber (s ee chap iv s ec “ f ollowing af ter the number an d abbreviate the wor d to d enote co ntinu ance or sequ en ce : Div III V o l I (plu ral Vo ls ) N o 1 (N o s ) Ps 2 0 29

In li terary

”

chap

(chaps )

(arts )

art iii .

s ec

( pages 5 to 7 inclusi e) , pp 5 = if a e ( page 5 and the p g ) , pp 5 =

(s ecs )

co l 6 p 5 F ig 7 (Figs ) ; pp 5 7 page 5 an d the fo llo win g ,

—

f ( fo llo wing pages) =

A bbr eviate the co mmon d esign ations o f weights an d me asures in the m etric system as well as the s y m bols of me asurem ent in common use when f ollowing a nu meral 1 m 2 dm 4 mm ; c m ( cubic meter) c d c c 3 cm 30

s ec

; g

and

(See chap v .

sec

min

AU ( Angs trtim units) .

( lcm ( hp .

ho rs e po wer) , C lo wes t co mmo n multiple) ,

in ; .

etc

f ollowing is a list o f the standard abbreviations f or te chnical valu e s recommen d ed by the A merican Insti tute o f E lectrical E ngineers :

T he

altern ating

curren t

— (wh

brake ho rse po wer bo iler ho rs e po wer -

Britis h thermal candle po w er -

units

en u sed

j ective ;

b hp bo iler h p B tu .

— p .

as a

mpo und

o therwis e s pell o u t

)

SPELLIN G

meters circular mils

cir

co unter e

c en ti

unter electro mo tive fo rce cubic d irect current ric ho rse po wer electro mo tive fo rce feet foo t po unds

elect

a co mpo und ive ; o therwise spell o ut) us ed as

at d

(when

1 pj e mf .

ft ft lb gal .

gallo ns g ains g ams g am calo ies

gr g g cal

— .

r r r

mils

ho urs in ches indicated ho rs e po wer kilo grams kilo gram meters kilo gram calo ries kilo meters kilo watts kilo watt ho urs magneto mo tive fo rce miles per hr (s eco nd) millimeters milligrams minutes

meters meter kilo grams

min

111

po un ds revo lutio ns per minute s eco nd s s

—

re quare— ro o t o f mean s qua -

kilo vo lts kilo vo lt amperes watt ho urs watts per candle po wer yards -

—

per min

rev

or r

pm .

eﬁective, o r r

kv kv a watt hr watts per

ms .

In the cas e o fhyphen ated abbreviatio n s , the ﬁrst element N OTE o fthe co mpo un d do es n o t take aperio d .

A M AN UAL F OR

WR ITER S

C OMP OUN DIN G

ompoundin g o f word s is accompli she d either by joining two word s so as to mak e one word or by T he mod ern conn e cting two wor d s with a hyphen tend en cy is against the hyph en an d in f avo r of uni ting in o n e two word s whi ch when uni te d convey but one id e a: s cho o lro o m wo rks ho p headquarters T he

howe ver this practice can be spoken of only as a tenden cy an d there are many compound word s which are better hyphenate d than consolidate d T he following rules are d esigne d to cover su ch cases T hus far,

Hyphenate as a rul e, nouns f ormed by the

co m

bin ation of two nouns one o f whi ch stand s in an objective relation to the other : ry— teller

ho lder, pro perty wo rship, child s tudy ; wo o d turning, clay mo deling

mind

read er, s to

of ﬁce

o wn er ;

hero

ommon an d brie f compound s usu ally a spe ciﬁc or te chn ical sense : Exceptions are

lawgiver, taxpay er, pro o fread er,

bo o kk eeper

s to ckho lder

A large group o f these word s is f orme d by word s the ﬁrst elem ent of whi ch is a verb al noun in z ng stan ding in the s am e rel ation to the se con d element as if it were the object o f a preposition : '

bo ardi ng ho us e -

din in g hall, -

walkin g s tick , pgin ting o ﬁice, s tumbling blo ck , wo rking m an -

s eeping ro o m, -

s tarting~po in t,

dwelling plac e, -

s teppin g s to ne , -

SPELLIN G

A verbal noun ending in z ng uni ted wi th a not governing a follow preposition used absolutely in g noun) should t ake a hyphen : the pu tting ih o r taking o ut o fa hyphen '

Hyphenate two or more word s (except proper n ames f orming a unity in themselves) combin e d in to 33

adje ctive preceding a noun : s s in ves tmen t, s o called Cro es us , well kno wn autho r, ﬁrs t cla high s cho o l co urs e, half dead ho rs e, up to date apparel ; but : N ew T es tamen t times , Old En glis h s pelling

one

But do n o t connect by a hyphen adje ctives or participles with adverbs ending in ly or su ch combinations as the above when f ollowin g the noun or when predicative : highly d evelo ped s pecies ; a man well kn o wn in the n eigh Her go wn and carriage were b o rho o d ; the fly leaf s o called ; s trictly up to date 3 4 Hyphenate two or more nouns when combined in an adje ctival sense be f ore a proper noun : the marty r pres iden t Linco ln ; the po et artis t R o ssetti '

“

mother Compoun d s o f fellow father “ “ “ “ “ brother sister d aughter parent an d f oster should be hyphenated when forming the ﬁrst element o f the co mpoun d : lo ve (but : fello w man fello w bein gs father— fatherland) ﬁ cer s is ter natio n fo s ter so n daughter mo ther— to ngue bro ther o f cells parent wo rd “ in dicatin g the fourth great 3 6 Compoun d s o f degree in a dire ct line o f d escent shoul d be hyphen ated : — r h e a t r f r r a n a t e d e a t g grandso n g g 35

“

”

A M AN UAL F OR

“

WRITER S “

Compound s o f d ealer go d (when this word “ f orm s the se cond element o f the co mpound) lif e “ “ “ maker master an d world take a hyphen : co al dealer s un go d (but : go dso n go d father go ds end) mas ter s tro k e to o l m aker life principle (exceptio n : lifetime) 37

”

mas terpiece) wo rld

(

exceptio n :

“

po wer

qu arter etc combine d with a noun should b e followed by a hyph en : title ; q uarter mile half truth half to n e half year half— 38

Hal f

”

“

Compound s h aving self or by element o f the compound are hyphenate d : s elf eviden t self res pect ; b y pro duct b y laws 39

”

the

ﬁrst

“

Combinations with fold should be written as one word if the number cont ains only one syllable ; ifit cont ains m or e as two : ﬁfteen fo ld a hun dred fo ld two fo ld ten fo ld ; 4o

”

formed by the

A dje ctives

“

s uﬁi xatio n

o f li ke to a no un are usu ally written as one word if the noun c ontains only one syllable (except when end in g in l) if it contains more (or is a pro per noun) they should be hyphenate d : childlik e ho melik e warlik e go dlik e ; bell like ; eel like wo man like bus iness lik e ; N apo leo n lik e (but : Chris tlik e) 41 .

”

“

“ Vice ex elect ener l a an d lieuten g co nstitutin g parts o f titles an t should be connecte d with the chi ef noun by a hyphen : Vice Co nsul T aylo r ex President R o o s evelt the go verno r elect the po s tmas ter gen eral a lieutenan t co lo nel

42 .

”

SPELLIN G “

non should ordinari ly be f ollowe d by a hyphen except in the comm onest word s : no n unio nis t no n in terference ; n o n co n ta but : gio us no n age no n s en s e no n d es cript no n ess ential no n co mb atant 43

T he pre ﬁx

“

T he preﬁxes ante “ “ “ inter in fra d emi 44

“

anti “

intra “

“

post or dinarily

pre

semi sub super tr are join e d to the word without a hyphen unless f ollowed by the same vo wel as that in whi ch they terminate : te

ber

an techam

co o rdinate -

Exceptions are

bellum

vr y

graduate, prearrange l, s ubco n s cio us , semian nua

uni e s it

biweekly

) demigo d inframargin al intramural (but : in tra ato mic) po s t (but : pre empt) recas t (but : re enter)

bipartis an co eq ual (but: intern atio nal in ters pers e

an te

an ti imperialis tic ,

(but :

antis eptic

btitle

s uperﬁne ,

such f ormations

triwee l

po s t re o lu tio n ar

trico lo r

as :

an te N icene, an ti Semitic , demi

—v ,

in ter

relie o ,

l; s emi centennia -

ombinations with proper names long or unusu al f ormations an d wor d s in which the omi ssion o f the hyphen would convey a me aning diff erent from that in tend ed (see ch ap iv se cs 1 3 1 7 ; an d below see

an d

pre

R aphaelite,

— f matio

an d

tammaniz

po s tpo ne , re

pulveriz atio n ; -

“

in negative preﬁxes un do not usu ally requ ire a hyphen :

manly ,

fro m refo rmatio n) re co ver (co v er (as dis tinguished fro m recreatio n)

The

(as dis tinguis hed

re creatio n

again ) ,

“

un demo cratic, in an imate, in determin ate,

i mperso n al, as ymmetrical

“

illirn itable,

M AN UAL F OR

WR ITER S “

the hyphen f rom today “ “ “ tonight viewp oint standpoint note p 70 above ) 46

Omi t

’

tomorrow (See sec 2

”

“

”

“

Qu asi extra supra and ultra (pre ﬁxed to anoun or an adjec tive) as a rule call for ahyphen : quasi co rpo ratio n quasi— hi s to rical extra haz ardo us supra tempo ral ultra co ns ervative (but : extrao rdinary Ultramo n tane) 47

”

ﬁxe d

“ .

”

Over a

”

“

under shoul d ordinarily be pre wi thout a hyphen except in unusu al

an d

word

”

ses : o v erweight ; o veremphas iz e o ver s piritualis tic o v er careful ca

u nder ed,

un deres timate ; but :

In f raction al numbers a hyphen the numerator an d

spelled out conne ct by the denomin ator unless either alre ady contains a hyphen : The year is two thirds go n e ; fo ur an d ﬁve sevenths ; thirty hundredths ; b ut : thirty o n e hundred ths But do n o t hyphen ate in su ch cases as : o ne half o fhis fo rtun e he b equeathed to his wido w ; the o ther to charitable ins titutio ns 49

se o f two or m ore compoun d word s o ccurring together which have one o f their component elements in common thi s element is frequently omi tted from all but the last word an d its implication should be indicated by a hyphen (though some wri ters regard this prac tice as an obje c tion able T euto n is m) : in English and German s pe aking co un tries ; o n e ﬁve and ten cent piec es ; Ifthe s tud ent thinks to ﬁnd this character where 5 0 In the .

SPELLIN G

many

4n ni th and tenth century ritic is searching— he must loo k o utside o f manus cript tradi tio n

—

a literary

Euro pe

A hyphen is used to in di cate a prefix or sufi x a syllable not a complete wor d : The prefix a ; the German di minutive suffixes chen and ,

F ollowing is a list of hyphenate d word s of every ficult to clas sify day occurren ce o f which so me ar e dif and others do not fall un der an y o f the cl asse s given abo ve (see sec 3 1 abo ve) : s ubj ect matter after years d eath— rate o bj ect les so n has relief firs t fruits fo lk so n g birth rate bloo d feud foo d stufi well being blo o d relations fo untain head po o r law 52

—

mmo n

sens e

mine

cro ss- exa

cro ss- re erence cro ss - s ectio n

go o d will guin ea pig ho rse po wer man o i war -

ﬁce po s t o f s ea le el -

— p

s ense

so n

erceptio n

in law -

well nigh well wisher will po wer -

C HA PT E R

CAPITALIZATION

T here is pro b ably no subje ct covered by thi s book fer ab o ut which id eas o f good fo rm will be f oun d to dif

more widely than that o f capitaliz ation

It is a subjec t

to tre at with arbitrary rules since it must b e admitted th at in very m any cases there is equ ally goo d authority f or an d against capit aliz ing (see chap viii p 1 5 7 ) a word und er id entical cir cumst ances In the preparation of this book it has been d eemed best ho w ever not to state an y rule in the alternative but to enunciate as the rule to be f ollowed that for which there is n o t o nly good authority but the best authority To a writer accustom ed in an y given case to a pr ac tic e difieren t f rom that calle d f or in thi s book some of these rules may appear arbitrary Each however has been f rame d in view o f its be aring on some other rule or situ ation an d adheren ce to these rules in the prepar ation o f a manuscript or in or dinary practice will insure a harmonious co nsistent whole It is h ar dly necess ary to “ add f or great er cle arness th at a dire c tion to capit al iz e appli es o f co urse only to the first letter o f a word an d n o t to the whole word M any o f these rules have been t aken in an abbrevi ate d an d con densed f orm f rom the M an ual of S ty le (Chi cago : T he University of Chicago Press 3 d dif fi cult

”

CAPIT ALIZATION

C apitaliz e proper nouns an d adjectives : N o rth America E nglis hman ; Eliz ab ethan French

But do n o t capitaliz e proper n am es or their derivatives in whose present generaliz ed accept ation the origin has become forgotten or obscure d : u to pia b o hemian philis tin e plato nic quixo tic mo ro cco (leather) bo yco tt ro man (type) pasteuriz atio n ; ,

taliz e su ch word s as the following when the sense o f ele ctrical units : ampere watt farad henry o hm co ulo mb etc

n o t capi

an d do

used in vo lt

C apitaliz e epithets use d as substitutes for proper names or afﬁxe d to a n am e : the Pretender the Virgin M ary R ichard the Lio n hearted 2.

Alexander the G reat

C apit aliz e nouns an d adjec tives used to designate the Supreme Bein g or Power or an y member o f the Christian T rinity ; an d all pronouns ref erring to the Deity unless closely pre ced ed or followe d by a dis tin c tive n ame or unless the ref erence is otherwise per fe ctly clear the Almighty the R uler o f the univers e the Firs t C aus e the Ab s o lute Pro viden ce (pers o niﬁed) Father So n Ho ly Gho s t “ T rus t n e L o o s th the Spirit Sav io r M ess iah So n o f M a g ; “ When Go d had wo rked s ix Him who rules all things (but : 3

”

days , he

But do

res ted o n

no t capi

the

taliz e such expressions and derivatives as :

(Go d s ) fatherho o d (Jes us ) s o ns hip mes siahs hip mes s ianic ho pe chris to lo gical (b ut : Chris to lo gy) ’

’

A M AN UAL F OR

C apitaliz e the names races an d tribes : 4

WR IT ERS epithets o f

an d

peoples ,

Aryans , Kaﬁrs , N egro es , Ho tten to ts , Bugin ese, C eles tials

“

C apitaliz e the particles in F rench nam es as 1e “ “ “ when standing without a Christian la de du n ame or title preceding ; but no t when pre ceded by su ch nam e or title : 5

”

Le B o ss u , La To rre, De Co ligny , D Aub ign é ’

Bo s su, M iguel de la T o rre , ’ d Aubigné )

Gas pard

(b ut :

Co lign y ,

R en é le

T ho mas

A lways capitaliz e Van in Dutch names ; never capit al “ iz e von in German n ame s : ”

Stephen V an R ens s elaer ; Hugo

—

vo n

M artin s ,

Do b s chii tz fo llo wing amo ng

vo n

N o re Pers o n al preferen ce is re spo ns i le fo r the ’ o thers , as excep tio n s : Henry van Dy e, J H an t HOE

C apitaliz e titles o f honor an d respec t whether religious or mili tary prece ding the n am e an d civil acad emi c d egrees in abbreviate d f orm following the nam e ; all titles of honor or o f nobili ty when re ferrin g to spe cific persons e ither pre ce din g the n ame or used in place o f the proper n am e ; familiar n ames applied to particular persons ; orders (decorations) an d the titles accompanying them ; titles without the name used in dire ct address ; titles without the nam e when used o f existin g incumbents o f office ; an d su ch word s “ “ “ “ as President C z ar King K aiser “ “ Sultan an d standi ng alone when re ferring Pope to a spe cific ruler or incum bent : King Geo rge IV ex President Taft R ear admiral Dewey United States Co mmissio ner o f Educatio n Claxto n St Paul 6

”

CAPIT ALIZATION

Father Bo niface Deaco n Smith; the Prince o fWales His M aj es ty Yo ur Grace ; Dav id Starr Jo rdan Ph D LL D (Litt D Sc D “ the Father o f his C o un try ; Knight Co mmander o f “ Allo w me to s ugges t Judge ; the Secretary o f the the B ath; Treas ury ; the Bis ho p o fLo ndo n ; but : T he king in En glan d the cz ar i n R us s ia the s ultan in Turkey repres en t o ppo s ite extremes ,

”

mo n archical idea

o f the

But do n o t capitaliz e the o ffi cial title o f a person when the title follows the name o r the title when standin g out the n am e (with the exceptions note d alone with above) or when f ollowe d by the n ame it is prece de d “ by the article the : Wo o dro w Wilso n president o fthe United States ; Paul Sho rey pro fess o r o f Greek ; the empero r o f G ermany (meaning gen erally fice no t a s pecific in dividual) ; the senato r an y ho lder o f the o f (when no t referring to a specific pers o n ) ; the apo stle Paul “ an d an d similar term s N ature 7 C apitaliz e abstract ide as when personifie d : ,

”

F o r N ature wields her

s cepter

merciless ly ;

representatio ns

Vice in the o ld English mo rality plays 8 C apitaliz e n am es f or the B ible an d other s acre d books : Ho ly (Sacred) Scriptures Ho ly Writ Wo rd o f Go d Bo o k o f Bo o ks ; Ko ran Vedas M is hna the Upanis hads Apo crypha But do n o t capit aliz e adjectives derived from su ch nouns : biblical s criptural ko ranic vedic talmudic apo cryphal 9 C apitali z e books an d divisions o f the B ible an d divisions o f other s acred boo ks (s ee ch ap iii s ec 2 8 ; ch ap vi s ec 4)

Old Tes tament, Pen tateuch, Exo dus , II (Seco nd) Chro n icles , s o f the) the Bo o k o f Jo b , the (M o s aic) Law and the (writing

A M AN UAL F

oR WRITER S

Pro phets , M ino r Pro phets , Wis do m Literature , Go s pel o f Luk e, Syn o ptic Go s pels , the Fo urth Go s pel, Pas to ral Epis tles , Sermo n on

the

M o un t

“

”

“

”

taliz e word s like book gospel “ “ : a s s l i n su h uses a m c epistle p the ﬁve b o o ks o f M o ses the ﬁrs t thirty ps alms biblical apo ca

But

no t capi

”

lypses

C apitaliz e versions an d edi tions o f the B ible : R evis ed King James s Vers io n Autho riz ed Vers io n Vers io n Po lychro me B ible Septuagin t (LXX ) Peshitto 1 0.

’

(see chap

iii,

s ec

C apitaliz e the n ames or titles o f biblical par ables the parable o f the Pro digal So n

12 .

C apitali z e such mis cellaneous te rms

as :

Las t Supper, E ucharis t, the Pass io n , the T welve (apo s tles ) , the Seven ty (dis ciples ) , the Sn ﬁering Servan t, the Go lden R ule .

C apitaliz e the names o f poli tical parties religious denomi n ations or sec ts an d phi losophi cal l iterary an d artistic schools an d their adherents : C o nserv ative Chris tian N atio n al Lib eral ; R epublican Pro tes tan t C atho lic Papis t Ultramo n tane R efo rm ed G reek Ortho do x An abaptis t Seven th Day Ad ven tis ts the Es tablis h ment High Church; Epicurean Sto ic Gno s ticism (but : n eo Plato nism ps eudo Chris tianity— s ee s ec 2 4 b elo w ; chap iii s ecs the R o man tic mo v emen t ; the Symb o lic s cho o l o f painters But do no t capitaliz e an y o f these or simi lar word s or their d erivatives when used in their original or acquired general sense : repub lican fo rm o f go vernment a true d emo crat and a co n s ervative s tates man the co mmunis tic theo ries ; catho licity o f mind puritanical id eas pharisaic s upercilio us ness ; epicurean 13 .

tas tes

CAPITALIZATION

“

C apitaliz e the word chure in properly ci te d titles of nationally organiz ed bo di es o f believers ; or when forming part of the name o f a particular e diﬁce : Church o fR o me Church o f the Latter day Sain ts ; Church o f the Ho ly Sepulcher Fifth Avenu e B aptis t Church 14

C apitaliz e the proper (ofﬁ cial) ti tles o f social religious e du cational political comm er cial an d in dus trial organiz ations and institutions : '

15 .

Unio n League Club Knights T emplar ; Bo y Sco uts ; Yo ung Peo ple s So ciety o f C hris tian En deavo r As s o ciated Charities ; Smithso n ian In s titutio n ; the Uni vers ity High Scho o l ; Co o k Co unty Demo cracy ,

’

But do no t capitaliz e su ch generic terms when use d to d esign ate a cl ass ; nor when st anding alone even if ap pli ed to a speciﬁc insti tution except to avoid ambiguity : yo ung peo ple s s o cieties the high scho o l at R o ckfo rd lo cal typo graphical unio ns ,

’

C apitaliz e the n am es o f monastic orders an d their m embe rs : the Order o f St F rancis the Little Sis ters o f the Po o r 1 6.

C arthus ian s 17 .

C apitaliz e the names of cree ds

o f faith : Apo stles iii,

s ec

an d

—

C reed , N icene Creed (but an te N icene Augs b urg Co nfes s io n , T hirty nin e Articles ’

on fessions s ee chap

C apit aliz e the n ames of conventions congresses expositions etc : Co un cil o f T rent Parliamen t o f R eligio n s Third An nual C o nferen ce o f the Wes tern Eco no mic So ciety Wo rld s Pure 18

’

Fo o d

Expo s itio n

A M AN UAL F OR

WRITER S

“

”

C apit aliz e the word father when used f or “ chur ch father re f ormers when use d o f R efo r an d mation le aders if the meani n g would be ambiguous otherwi se : the early Fathers the Pilgrim Fathers the R efo rm ers 19

”

C apitaliz e the names o f legislative jud iciary an d admi nistrative bodies an d govern mental d epart ments an d their branches when speciﬁcally applied : Co ngres s the Ho use o f R epresen tativ es the Co mmittee o f Ways and M eans the Ho use o f Co mmo ns the General Assembly 2o

o f Illin o is

But do n o t capitaliz e su ch general or in complete designa tions as : the natio n al as s embly the s tate legis lature the co uncil the departmen t the b o ard z r C apitaliz e ordinals use d to d esignate sessions o f Congress names o f regimen ts Egyptian dyn ast ies an d in similar connections (see ch ap iii s ec the Fifty s ixth Co ngress ; the Sev en th Illino is R egimen t ,

the E ighteen th

Dyn as ty

C apitaliz e generic terms for political divisions : (1 ) when the term is an organic part of the name an d f ollows the proper n ame direc tly : Ho ly R o man Empire French R epublic Uni ted K in gdo m N o rthwes t Territo ry C o o k Co un ty ; 22.

(2 ) when with the preposition of it is used as an integral part of the name to in di cate certain minor administrative sub divisions in the U n ite d S t ates : “

”

Department o fthe Lak es , Bo ro ugh o fM anhattan ;

CAPIT ALIZAT ION

(3) when used singly

the

acc epted design ation

f or

speciﬁc division : the M iddle Wes t Canada Wes t the Do minio n the Wes t Side ; (4) when it is part of a fanciful or popular appellation used as a re al geographical name : the W indy City the City o fBro therly Lo ve the Ho o s ier State But do n o t capit aliz e su ch terms when standin g alone or when not an integr al part o f the speciﬁc n ame : the city ; the empire o f R uss ia; s tate o f Illino is co un ty o f Co o k city o f Chicago ,

iii ,

Capitaliz e numbered poli tical divisions (see chap

sec

E leventh Co ngression al Dis trict, s eco n d

Seventh

Ward

T hirty

Precinct

C apitaliz e the names o f political alliances an d su ch te rms from se cular or e cclesiastical hi story as have through their associations acquire d spe cial signi ﬁcan ce as design ations f or parties classes movemen ts etc (see s ec 1 3 above) : Pro tes tant League Ho ly Alliance Dreibun d ; the R o s es the R o undheads Indepen den ts Independ ency (Englis h his to ry) N o nco n fo rmist Diss enter Separatis t 2 4.

C apitaliz e generic terms f orming a part o f geo graphical n ames : 25.

in Atlantic Ocean, Dead Sea, B an

’

B ay , Gulf

M exico

But do no t capitaliz e wor ds of this clas s when simply add ed by way o f d es cription to the speciﬁc name wi th out forming an organic part o f such name : the river Elb e the des ert o f Sahara the is land o fM ad agascar ,

M AN UAL FOR

rule just state d the following li st will

Subject to the found useful :

CAPITALIZE

IN SIN G ULAR

FORM

FOLLOWIN

Fo rk

FO LLOWIN G

FOR M WHE N

FOR M

N AM E ; AND IN P LUR AL

E ITHE R

FOR M

BE ORE OR AF TE R Tn

M o un t

F all s

Oas is Pas s Pe ak Po in t

Isle Lak e

Spring

B E ORE THE N AME

Desert

Fo rt

IMME DIATEL

THE N AME

M o un tain

IN SIN G ULAR

Bay Bayo u Camp (military) Cape Dalles

R ange R eser atio n R idge Ri er R un

Islan d

CAPITALIZE

Park

Parish (La )

IN SI N GU LAR 0R PLU R AL

Hill

IM MEDIATEL

N arro ws

Gulch

CAPIT ALIZE

Harbo r Head Ho llo w M es a

Fo res t

Co un ty Crater

Y WHE N

ONL

G THE N AME

Creek Delta

Archipelago Bo ro ugh B ran ch (s tream) B utte

WR IT ER S

Po rt Sea Strait alley o lcano

V V

C apitaliz e adjectives an d nouns use d singly or in to distin gu ish deďŹ n ite regions an d when conjun ction use d in conne ction with a geogr aphi cal name ; an d also terms applied to groups o f states : Old Wo rld Wes tern Hemis phere N o rth Po le Equato r the N o rth the Eas t (the Orien t) the F ar Eas t; the N o rth So uth Ea s t Wes t (Uni ted States ) ; N o rthern Euro e p So uthern Califo rnia; N o rth Atlan tic s tates M idd le Wes tern 2 6.

s tates

But subje ct to the foregoing rule do no t capitaliz e adj ec tives derive d f rom such n am es 0 1 nouns simply d esi g n ating dire ction or point of compass : o rien ta l cus to ms the so uthern s tates a so utherner (but : N o rthman Scandin avian) ; the win d is fro m the west ,

CA PITALIZ ATION

or der to distin gu ish between a local an d a world wide application the latter should be capi taliz ed : Eas tern peo ples peo ples o f the Orien t) ; Wes tern n atio n s In

C apitaliz e the names o f thoroughfares parks squ ares blo cks buildi ngs etc (see chap iii sec Drexel Avenue R ingstrasse Via Appia Chicago Drainage C anal ; Linco ln Park ; T rafalgar Square ; M o nadno ck Blo ck ; Lak es ide Building Capito l White Ho use 27

But do n o t capitaliz e su ch gener al designations of build “ “ “ library etc ings as courthouse post o ﬁi ce except in conne ction with the place in which they are situ ated ”

”

C apitaliz e names o f important events : T hirty Years War R evo lutio n (French) War o f Independ Civil War (American) ence Whis key Ins urrectio n (American) Franco Pruss ian War B attle o f Gettys burg ; Lo uis iana Purchas e 2 8.

’

C apitaliz e the names o f civic holidays an d e ccle s ias tical fast an d f e ast days Fo urth o f July Labo r Day Thanksgiving Day ; Pas so ver As h Wedn es day F eas t o f T ab emacles Chris tmas Day

29 .

C apit aliz e comm only accepte d appellations f or hi storical epochs period s in the history of a l angu age or “ liter ature an d geological ages an d strata the word age itself being capitaliz ed only where a failure to do so would result in ambiguous m eaning : 30

”

M iddle Ages ) , C rus ades , R enais s an ce, R efo rmatio n , In quis itio n , Co mmune (Paris ) ; Old Engli s h (OE M iddle High German (M HG) ; the Age o f s ee chap v, sec

(bu t :

Sto n e age

Eliz ab eth; Pleis to cene

A M AN UAL F OR

CaPitaliz

ti tles o f speciﬁc tre aties

(juridical) bills etc : Treaty o f Verdun Peace ,

acts ,

laws

co rdat,

WR ITE R S

Prague, Ed ict

(o f the United

the Co ns titutio n

o f N an tes ,

Co n

States ) , Declaratio n

Independen ce, Act o fE mancipatio n ,

M agn a C (h) arta Co rn Law R efo rm B ill (Englis h) Fo urteenth Amendment ,

“

Capi taliz e the exclamations

(see chap

iii,

“

an d

”

s ec

A s a rule capitaliz e nouns followed by a numeral — — R in dicatin g rt c ul a rly c a i t a l i z e d o m a n nu m er a l a i a p p their order in a sequence : R o o m 1 6 Ps 2 0 Grade IV Act I Vo l I N o 2 Bo o k II Div III Part IV 33

But do n o t capitaliz e su ch min or sub divisions or their abbreviations as : rule 9 sec 4 s cen e i art iii chap 2 (ii) p 7 (vii) vs 1 1 ,

l 5,

R e f erences

parts

a spe ciﬁc

work should be

taliz ed :

capi

The Intro ductio n s tates ;

T he Index is

very co mplete

But gen eral referen ces should not be capitaliz ed : The bo o k has a co mplete ind ex (See chap v s ec .

C apitaliz e the ﬁrst wor d o f a ci ted spee ch or thought in direct di scourse whether prece de d by a colon or a comma (see chap v secs 9 35

leavin g he

With the wo rds

“ ,

mark ed :

N ever shall I

“

N ever

s hall

fo rget

fo rge t this day

” ,

this day

he departed

”

;

CAPIT ALIZAT ION

resolutions capi taliz e the ﬁrst word following “ “ Whereas and R esolved (see chap vi sec 36

”

WHEREAS

It has pleas ed Go d Res olved , That

therefo re be it

C apitaliz e the ﬁrst word af ter a colon only when introdu cing a complete passage or a senten ce whi ch would h ave an ind epend ent meaning as in summariz a tions an d quotations not closely connecte d with what prece d es ; or where the colon has the weight o f su ch “ “ “ ” expressions as as follows namely for instance or a similar phr ase an d is f ollowed by a logically complete sentence : 37

”

I wis hto say : I t will b e seen fro m the ab o ve that alternative ; As the o ld pro verb has it : Has te makes

co nc us io n

there is n o

was te ;

theo

the s ur ace, the g as s

The mo men t the ho t

breaks

is :

cu ren t s tri es

t aliz e the ﬁrst word o f a quotation if immediately connected wi th what preced es ; or the ﬁrs t “ word af ter a colon if an implied namely or a similar term is f ollowed by a bri e f explanatory phrase logically d epen d ent upon the pre cedi n g clause ; or if the colon in dicates a note o f comment : But

no t ca pi

”

The o ld

adage is t ue that

planatio ns p esent thems elves : train, o r he was detained at the

“

has te

eithe

makes was te ” ; T wo ex he came to o late fo r the

s tatio n

A s a rule capitaliz e the ﬁrs t word in sec tions o f an enumeration if an y one link contains two or more distin ct clauses s eparated by a semi colon colon or 38

A M AN UAL F OR

WRI TE R S

upon the s am e term (see chap v s ec His reaso n s fo r refus al were thes e : (1 ) He did no t have the time (2 ) He d id no t have the means ; o r at any rate had no funds available ; but : He o bj ected that (1 ) he did no t have the time ; (2 ) he did n o t have the mean s ; o r at any rate had n o fund s available perio d , unless all are d epen d ent pre ce ding an d leading up to them

C apitaliz e all the prin cipal word s nouns pro nouns adje ctives adverbs verbs ﬁrst an d last word s) in English titles o f publications (books pam reports pro cee dings phlets do cuments periodicals sections an d their d ivi sions (parts chapters in subj ec ts o f lec tures papers po em s articles toasts etc (see sec 43 below) : 39

S tand ard

Thes aurus

E nglis h

Words

and

Phras es ;

Harper s Di ctio n ary of Class ical Li terature and Anti quiti es will b e “ fo und a useful article o n The T emples o f Ancien t R o me” ; a ’

to as t to

“

The Gues t

o f the

Even in g

”

(See

chap

s ec

f oreign titles in addition to capit aliz ing the ﬁrst wo r d f ollow these general rules : a) In Latin titles capit aliz e proper nouns an d adj ec tives d erive d there f rom : 40

mpendio s a do ctrin a, De bello Gildon ico

b) In

F rench Italian Spanish an d Scan dinavian titles capitaliz e proper nouns but not adje ctives derive d there f ro m : ,

La vi e de R ons ard, His to ire de la litté rature frangais e; Il B oc cacci o

‘

oetas

a N apoli , N ovelle

e racco nti

popolari italiaui; An to logi a de

lirico s cas tellan os , S vens ka litteraturens his toric ‘

CAPIT ALIZAT ION

)

In German an d Dani sh ,

capi

taliz e all noun s but not the adje ctives except German adje ctives derived from the names o f pe rsons : c

Ges chichte des deuts chen F eudalwes ens (but : Die Homeris che Frage) ; F rems krit i der n ittende Aarhund red e .

d) In Dutch ,

capi

taliz e all noun s derived f rom proper nouns : Ges chiednis det N ed erlands che Taal

an d all adjecti ves

C apitaliz e ti tles of anci ent manus cripts (abbrevi ation : M S in the sin gular ; M SS in the plural) : 4r

Co dex B ernens is ; Co d C an o nicianus .

titles o f newspapers magaz ines an d s imi l ar publications the d eﬁni te article should not as a rule be capitaliz ed or treated as part o f the title (see chap vi sec 42

In menti oning

Chi cago Record Herald , the Century M agaz i ne, the Annual R egis ter ofthe Univers ity of Chicago the

titles o f bo oks ar ticles etc with the main word s capitaliz ed all nouns f orming parts o f hyphenate d compound s should be capit aliz ed : Setting Eighteenth Cen tury Stage— (See s ec 3 9 abo ve ) 43

But do nouns :

no t capi

taliz e su ch components when other than

Sixty third Street ; -

Lives

Well kno wn Autho rs -

e heads do n o t capit aliz e any but the ﬁrs t word an d proper nouns (see chap v s ec 65 an d e xamples)

And in

sid

A M AN UAL F OR

1 00

WR ITER S

bot an ical geological z o ological an d paleo n to logical matter capitaliz e the Latin (scientiﬁc) names o f divisions ord ers f amilies an d genera but not their English derivatives : C o tylo s auria bu t : co tylo s aurs ; F elidae but : felid s ; C arni vo ra but : carn ivo res 44

botanical an d z oological matter capitaliz e the n ames o f species if d erived f rom n ames o f persons or f rom gen eric n ames ; but in geological an d m edical matter the names o f species are never capitaliz ed : In

F elis leo , Co co s

nuci era,

R o s a Caro lin a, Parkins o nia Torreyan a,

S tyrax californ ica, Ly thrum hyss o pifoli a; Phy teuma Halleri , Carex Hallerian a (but [geo lo gical] : P terygo matopus s chmidti , Con odectus

favos us) (see 45

chap

vi, s ec

In astronomical

)

work capitaliz e the names o f “ groups o f stars (bu t not sun ,

the plane ts stars an d “ “ earth mo on J upiter Aldebaran the M ilky Way ,

”

Dipper

”

the Great B ea

the B ig

C HA PTER V PUN CT UATION

Diction ary , M r

T he Cen tury

Wilson s work A Treatis e o n E n glis h P unctuati o n an d the M an ual of S tyle o f the University o f Chi cago Press have been used as authorities in compiling the rules whi ch follow un der thi s head T he present ten dency is to redu ce pun ctuation to a minimum What is a proper mi ni mum is to a great extent a matter o f taste an d pred ilection—m ore so in E ngli sh than in an y other langu age Wi th the possible exception o f rule 2 0 (regardi ng which the practice must be admitte d to be quite irregular) no rule which is unnecessary or which could consistently be omitte d has been given an d conversely every rule given i s believed to be ne cess ary for good practice Be f ore entering on spe ciﬁc rules the general one may be laid d own : N o punctu ation mark should be used unless necessary ; let the punctuation assist in maki ng the meaning clear ; when that en d is attaine d further punc tuation is superﬂuous an d should be avoid e d ’

THE PE R IOD

A period should be placed af ter all abbreviations T he metric (f or contractions see chap iii s ec symbols should be treated as abbreviations but not the 1.

10 1

M AN UAL F OR

10 2

hemical symbols nor the format of books : c

M acmillan

WR ITERS

phrase

“

per

ent

”

nor the

M r Smith, St Paul, N o 1 , Chas (see ’ ’ ’ cha ibid , p iii , sec 9 mm ; but : m fg pl t ( manu facturing plan t) (see chap iii , sec 0 , H20, F e ; 2 per cent ; Co

4to , 8 vo

(s ee chap iii .

sec

But do no t use a period in technical matter af ter the r ecogniz e d abbreviations f or linguistic epochs or for titles o f well known publications o f which the in itials only are given or af ter su ch symbols as M S ( manu script) ; IE In d o European) OE Old E ngli sh) M HG ( M iddle High German) ; AJ S L ( American See al so J o urn al ofS emiti c Lan guages an d Literatures) p 7 9 n o te 2 U se no period af ter R oman numerals even when they are used as ordinals : ,

—

Vo l IV ; Lo uis XIV was .

the thro ne

A perio d is use d to indi cate the en d o f a d eclara tive sentence 4 When a quotation f orm s the en d of a declarative sentence the period should always be place d wi thi n the quotation marks But when a parenthesis fo rm s the en d o f a d e clarative senten ce the perio d shoul d be place d outside of the marks o f paren the sis A perio d may occur withi n a paren thesis only af ter an abbreviation or an ind ependent sentence lying en tirely within the parenthesi s “ Tenn yso n s In M emo riam When the parenthes is fo rms part o f the preced ing sentence put the perio d o uts ide (as fo r 3

’

”

P UN CT UATION

ins tance , here)

y years

T his was

103

earlier

s e en t

Put the perio d within the quo tatio n mark s witho ut exceptio n )

(T his

is a

rule

T HE

E X C LAM ATION

P OIN T

exclamation point is generally used to mark an expression o f surpri se pain sorrow anxiety sham e disapprob ation a wish or an outcry an d there f ore it is sometimes used alone as a mark o f critici sm or sur prise : “ “ “ " n i n n r i Lo g live the k g Heave fo b d " Go o d " he “ T he T hisn es s o f the T hat ' cried ; T he sub j ect o fhis lecture was “ T he speaker went o n : N o bo dy s ho uld leave his ho me to mo rro w witho ut a marked b allo t in their po cket But except in very rare inst ances use a comma not an “ exclamation point af ter the exclamation Oh followe d by other exclamatory word s (see p 5 8 ; chap iii s ec 6 ; ch ap iv s ec 6 T he exclamation point is placed insid e the quo tatio n marks when part o f the quot ation ; otherwise outside 5

The

”

See illus tratio ns in

sec

THE IN TE R R OGA TION

or to “

T he interrogation poin t is express a doubt :

Who

is this

Cro wnins hield , the

In dire ct an

so n

P OIN T

use d to mark

T he pris o ner gave his o f an Englis h baro net

a query , as R o ger

questions however should not be f ollowed by interrogation point (see p He asked whether she was ill ,

A M AN UAL F OR

1 04

WRIT ER S

The interrogation point should be place d insid e the quotation marks only when it is a part o f the quotation : 8

The q ues tio n : Who is who and what is y o u ev er in Ts ints in nati “

Were

What

THE C OLON

olon has two distinct f unctions o n e separa tive the other continuative (I ) It may separate two clauses or grou ps o f clauses which might be tre ate d as in depend ent senten ces an d s eparated by a perio d but which the writer wishes fo r purposes o f clearness or emphasis to connec t in a single sentenc e T his use is antiqu ated an d has almost entirely d isappe are d may separate a clause which is grammatically ts f rom a se cond which presents an illustr at ion or an ampliﬁcatio n o f its meaning Or (3 ) it may intro du ce a f ormal st atem ent a list an extract or a “ long quotation n o t intro du ce d by that (see sec 9

T he

”

(1 ) no t

s in less

creature ,

un s cien tiﬁc

vo ice divine within actual and

(2 ) M o s t

real,

s en ten ce

ro s e,

etc

the ad dress :

” ,

implie d

T he

begin “

I am

Declaring,

ru le

called “

earlies t

ﬂo wer :

with a

he tried to was h his han ds

T he

man ’s

n atio n al

(3 )

always

bu t :

o rger

have a

may b e capital

upo n

b ut

pro genito rs Fran ce the lily ; .

s tated

letter

The letter is

o f the

then

f no t o nl y po ss ible

the hum an s o ul is then of

mo ral law is

as s ertin g its el as the

co n s cience

in the his to ry

s ho uld

fro m

quo te health,

ass umptio n :

co un tries

E ngland the

transgress ing the

thus :

pro po s e the a mo n s tro us

who le affair

olon thus o f ten takes the place o f an “ “ “ n amely as f ollows f or in stance or a c

”

PUN CT UATION

I O5

similar phrase Where su ch a word or phrase is use d it should be f ollowe d by a colon if what follows co n sists o f one or more grammatically complete clauses ; otherwise by a c omma (see below sees 2 2 .

—

“

This is true o f o nly two natio ns the wealthies t, tho ugh ” no t the la rges t, in Euro pe : Great Britain and France ; but : “ This is true o f o nly two natio n s the wealthies t, tho ugh no t ” the larges t , in Euro pe viz , Great Britain and France

—

U se a colon af ter the salutatory phrase at the beginning o f a formal letter an d af ter the salutation o i a speaker to the chairman an d the au dien ce he is addressing : M y dear M r Bro wn : (See chap vii pp 1 3 3 1 I.

M r Chairman , Ladies .

and Gentlemen :

U se a colon between chapter an d verse in Scr ip ture re ferences an d between hours an d minutes in time indications (see sec 1 7 below) : — M att 13 ; PM 12 .

U se a colon between the place o f publication an d the publisher s n ame in literary an d bib liographical re ferences : Clement of Alexandria (Lo ndo n : M ac millan) II 9 7 (see chap viii p I 6 1 ) 13 .

’

olon should be placed outside the quotation marks unle ss it is a part o f the quotation : The fo llo wing ins tructio n is given un der the head o f Bus ines s C o rres pondence : When a ﬁrm is the add ressee the salutato ry “ phras e s ho uld b e Gentlemen : o r Dear Sirs : 14

The

”

A M AN UAL F OR

106

THE

WR ITER S

SE MI COLON

semicolon is used wi thin a sentenc e to mark a di vision somewh at more distin c t than that mark ed by a comma (see above s ec Are we giving o ur lives to perp etuate the things that the pas t has created fo r its n eeds fo rgettin g to ask whether thes e thin gs s till s erv e to day s n eed s ; o r are we think in g o f liv ing m en " T he

15 .

’

T his is as impo rtan t fo r

s cience

may b e

s aid

to b e the

o nl

in d eed , it

as it is fo r practice ; impo rtan t co n s id eratio n .

enu merations separate the item s by semi colons u nless they are very short an d contain no commas ; or they are very lo ng an d require by their gr ammatical stru cture period s exclamatio n o r interrogatio n poin ts colons or oth er s emi colons : T he memb ers hip o f the in tern atio n al co mmis s io n was mad e up as fo llo ws : France 4 ; G erm any 5 ; Great B ritain I (o win g 16.

misun d ers tanding, the anno un cemen t did no t E n glis h s o cieties in tim e to s ecure a full quo ta to

reach

y) ;

fro m

th e

that

Italy , 3 T he d efendan t, in j us ti ﬁcatio n o f his act, plead ed that (a) he was d espo n d en t o v er the lo s s o f his wife ; co untr

(b)

he was

d ays ;

(d)

tio ns ,

“

o ut o f

he was

What is

wo rk ;

(c)

un d er the

he had had

inﬂuen ce

o ur n atio n alit

o f li uo r “

”

n o thing

What

Are y o u n aturaliz ed "” all pro ved to b e the applican ts “

to eat fo r two

B ut : The

yo ur

ques

religio n

mblin g blo cks

s tu

re ferences the semi colon is us ed to separate passages co ntainin g chapters (s ee sec 1 3 above) 17

In Scripture

Gen 18

tatio n

— 6 ,

14;

chap

semicolon should be place d outside the quo marks unless it is a part o f the quot ati on T he

PUN C T UATION T HE

10 7

COMMA

“

o mma is used to ind icate the smallest inter ruptions in continui ty o f thought or grammatical constru ction the markin g o f whi ch cont ributes to cle ar ness : The d o ctrin e is indeed laid do wn by an autho rity here an d there ; but s peaking gen erally it has no place in the s tan dards creeds o r co nfes s io ns o f the great co mmunio n s ; e g the Apo s tles Creed the N icene Creed the cano ns o f the early ecumen ical co uncils the Wes tmins ter Co nfes s io n the T hirty ni n e Articles Go s s ipin g G o ss iping wo men are happy {to dis tin guis h fro m 19

T he

”

’

wo men are happy

(I ) If a series of word s or groups o f words co n sists o f only two members they should not be separate d by commas unless the groups them selves are very long ; (2 ) if the series consists of three or more members with no comma is ne cessary c onj unc tions conne cting each unless the series is very long or the groups themselves are long ; (3 ) ifin a series of three or more members the conjun ctions are omitte d except between the last two e ach group o f the series should be set o ﬂby a comma: bu t: (1 ) Co pper and go ld are pro duced in quantities ; T he co ns tan t tho ugh wavering s truggle b etween the represen ta tives o f the two attitudes o f min d and the mis fo rtun e and ev il which co me fro m religio us dis b eli ef co ns tituted the main s ub j ect o f his address (2 ) He was equally familiar with the wo rks 20

Ho mer and Dan te an d Go ethe ; but : He was equally familiar with the wo rks o fHo mer, and Shakespeare and M o liere ,

b sen ;

and Cer an tes , and Go ethe, an d I art,

no r

G ermany fo r her army ,

no r

N either

Fran ce

fo r her

England fo r her d emo cracy

1 08

can

t fo rcefully

and of co

“

M AN UAL F OR

A ci ed

WR IT E R S

its wo men , and the in telligen ce

mbined

Etc

” .

beautifully

3) The d isco urse was d elivered ; T he b rav ery

l quently the b eauty generatio n eo

its men , o f the ris ing of

etc.

should always

b e preced ed

a comma

use a comma (two if necessary) to separate from the rest o f the sentence clauses introduced ” “ “ “ “ if by su ch conjun ctions as an d but while ” “ “ “ “ “ “ af ter whereas since be cause when as ” “ etc especial ly if a chan ge o f subjec t takes although pl ace : When he arrived at the railway s tatio n the train had go ne and his friend who had co me to bid him go o dbye had departed As the next train was no t due fo r two ho urs but left no wo rd he decided to take a ride abo ut the to wn al tho ugh it o ﬂered little o f interes t to the Sights eer While he regretted his failure to meet his frien d he did no t go to his ho us e 2 1.

Ordinarily ,

”

But do no t use a comma before clauses intro du ce d by su ch conj un ctions if the pre ceding clause is not logically “ “ nor be fore if but an d complete wi thout them ; altho ug in brief an d closely weld ed phrases : This is especially in teres ting b ecause they repres ent the two extremes a nd b ecaus e they pres en t dif feren ces in their relatio ns ; This is goo d b ecaus e true ; I s hall agree to this o nly if y o u accept ”

”

co nditio ns

onjun ctions ad verbs connective par ticles “ “ “ “ an d phras es as now then however in d eed “ “ “ “ m e therefore or over furthermore n everthe “ “ “ “ in f act in short less though for instan ce 22

Such

”

PUN CT UATION “

“

”

’2

that is of course on the contrary on the “ “ “ other han d to be sure for example af ter all etc should be followed by a comma when standing at the beginni ng o f a sentence or clause to introdu ce an in f erence or an explanation and shoul d be place d between co mmas when wedged into the midd le o f a sentence or clause to mark o ff a distinc t break in the continui ty o f thou ght or stru c ture to in dicate a s um mariz in g of what prece des the point o f a new departure or a mo difying restrictive or antithe tical addition etc : In deed this was exactly the po in t o fthe argumen t; M o reo ver he did no t thin k it feas ible ; N o w the ques tio n is this N evertheless he co nsented to the scheme ; In fact rather the The s tatement revers e is true ; This then is my pos itio n : therefo re canno t b e veriﬁed But do n o t use a comma with su ch wor ds when the lly close an d structurally smooth conne ction is logica enough not to call for an y pause in re adin g ; wi th “ nevertheless etc when directly follow there f ore “ in g the verb ; with ind eed when directly preceding or followin g an adje ctive or another adverb which it “ ” qu aliﬁes ; nor ordinarily with su ch terms as perhaps “ ” “ li kewise etc : also He was therefo re unable to be presen t; It is nevertheless true ; He is reco vering very s lo wly indeed ; He was perhaps thin king He was a s cho lar and a s po rtsman to o o f the future ; ,

”

A comma is pr ef erably omi tted before rather in such an expression as : The tun e value is to be meas ured in this way rather than b y the time equivalent o f the s trata “

2 3.

”

A M AN U AL F OR

1 10

WR IT ER S

If among

several adje ctives pre ceding a noun the last bears a mo re direc t relation to the noun than the o thers it should not be prece de d by a comma: The admirable po litica l ins titutio n s o f the co un try ; a hand s o m e wealthy yo ung man 2 4.

Participial phrases , espe cially su ch as cont ain an explan ation o f the ma in clause , sho uld usu ally be set 25.

of f

a comma:

B eing as leep, he did n o t hear him ; Exhaus ted wo rk , he s lept lik e a s to n e

by a hard day s ’

omma b efore not introd ucing an antithetical clause or phrase : M en addict thems elves to in ferio r pleas ures n o t because they d eliberately prefer them but because they are the o nly o n es to which they have access 26

Put a

“

”

F o r parenthetical ,

adverb ial ,

or apposi tion al clauses or phrases use commas to ind icate stru c tur ally disconn ected but lo gically relate d interpolations ; use d ashes to indicate both structurally an d lo gically di s c onn e cted inserti ons ; do not use the two togethe r (s ee below secs 5 9 6o Sin ce fro m the naturalis tic po in t o f view men ta l s tates 27.

are the

co nco

mitants

phys io lo gical pro cesses ; T he French, a natio n o f artis ts ; The Engli sh, highly

gen erally speakin g, are demo cratic as they are,

men tal

v rtheless

ne e

to thei po litical and s o cial

deem the

ys tems ;

when thes e co nditio ns fo rget the exact date — s

bility fun da

There was a time

were changed

— I

Use a comma to separate two identi cal or closely similar word s even if the sense o r grammatical co n 2 8.

PUN CT UAT ION

stru ction s ee

I I I

not require su ch separation (see

does

above ,

Whatever is

is go o d ; What he was , is n o t kno wn ; T he chief aim o facademic s triving o ught to b e, to b e mo s t in evi den ce ; It is

y in

un i ue o nl

this , that it presents

y o n e side o f the ques tio n

o nl

U se a comma to separate proper nouns meaning diff erent persons or places : 29

Jo hn

To the priz

e of

Smithwas always

mechanical

Simi larly , 1905,

1 , 19 13

T o America, Euro pe awards

kill

use a comma to separate two nu mbers :

3 47 teachers attend ed the

(See belo w

kind ;

s ecs

co n

ventio n ;

N o vemb er

38 ,

A dje ctival phrases containin g a complementary qu alifying d elimi ting or antithetical adje ctive adde d to the main epithet prece di ng a noun should be set o ďŹ&#x201A; by commas : T he tho ugh perfectly lo gical co nclus io n ; This hars h d eceas ed was a s tern and unappro achable y e t withal sy mpathe tic an d kind hearted gen tleman ; Here co mes in the mo s t respo n because it is the ďŹ nal o ďŹ&#x201A;i ce o f the teacher ; The mo s t s ible sens itive if no t the mo s t elus ive part o f the training o f children 31

or more co ordi nate clauses or ending in a wor d governin g or mo difying one sam e word should be separated by a comma: 32

T wo

but pro tected fro m, tho ugh much yo un ger than ,

A s hallo w bo dy o f water co nn ected with

the

his

o pen s ea;

bro ther

He was as

tall as ,

phr ases an d the

A M AN UAL

112

F OR

WRI TE R S

A comma is employed to indicate the omission f or brevity or convenience o f a wor d or words the r epeti tion o f which is not ess ential to the meaning : In Illino is there are seventeen such ins titutio ns ; in Ohio Price ten d o llars twenty two ; in In diana thirteen ; 33

however such constru ctions are smooth enou gh not to call for commas (an d the consequent semicolons) : One puppy may res emble the father ano ther the mo ther and a third so me d is tan t ances to r Of ten ,

A direct quotation maxim, or simil ar expression when brief , Should be separated from the pre ce ding part o f the sentence by a comma (see above s ec 34

“

Go d s aid , Let there b e light

”

35 “

(see

”

s ec

omma af ter the exclamation above ; chap iii s ec 6 ; chap iv

Ordin arily put a

p 58 ;

sec

Oh, that I had

r been bo rn "

n eve

U se a c omma bef ore residence posi tion or title : 36

“

”

M r and M rs M cIntyre, o f Detro it, M ich .

Pratt Judso n,

onnection with

o f the

Univers ity o f Chicago

Pres iden t Harry

those cases hi storical an d political in which the place n ame practically has be co me a part o f ’ the person s n ame or is so closely connec ted wi th it as to ren der the separation artiﬁcial or illogical : Clement o f Alexan dria; Philip o f Anj o u ; Kin g Geo rge o f Exceptions are

En gland

PUN CT UATION

Do not use a comma b etwe li terary re ferences but use the 37

in sec

—

pp 4 , 7 8 ,

Put a comma af ter digi ts indi catin g

except in

a date

or in a page reference : January 1 9 09 2 200 p

Separate month an d

year sions by a co mma (see abo ve s ec N o vemb er 1 9 0 5 ; N ew Year s Day .

thousand s

— 8

Ez ra

10 ;

onse cutive pages dash (see below

n c

1 13

an d similar time di vi

’

40 Omi t the add ress , title ,

2 46 1 .

F riday M ay

1 906 ;

omma in signatures when followe d by or position in a separate line an d af ter address f ollowe d by a date line etc (f or the practice “ in letter writing see chap vii und er The JAME S P R OB IN SON .

S uperintenden t ofS chools

4 1 The marks .

omma is always place d inside the quotation

THE APOSTR OPHE

The apostrophe is use d to mark the o mis sion o f a or letters in the contraction o f a word , or o f

letter ﬁgures in

a number : “

do n t, twas , takin me at ; m fg ; the class (See chap iii , sec 2 3 ; chap v, s ec ’

’

ne er,

’

”

’ ’

’

se o f nouns common and the addi tion of an apostrophe or apostrophe an d s (see chap iii s ec aman s ho rses tails ; Sco tt s I vanho e Jo n es s farms Themis to oles era; fo r appearance s ak e

The possessive proper , is f ormed by 43

’

A M AN UAL F OR

1 14

WR ITE R S

T he plural o f num erals , an d of rare or artiﬁcial noun coin ages , is fo rme d by the aid o f an apostrophe an d s ; that o f pro per nouns of more th an one syllable 44

ending in a sibilant by addin g an apostrophe alone (monosyllabic proper names ending in a sibilant add es ; others s ) : in the 1 9 00 s ; in two s an d three s the three R s the “ thes e I j us t d o — as I a ll the T o mmy Atkins o f England (but: the R o sses and the M acdo ugals) ; the Pericles and So crates o fliterature ,

’

“

”

’

Q U OTATION M AR K S

Quotations of a passage f rom an au thor in his own wor ds run into the text should begin an d en d wi th quotation marks 46 U se quotation marks f or qu o tations f rom dif feren t authors o r f rom different works by the s ame author f ollowing each other unin terrupted by an y intervenin g origin al matter or by an y re f eren ce to their respective sources (other than a re f eren ce ﬁgure for a footnote) even though su ch quotations are to be in reduced type (see chap viii p I 47 Quote a wor d or phrase accompan ied by its deﬁ 45

n itio n : “

fo lio mean s a page number at the fo o t o f the page 48 Quote an un usual te chn ical iron ical etc wor d or phrase in the text whether or not accompan ie d by a “ word like s o called direc ting attention to it: “ Her ﬁve o clo cks were famo us in the n eighb o rho o d ; She “ i w n e a r n a o o f lo bs ter— was w co lo red s ilk ; He was elected g g Dro p

”

’

”

PUN CT UAT ION “

mas ter

“

quarter

deck

the ”

”

ro lls “

;

lead ”

repaired

1 15

what he

between

is ins erted

called

the li nes

his

translations quote the English equi valent o f a word phrase or passage f rom a f oreign langu age : Weltans chauun g wo rld view o r “ fundamen tal as pect o f life ; M o mms en Komische Ges chichte (“ His to ry o f 49

“

”

Quote word s or attention is d ire c ted : 50

to which

phrases

particular

lynch law ; the phrase liberty o f co ns cience “ ” “ ” “ ” the co n cepts go o d and b ad ; the n ame Chicago “

the term

“

”

;

51 “

The titles

E nglis h M en

Co mmen tary

Letters

“

s eries ;

In tern atio n al C ritical

poems are put in

o f short

marks (see chap Shelley

”

Ti tle s ’

o f book series should be quoted :

vi ,

sec

T o a Skylark

“

quotation

” .

Cited titles o f sub divisions parts books chapters etc ) o f publi cati ons titles o f papers le ctur e s addresses s erm ons articles toasts mottoes etc should be inclose d in quotation marks (see chap iv s ec 53

B eginn in gs

fthe S cien ce ofPolitical Econ omy

Vo l I , .

chap

” l T he Britis h Scho o ; chap ii, J o hn Stuart M ill ; the articles ” “ ” ’ ” “ “ i n i n Has t gs Dicti on ary Cruciﬁxio n , and Crus ade Cro ss ,

“

”

The

Pres en t, and

Future

f the B ible;

bj ect

the

lecture

was

“

Japan—Its

Pas t,

” .

When ref erence is made to parts o f a speciﬁc work i e Pre face Intro duction T able o f Contents In d ex

A M AN UAL F OR

1 16

etc

(s ee

capi

su ch word s should be

iv,

chap

s ec

WR ITE R S taliz e d but not quote d ,

See the Preface , p iii ; T he Intro ductio n co n tains much o f but : T he in teres t ; T he Appendix o ccupies a hundred pages ; .

bo o k

has a very

co mplete

index

N ames

of ships

are put in

The US

Titles

M urillo

’

“ .

Orego n

quot atio n marks :

” .

pictures an d works “ ” T he Ho ly Family

art are

quote d :

5 6 Quotation marks shoul d always in clu de elli pses , “ ” etc when it otherwise would not be an d the phrase .

l r that it stand s for an omi tte d part o f the matter quo ted per fect clearness in each individual cas e b ein g the best cri terion : “ Art II s ec 2 o f the Co n s titutio n pro vides that each s tate a numb er o f electo rs equal to the who le s hall appo in t nd representatives numb er o f s en ato rs a He also wro te “ a s eries o f Helps to Disco very etc here indicatin g n o t that he wro te o ther wo rk s which are unn amed but that the title o f the o ne named is n o t given in full ; b ut o n the “ o ther hand : Preachin g fro m the text F o r Go d s o lo ved the wo rld etc here bein g placed o uts id e o f the quo tatio n marks in o rder to s ho w that it do es no t s tand fo r o ther unn amed o b j ects o f G o d s lo ve c ea

”

‘

’

Quoted prose matter whi ch is broken up into par agraphs should h ave the quot ation marks repeated at the beginn ing of each paragraph 57

D ouble quotation marks are used f or primary quotations ; f or a quotati on within a quotation , single ; 58

PUN CT UATION

goin g back an d so on : “

to double for

thi rd to sin gle for

a fourth ,

r then pro ceed ed : The dictio nary tells us that “ the wo rd s freedo m and liberty tho ugh o ften interchanged are dis tinct in so me o f their applicatio ns The

‘

o rato ‘

’

‘

”

THE DASH “

5 9 A dash is use d to d enote a sudd en bre ak , stop , transition in a sentence , or an abrup t ch ange in its .

or constru ction along or signi ﬁcant pause or an unexpe cte d or epigrammatic turn o f sentiment : Do we— can to e— s en d o u t educated b o ys and girls fro m the ,

”

high

s cho o l

eighteen

The Plato nic wo rld

the s tatic ,

Hegelian wo rld o f pro cess—ho w great the co n tras t " “ ” Pro ces s that is the magic wo rd o f the mo dern perio d ; Yo u

an d the

— '

—b

will un ders tan d s tanding "

ut n o ,

believe

vo u are in capa le o f un der

U se dashes (rarely parentheses—see below sec 7 0) f or parenthetical clauses whi ch are both logi cally an d stru c turally in d epend ent interpolations (see above 60

see

— —

This may b e s aid to b e but, that ; There came a time let

Hero do tus and Thucydid es co n s cio us

b erate

and d eli

—wh

ne er

mind we will

us s ay ,

fo r

co n

pass

v enience

v er

with

this atten tio n to actio ns was

A clause add ed to len d emphasis to or to explain or expand a word or phrase occurring in the main i ch word or phrase is then repe ate d should be clause wh introdu ced by a dash : To him they are mo re impo rtan t as the so urces fo r his to ry the his to ry o f ev ents an d ideas ; Here we are face to face 61

M AN UAL FOR

I 18

with a

in the

—

and diﬂ icul t pro blem n ew and difﬁcult, that is , that we are un prepared fo r it

n ew

sense

WRITER S

‘

“

Wherever a n amely is impli ed be fore a paren thetical or complementary clause a dash should pre f er ably be use d (see above sec 62

”

—

les co pe

an d te

trem led ;

n po wder,

were the weapo n s

printing press ,

—th

b efo re

which the

B ut here we are tren ching

ﬁeld

o f o ur

—gu

dis co veries

These

upo n

o ld

mpas s

s cien ce

ano ther divis io n

rpretatio n o f N ew Tes tament bo o ks

e inte

senten ces broken up into c lauses the ﬁn al summariz ing—clause should be preced ed by a d ash : .

Amos , with the id eathat Jeho vah is an

right judge

Ho sea, who se M as ter hated in j us tice and falseho p d Is aiah, who s e Lo rd wo uld have mercy o nl y o n tho se who the wido w and the fatherles s —these were the spo k es men 64

ved

relie .

A word or phrase set in a separate lin e an d su ccee de d by par agraphs at the begin nin g o f e ach o f which the original phras e is implied should be f ollowed by a dash : I reco mmend 1 T hat we k ill him .

That we

ﬂay him

A d ash should be used heads whether paragr aphe d or 65

B i bli cal

m in

cri ticis

o ther

onne ction with side “ run in : c

”

den omin atio n s

A mo s t interesting ar ticl e appeared in the E xpos itory Ti mes o f Decemb er, 1 8 9 1 .

—

The language of the N ew Tes tamen t The Grimm Thayer, Cremer, and o thers treat this sub j ect 21

lexico ns fully .

PUN CT UAT ION

1 19

—

The language o f the N ew T e s tamen t T he lexico ns o f G rimm T h ayer, C remer , an d o thers treat this s ubj ect fully 21

N OTE n ati on al

—Th

wo rd has

Di cti on ary

been

ken fro m Webs ter s ’

I n ter

“

U se a dash in place o f the word to conne ctin g two word s or numbers (see above s ec M ay July 1 9 0 6 (en das h) ; M ay 1 1 9 0 5—N o vemb er 1 1 9 0 6 — e m d a s h ( ) ; pp 3 7 (emdas h) ; Luke (em das h) 66

”

“

wor d f rom pre ce d es the first wor d or n um “ b er do n o t use the d ash in ste ad o f to : Fro m M ay I to July 1 1 9 0 6 In connec ting conse cutive nu mbers omi t hund re d s f rom the se cond number use only two figures unless the first nu mber end s in two ciphers in which case repeat ; if the next to the last figur e in the first number is a cipher do not repe at thi s in the se cond number ; but in citing d ates B C always repe at the hun dred s (be cause representing a diminution not an in cre ase) : — — — — 103 ; 1 8 80 9 5 1 0 2 1 00 1 1 1 6 1 00 1 0 6 7 pp ; pp 3 9 9 pp But

if the

”

—

387 3 2 4 D C .

A dash should pre ce d e the re ference (to autho r title of work or both) f ollowing a dire ct quotation co n sisting o f at le ast one complete senten ce in f ootnotes or when cite d ind ependently in the text : “ I felt an emo tio n o fthe mo ral s ublime at beho lding s uch an in s tance o f civic hero is m — Thirty Years I 4 7 9 The Wedding— Gues t he b eat his b reas t 67

”

Yet he can no t cho o s e but hear

—C

o leridge,

“

The An cient M

arin er

”

A M AN U AL F OR

1 20

W RITERS

A dash should not ordin arily be used in conne c tion with an y o ther pun ctu ation point except a perio d (s ee above sec Dear Sir : I have the ho no r etc ; no t: Dear Sir: — I have the ho no r etc ; T his— I say it wi th regret— was no t do ne ; no t : T his — I s ay it with regret was no t do ne 68

But in a senten ce where a co mma woul d be necess ary if the parenthetical clause set o ff by dashes di d not exist the co mma may b e retaine d be fore the ﬁrst dash : Darwin the pro mulgato r o f the theo ry —tho ugh by no mean s its o nly s uppo rter— is regarded to day etc ,

when the parenthetical cl ause set o ﬂ by dashes i tsel f requ ires an interrogation or exclamation poin t su ch pun ctu ation may be retaine d in conn e ction with the se cond d ash : Sen ato r B lan k— s hall we call him s tates man o r po litician in tro duced the bill ; If the s hip s ho uld s in k— which Go d fo rbid " he will be a ruined man An d

PARE N THE SE S

The as

“

term parentheses is applie d to the elli ptical di s tingu ished f rom the squ are brackets ”

Paren theses are

used to in close ﬁgures or letters th at mark divisions in enum erations whi ch are run into the text : The reaso ns fo r his res ign atio n were three : (1 ) advanced age (2 ) failing health (3) a d es ire to travel 69

When su ch di visions are separate d into paragraphs by means o f ﬁgures or capital letters parentheses should ,

P UN CT UAT ION

121

not be used but a period should follow the ﬁgure or letter If the paragraphed sub divisions are ind icate d by the symbols a b c etc these should be used with a half parenthesis a parenthesis on the right o f the ﬁgure only) (see chap vi s ec A Un der the head o f 1 Under Under 1 a) Un der ,

should not ordinarily be use d to mark parenthetical clauses (see above secs 2 7 unless confusion might arise from the use o f less d is tin ctive marks or u n less the content o f the clause is wholly irrelevant to the main argu m ent : I take this to b e the (s o mewhat o b s cure) s ense o f He mean t— his s peech—that the matter was o f no co nsequence ; T he perio d thus in augurated (o f which I s hall s peak at greater length in a later chapter) was characteriz ed by man y exces s es ; T he co n ten tio n lIas been made (o p cit ) that he was no t the o rigin ato r o f the plan 70

Parentheses

‘

B R AC KE T S

T he

marks

term as

“

is applied to the square brackets d istinguishe d f rom the elliptical paren ”

theses ( 7 r Brackets are use d (I ) to inc lose an explanation or note (2 ) to indicate an interpolation in a quotation (3 ) to rec tify a mistake (4) to supply an omission an d (5 ) for parentheses within paren theses : (I ) [T his was written b efo re the pub licatio n o f Spencer s “ — bo o k EDITOR ] (2) T hey [the free s ilver Demo crats ] ass erted .

’

A M AN UAL F OR

122

that the present artiﬁcial

(3 )

“

As the Italian

s aid

(4)

can

rat o

WR ITER S main tain ed in deﬁn itely

[Englishman] Dante

Jo hn

Rus kin

G ab riel R o s [s ] etti has

Henry

C arpen ter

Lo ndo n : B lack [ Englis h M en o f Letters series (5 ) Gro te the great his to rian o f Greece (s ee his Histo ry s ays that etc [s eco nd “

”

” .

1 9 00

2 04

E LLIPSE S

7 2 Ellipses , consisting of a series o f d ots , or period s usu ally fo ur are used to indicate the omission f r o m a

—

quotation o f one or more wor d s not essential to the id e a whi ch it is desired to convey an d also to in dicate illegible word s mutil ations an d other l acun ae in a docu ment M S or other material whi ch is qu o ted Where in poetry one o r more complete li nes are omitte d insert a full line of perio d s is that the s am e fo rces The po in t are s till the und ercurren ts o f ev ery human life We may n ever unrav el the metho ds o f the phys ical fo rces ; b ut he so ught the lumb erer s gang Where fro m a hundred lak es yo ung rivers s prang ; ,

’

Thr o ugh these green He

ro am ed ,

by eld es t n ature dres t co n ten t alik e with man and b eas t ten ts ,

7 3 A n ellipsis wi thin a quotati on should be tre ate d as a part of the quot at ion ; an d consequently shoul d be .

in close d in

the quotation marks (see

above ,

secs

56,

71 H YPHE N S

hyphen is use d (I ) at the end o f a line when it is ne cessary to divide a wor d there an d (2 ) in many compound wor ds (see chap iii se cs 3 1 7 4 T he .

CH A PTER

T HE USE OF ITALIC

used (1 ) to express emphasis an d (2 ) to set of f a title passage or word from the co ntext With the purely typographical uses o f i talic su ch as its choice for he ad s or f or display thi s book has nothing to do W e conďŹ ne ourselves here to rules governing its use by writers an d authors A ccordingly the rules which f ollow (in part con densed from the M an ual of S tyle [T he Un i versity of Chicago Press 3 d will be f oun d to be only those whi ch good practice requires an d whi ch may be followe d saf ely T he use o f itali c type is in dicated in the manuscript by un d erscoring with a sin gle straight line the letters or word s th at are to be itali ciz e d On e rule o f general appli cation may be stated at the outset : Italic should be use d sparingly to express emphasis The practice o f it ali ciz ing word s too f reely spoils rather than add s to the eff ect and we aries the re ader 1 U se i talic (underscore) for word s or phrases to whi ch it is d esired to len d emphasis or importance etc : This was ho wever n o t the case ; It is s uf ďŹ cien tly plain that Italic is

the

s ci ences o

flife

at leas t, are s tudies

Italiciz

o f pro ces s es

e foreign wor d s an d phrases adopted into the Engli sh language ; also (as a rule) single sentences 2

1 23

M AN UAL F OR WR I TE RS

1 24

or brief passages not o f s uﬂicien t length to call for formal quotation the Darwini an Weltans chauung; the lais sez faire habit ; the deb ater par excellen ce o f the Sen ate ; De gusti bus n on es t dis putandum o r as the French have it Chacun ason go ut -

But do no t italiciz e foreign titles preceding n ames or names o f foreign institutions or places streets etc the m e aning or posi tion o f which in E ngli sh would r equire roman type : Pere Lagrange Freiherr vo n Schwenau the Champs E lys ees the German R eichs tag the M useo d elle T erme ,

F ollowing is a partial li st o f word s which h ave been ad opted into the Engli sh lan gu age f rom other langu ages but which are now r egarded as angliciz e d an d should no t be it ali ciz e d even when retaining the ir origin al accents ad in terim bo na ﬁde co n sen sus d éno uemen t

adden dum

(plur da) ad lib litum] -

bo n to n bo uillo n bravo bric abrac cabaret caf -

a po s terio ri a prio ri

apro po s

canto

ali bi Alma M ater amateur

cen sus

ann o Do mini an te ellum atelier attach has reli e eau ideal illet do ux

chauﬁ eur

b b

blan che

carte

é d aﬂaires

charg

’

f d o euvre ’

Chiaro scuro

cle

clien te le

co rrigen du

co n re re

co nno is seur

’

d etat co up de grace creche criterio n (plur a) c ul d e s ac datum (plur a) d ris d ut d co ll et d elicatess en d emi lun e d emi mo nde demi relie o demi tas s e co up

chapero n

che

mps

co n trete

aide de camp alias

( to ry)

depot

co n tra

éb éb é

de rigueur d to ur dilettan te divo rcee do ctrin aire d ramatis per

so n ae

é clat élite

enco re

enn ui

ble

ensem

en tr e

en trepot

erratu

depo s i

m (plur

et cetera

ex cathedra

THE USE OF ITALIC ex o ﬁ cio

fete

matad o r matinee melee menu mo tif

fracas

né e

expo se

facade facsimile

po s tmo rtem

b b é

van t

v b

é é

n iche

n il

briquet

s o iré e

pro an d co n [ tra] pro cé s er al pro rata pro t g pro tem [po re] pro toco l

évé

seno r seraglio

po s t o it

net n

s auer raut sa

n ai

garage gratis ha eas co rpus ha itu hangar

s pirituel s tein

bpoena

techn iq uex tete atete to nn eau -

no l 1e

[ ]

pro s q ui] no m de plume q uo n dam o nus q ueue rago ut ché papier ma pater amilias re gime pato is

hegira ho rs d’o euvres

See chap iii ,

verbatim verso vers us (v

r su

per cen t per co n tra per se

)

vice versa

mé

per capita

sec . 2

umlaut

lé s e maj es t levee litterateur litterati M agn a C [h] arta man damus l

perso nn el

ﬁn is

1 25

vis

ale

avis -

viva vo ce

word s phrases and abbreviations l ref erences should be it ali ciz ed : u se d in liter ary an d lega 3

The f ollowin g

circa

pas si m, sic ,

But do

su ra, s

ibid

id em, i nfra, loc

cit , o

p cit , .

v, a ide .

no t i

cf , etc .

taliciz e : v eg i e .

(versus)

viz

e ti tles of publi cations—books (in clu ding plays ess ays cycles of poem s an d single poems o f co n usually printed separately an d not s iderable length f rom the context un derstood to fo rm parts of a larger volume) pamphlets treati ses tracts documents an d periodi cals (in cludin g regularly appe arin g pro cee dings an d tran sactions) ; in the case of newspapers , perio di cals 4 Italiciz .

A M AN UAL FOR

1 26

WR IT E R S

the n ame of the city (where published) when f ormi ng an integral part o f the n ame (but see chap iv s ec but n o t books o f the B ible canoni cal or apo cryphal or titles o f an cient manuscripts or sy mbols use d to design ate manuscripts (D 1 6 ; M b ; P) which should type (see chap iv invariably be in ordin ary secs 3 9 4o

etc

Spencer,

Principles

S o cio lo gy;

M id s ummer N ight s ’

Dream; I dylls of the King; P aradise Lo s t; the Ind ependen t, the M odern Lan guage R eview, R epo rt ofthe Un ited S tates Co mmis s ion er

f Educati on

fthe Illino is

Trans actions

S ociety for Child S tudy

rule may b e departed f rom in extensive bib lio gr aph ical lists in t ables or in o ther matter wh ere to fo llo w it would result in an undue prepond erance o f i tali cs 5 I taliciz e the word s S ee an d S ee als o when used in an in dex or simi lar compilation f or the purpo se o f a ref eren ce where the differentiation o f those word s cross— f rom the context is desirable ; an d the word s fo r an d read in li sts of errata to separate them f rom the in correc t an d corre c t readin gs (see p S ee als o So cio lo gy ; for lev ee read lev é e T his

signatures italiciz e the title or af ter the n ame : 6

ARTHUR P

position added

M AGUI R E , S ecretary

CAR TE R H HAR RI S ON .

M ay or of Chi cago

7 Italiciz subdivisions .

e the symbols a) b) c) etc use d to indicate when beginnin g a paragraph ; an d a b c ,

THE USE OF ITALIC

1 27

to the number o f verse page note a fr action al part (see ch ap v s ec See chap iii s ec 2 a) Luke 4 : 3 1 a

etc

ďŹ xe d af

8 etc

etc

e letters used to d esignate qu antities lines algebraic geom etrical an d simi lar matter :

Itali ciz

the lines ad and AD; the n th po wer

A s a rule italiciz e letters in legend s to illustrations o r in the text referring to correspondin g letters in accompanying illustrations (see chap x s ec 3 p At the po int A abo ve (see diagram) 9

Italiciz

re ferre d to

the letter u ,

e particular letters o f the alphabet when su ch : a s mall 0 '

botanical z oological geological an d paleon to lo gical matter i tali ciz e scientiďŹ c (Latin) nam es of genera an d species when used together (the generic name being in the nominative singular) an d o f genera only when use d alo ne : 11

R o s a Carolin a, F elis leo , Con odectes favos us , Phyteuma Halleri; P in us , B as idi o bo lus , Alternari a, E rythros uchus s ecs

(See

chap

iv ,

44 ,

In medical matter ,

however the general prac tice is to print such n ames in roman avoidi ng itali cs altogether In astronomi cal an d astrophysical matter : a) It ali ciz e the Greek Latin an d A rabic names of plan ets s atellites constell ations an d individ u al stars : Jupiter Tethys Lyra Antares It Orion is (but: Orio n type s tars) ,

A M AN UAL FOR

1 28

WRIT ER S

b) Italiciz

e d esignatio ns of celestial obje cts in well known cat alogues ; also the F lamsteed num bers an d B aeyer letters : M

(fo r N o

M es s ier s Catalogue of N ebulae ’

and

Clus ters ) , B ond 6 1 9 , N G C 6 1 65 ; 85 Pegas i , f Tauri , Laland e 5 7 61 .

) I taliciz e symbols f or the chemi cal elements (but in all other cases these shoul d be wri tten in roman) (see ch ap v sec c

H , Ca, Ti

d) I taliciz

F raunho fer

e the lower lines :

se l etters design ating certain

a, b, g, h;

but n o t the capital le tters given by F raunho f er to Spe ctral lines : H an d K ; A— an d the letters d esign ating the spe ctral types o f stars are n o t i t ali ciz ed : ,

A5 , B 3 , M b

“

resolutions italiciz e the word “ not the wor d Where as (See chap iv 12

”

R es o lved , s ec

”

but

C HA PTE R LETTE R

VII

WRITIN G

the considerations applicable to compo sitio n (see chap i) should govern the writin g o f letters an d in this connection a care ful stu dy o f chap ii is also recommende d T here are however several mo di ďŹ ca tions o f the general rules to be taken into consideration d epen din g on the character o f the letter the position o f the person add ressed etc Bef ore we dis cuss the vari ous classes o f letters a f ew general rules applicable to all may be laid d own : 1 T he writer of a letter Should be ar in mi n d that the written page is to con vey ideas to the min d of ano ther T he su ccess with which thi s can be accompli she d de pen d s o f course primarily on the langu age use d ; but there are other details whi ch have a highly important bearing on the effe ct a letter will create Paragraph in g pun ctu ating an d the arr ange ment of the id eas expressed are subje cts d emandi ng especial care an d thou ght T o o o f ten id eas are not co ordin atedâ&#x20AC;&#x201D;are not expresse d in proper sequence A ski lful letter writer is one who having ďŹ rst mastered the general rules of composition visualiz es so to spe ak the frame work o i his letter an d build s it up on a coherent an d c onnecte d plan which will make itsel f clear to the mi nd of the re cipient In general ,

1 29

A M AN UAL F OR

1 30

WR ITE R S

omi t the d ate in even the most in f ormal note ; the d ay o f the m onth expressed in ﬁgures should be un accompanie d by s t n d d rd or th: September “ not Septemb er 9 th 3 Do not jump f rom the ﬁrst page to the f ourth Write on conse cutive an d then b ack to the se cond pages 4 N ever wri te in the margin o r acro ss what has been written 5 A void po stscripts 6 Place the letter in the envelope so f o ld ed that when r em oved it will open with the right sid e up in position to be re ad Letters may be classed as (1 ) private or social ; (2 ) business ; (3 ) formal The style an d general tre at ment o f these should differ considerably 2

N ever

”

PR IV ATE

SOCIA L LE T TE R S

The private or soci al letter m ay the d egree o f info rmality al lowable

be very inf ormal being d ependent upon the intimacy o fthe writer an d the person add resse d ect In general one may s ay that su ch a letter should reﬂ the personali ty of the writer an d give the impression o f But since it is a letter attention should c onvers atio n be given to securing ord er (f or the s ake o f cle arness) an d variety of expression (in order to avoid monotony an d trivi ality o f tone) Colloquial language an d even Slan g are permi ssible in a letter to one with whom the writer is on very f amili ar ,

LETT ER

WR IT IN G

I31

terms ; but they should be used less f reely than in spee ch for the written word has a sharpness an d a permanency th at the spoken word lacks an d what might seem hu m or ous when spoken o f ten seems c ru de or even vulgar when written F or simi lar reasons carelessness o f expression n eg lec t o f gr ammar an d all o ﬂen s es against culture an d good breedin g should be avoide d Postscripts though unavoid able if an important addi tion occurs to the writer af ter the letter is close d as they give an Should always be gu ard ed against impression o f scrappiness an d carelessness Private letters f rom the n ature of the case must of ten contain mu ch about the writer an d there fore there is always danger that they may be too full o f 1 s T he way to an d on that account may seem egotist ical avoid this is to n arr ate events as objec tively as possible “ “ T o substitu te f or I su ch expressions as the pres ent writer your correspond ent is apoor device It betrays sel f consciousness prod u ces awkward Engli sh an d ﬁxes attenti on u pon the writer even m ore than woul d “ the unobtrusive use o f I Und ers coring f or emphasis is attractive but d anger ous If resorted to f requently it loses its f or ce an d three or four lines o f underscorin g become necessary to obtain any effectiveness It is better to se cure emphasi s when possible by me ans of expression an d arrangement So cial letters should be written with pen an d in k by T he use o f a pen cil or typewri ter the writer him self ,

”

’

”

15 2

M AN UAL FOR

WRI TE RS

or the di ctation o f su ch a letter to ano ther is felt as a lack of courtes y to the person add ressed as well as an in dication of carelessness an d in di fference on the part o f the writer Only the most extraor din ary circumst ances can justif y f ailure to observe thi s man date o f custom 1 The he ading —In so cial correspon d en ce there is no h ard an d fast rule requiring the address (city or town) o f the wri ter al though i t is always desirable th at it should be given an d pre f erably at the right h an d ne ar the to p o f the sheet in two lin e s thus : 9 00 M ICHI GAN AVEN UE ,

CHICAGO, ILLIN OIS

letters o f this kind however it is permi ssible to place the address of the writer as well as the date at the en d of the letter but in that case the position should be at the lef t of the shee t below the line o f the sign ature thus : In

9 00 M ICHIGAN AVE N UE CHICAGO, ILLIN OIS

September 9 ,

19 13

N o pun ctu ation sho ul d be placed at lines ; an d the day of the month is usually

the end o f the to be expressed in ﬁgures (see chap iii s ec It is customary however in social correspondence th at is at all formal to “ spell out the day of the month an d the year : September the ninth ninéteen hundred [an d] thirteen 2 In so cial letters the name an d The addr es s — address of the addr essee m ay be inserted or omi tted If inserted it may be placed at the lef t in a line below .

”

LETTER

WRIT IN G

1 33

the signature at the close In this case the city and state o f the writer an d the d ate should be placed at the beginnin g o f the letter in the posi tion indi cate d above — r h r Thi s may take any one s Th e s a l u t a t o a e 3 y p “ ” o f a great number o f forms The formal Dear Sir is o f course rare in social correspond ence Where for “ mality is desired Dear M r Brown or (slightly more “ cordial) M y dear M r Brown may be reso rted to In the increasing degrees o f familiarity goo d taste an d Vary common sense wi ll di ctate the f orm o f s alu tation ing cir cu ms tan ces will at dif ferent times afford achoice o f wide range from which however phrases such as “ “ F riend Brown Frien d John 01 almost as had “ simply John Should by all m eans be exclu de d The ﬁrst word and the n ame or the wo rd use d in place of the name and the title before the name should be capital “ M y very d ear Brother ; an d the n ame should iz ed : be followed by a comma A void abbreviations in the “ s alutation : D ear C aptai n B rown is better than “ Dear Capt Brown ; but M r M rs an d D1 are al ways to be pref erred to the unabbreviated f orms (see c hap iii s ec 4 The text O u the subjec t o f the text nothing need be add ed here to what has been said in the intro ducto ry paragraph o f this subdivis ion — h m li m en t a ry c l o s e T e co In so cial letters the 5 p language used depend s on the d egree of cordi ali ty intimacy or relation ship exis ting be tween the corre “ The cust omary phras es : Yours sin cerely spo n den ts .

”

—

”

A M AN UAL F OR

1 34 “

WR IT ER S

Yours very truly may be added to emphasiz ed or varied but the writer shoul d always remember that mod eration an d reserve are pref er able to effusiveness “ Und er all circu mstances shun the offensive Yours etc T he close is f ollowed by a comma an d is place d a li ttle to the right o f the center o f the page 6 The s ign atur e —T his is to be written on a li ne by itself to en d ne ar the right hand m argin T he Chri s tian nam e may be spelled o ut or abbreviated by ini tials ; the surnam e sho uld of course be given in full Except when wri ting to an intimate friend a woman should Sign her full n ame or indicate in parentheses the f orm in I which she should be add ressed : GEOR GIA M ARIA BR OWN ”

”

(M R S GE OR GE C ) .

(M R s ) (M ISS) .

G E OR GIA M AR IA BR o wN GE ORGIA M AR IA BR OW N

— nv e lo e The add ress on the envelope 7 p Shoul d begin with the n am e pl ace d about mi dw ay b e tween the to p an d bottom o f the envelope (In the “ Uni ted States M r preceding the n ame is pref erre d “ to Es q following it ) In the li ne below rather m ore to the right are placed the number an d n ame o f the “ street (avoiding all abbreviations such as Ave an d this in turn is f ollowed in the next line still more to the right by the name o f the city or town an d in still another line by the n am e o f the state Spelled in full In the lef t hand co rner may be place d an y di “ re ctions or instru ctions su ch as : T o be f orward ed .

The

”

LETT ER “

WRITIN G

I 35

“

C are of Brown Publishing Company etc or the number o f the post o ﬂi ce b o x A variation o f the arr angement o f the address as given above in what “ is termed the block f orm is per mi tte d by good t aste Both forms are given here : Private ,

”

M R GEOR GE C B R OWN .

CHI CAGO ILLIN OIS

c c

BR OWN PUBLISHIN G Co

or in the ,

“

blo ck

f orm :

”

M R GE OR GE C B R OW N 9 00 M I CHI GAN AVEN UE .

c o

BR OWN

CHI CAGO ILLIN OIS PUBLISHIN G C o

should pref erably be omi tte d If any is used a comma shoul d f ollow e ach line except the l ast where a perio d is ne cessary The stamp should always be place d straight i e without an y fantastic revers al or turnin g in the upper right h an d com er 8 Exampl e o f s o cial le tte r 1 8 9 M ICHI GAN AVE N UE Punctu ation

CHICAGO, ILLIN OIS

DEAR GE OR GE , It was a dis appo in tmen t

The fact is , I had a favo r to

y o u at the club las t night as k o f y o u that co uld be explained

no t

see

better by wo rd o f mo uth than o n paper but as I s hall no t have ano ther o ppo rtunity o f s eein g y o u befo re y o u leave fo r Lo ndo n I mus t prefer my reques t by letter It happens that my s is ter M ary has been planning to s tart fo r England abo ut the middle o fn ext mo n th which I un ders tand ,

A M AN UAL FOR

1 36

WR ITERS

is the time at which y o u expect to leave

She wan ts to d o

wo rk in the B ritis h M useu m an d to meet

mo ther’s who m

o f o ur

tra eling

s he

has

ver

s o me

relatives

She had in ten ded has ﬁn ally allo wed her

seen

with an aun t, b u t that lady

dis tan t

q ualms o ver a s ea vo yage to cause her to ab and o n the plan I am wo n dering if, un der the circums tances , my s is ter

co uld

Yo ur mo ther an d s is ter are go in g I hear an d while they have no t me t M ary they hav e do ub tless heard abo u t her an d her wo rk s o that they wo uld n o t regard her as a s tran ger Will y o u tell me frankly ho w they wo uld co n s ider this s ugges tio n

j o in yo ur

party

Witho ut

in co n v en ien cin g anyo n e

With b es t wishes

fo r a pleas an t trip ,

Very s incerely yo urs J OHN September 9

B R OW N

19 13

B U SIN E SS C OR R E S PON DE N CE

writing o f business letters is an art to which all too little attention i s paid T erseness clearness poli teness an avoidance o f monotonous an d hackneye d expressions are all as essential as is the rigid obs ervance o f the rules o f grammar spelling punc tuation an d N o unn ecessary word s should b e us ed ; paragraphing nevertheless the personality of the wri ter an d the “ atmosphere so to spe ak of the relations existing between the correspond ents should be manifest throu gh out A curt formal or h ackneye d letter m ay cre ate a poor impression—may even ten d to d estroy or injure business relations A business letter should be so written as to compel attention d evelop interest create T he su ccessf ul writer o f a d esire or eﬂect a de cision The

”

LETTER

WRIT IN G

137

business letter is one who sen d s hims elf along with hi s message A su ccinct well word ed polite letter inﬂuences the recipient u nconsciously to himsel f in the writer s f avor T he stationery used the character o f the printe d or the engraved letter head the appearance o f the type writing even the manner in which the letter is f old e d uence on the min d o f the all tend to exert a subtle inﬂ re cipient I The he ad in g —The arr angement o f the place an d d ate in business letters is usu ally arbitr ary sinc e the name an d details of the business an d the location together with the name o f the city or town are usually printed a space f or the date being left blank on the right Either of the f ollowing forms may be used d e pending somewhat on the space available : -

’

9 00

M ICHIGAN AVE

CHICAGO, ILL

“

block

”

September 9 ,

19 13

f orm : M ICHI GA N AVE

9 00

CHICA GO, I LL

Septemb er 9 ,

19 13

“

”

ses such as the forego ing the word Street or “ A venue is usually abbreviated Ordin arily no pune tuatio n f ollows an y o f the lines T he n ame o f the month should not be abbreviated nor should the day of the month be f ollowed by s t nd d rd or th 2 The add r es s —The business n ame an d add ress of the add ressee should be placed at the beginning o f In

A M AN UAL F OR

1 38

WR IT ER S

every business letter at the lef t o f the sheet b elow the d ate line the n ame in a line by itsel f the add ress in two lin es below Either of the f ollowin g f orms may be use d : M ess rs B ro wn Jo nes 69 Co ,

‘

9 00

M ichigan A ve

Chi cago , I ll

“

block

f orm :

”

M ess rs Brown , Jo n es {9 Co 9 00 M ichigan A ve '

Chi cago , Ill

Whichever o n e o f these f orms is ad opte d the practice should be uni form in respec t to the place an d date lines In a an d the name an d add ress o f the ad dr essee typewritten le tter unless it be very short the add ress lines sho uld in both cases be single spaced — h t t h r e In business letters thi s l or T e s a u a a s y p 3 should begin flush on the le f t lining up with the first line o f the address an d sho uld be f ollowed by a colon When a firm is the ad dressee the phr as e should be : “ “ Gen tlemen z or De ar Sirs : and when an in dividu al “ “ D ear Sir : or M y d e ar is addressed i t should be : Sir : substi tuting in the case o f a woman eith er marrie d “ “ or single the word M adam f or Sir In thi s contrary to the E nglish pr ac tice the phrase country “ M y de ar Sir is regard ed as more cord ial an d less “ formal than De ar Sir — h t T e e x t A s state d in the intro du ctory par a 4 graph to this se ction all hackneye d phr ases are to be ,

”

LETTER

—espe ially

avoid ed

WR IT IN G

1 39

in complete

sentences such as : “ “ Yours o f even d ate received R eplying to yours o f “ even date we h ave to s ay s ame wi ll re ceive prompt “ “ attention fin d inclosed thankin g you in ad vance “ as above st ated etc C are should be t aken not to write in the first person sin gular when the letter is signe d with a firm name The first wo r d o f the text should begin in the line next below the s alutation an d should have the s ame ind ention as all su ccee ding paragraphs in the letter Leaving a blank line between paragraphs as is the practice o f some business houses sets o fl the paragraphs sh arply an d gives emphasis to each o f them ; “ but it produ ces a staccato effe ct an effec t o f dis continui ty an d som etim es o f overemphasis whi ch is o f ten c ontrary to the intention o f the writer M u ch the s ame may be s aid o f over — paragraphin g which is sometimes carrie d so far as to m ake a separate par agr aph o f e ach sentence A li ttle consideration o f these effe cts will enable e ach writer to de cid e wh at style he wishes to ad opt — i ts Th e m li n m co e t a r c l o s e P resent r t e a c i c li m 5 p y p “ “ this to the f orm s : Yours truly or Yours very trul y The phrases : R espec tfully yours Fai thfully yours etc are no longer regarde d as goo d f orm in ordin ary business letters Phrases introductory to the compli “ “ ment ary close su ch as Beli eve me to be I am “ A waiting an e arly reply etc should form a separate line The first word only o f the complimentary close should be capitaliz e d an d a comma should f ollow the close o f the line arr ange d as follows : c

”

A M AN UAL FOR

1 40

WR ITER S

y reply Yo urs very truly

Awaiting an

earl

I am

GE OR GE C B R OWN .

Yo urs truly

BR OWN PUB LISHING Co

per Geo rge C Bro wn .

“

vulgar Yours etc 13 never permitte d an d no d egree o f haste or famili ari ty will excuse its use — i t n A s indicate d in the illustration e s a u re Th 6 g given in the preced ing section in a letter signed by the ﬁrm n ame the latter should be f ollowe d by the sign ature o f the person wri tin g the le tter pr eceded by the word “ F or addi tional suggesti ons s ee sec 6 under per “ Private or Social Letters “ — Private an d See s ec 7 under 7 The e n velope “ F ormal Letters an d s ec 7 under Social Letters 8 Examples o f b us in es s letters T he

”

{I " CHICAGO, ILL ,

M essrs S mith .

Jon es 59

9 9 F etter Lane London , E C .

July

24, 1 9 1 3

England

GE NTLE MEN :

We are ingreceipt o f yo ur co mplai nt to the effec t that N o s 7 l ofPetro lo gy were no t received by the Directo r an d 8 o fthe Jo urn a o fthe Geo lo gical Survey Our reco rds s ho w the d ispatch o f thes e n umb ers by regis In V iew o f the fact that so much time tered mail o n February 2 has been allo wed to elapse befo re the claim was made an d o f the fact that o ur s to ck is V ery lo w we hes itate to duplicate this .

LETT ER

WRITIN G

I41

further inves tigatio n We are to day sending o ut a tracer and will repo rt to y o u later when we hear fro m the ice autho rities In the event o fadvice fro m yo ur cus to mer po s t o ﬂ that the package co mes to hand later yo u will o f course let us kno w Yo urs very truly BR OWN PUB LISHIN G Co per J G witho ut

o rder

[ 2] C HICAGO, ILL

M essrs S mith, .

Jones 5

July

2 4,

19 13

9 9 F etter Lane

London , E C , En gland .

G ENTLE ME N :

Yo ur letters o f Jun e 4 an d June 1 3 We have b een delayed in canvas sing the details o f yo ur in vo ice o f J une 4 fo r £ 1 6 1 53 5d and yo ur credit no te o f June 1 3 Re:

catalo gues there s ee ms to b e fo r 7 s 6d On the item o f a m arked discrepan cy b etween the amo unt autho riz ed an d the .

amo unt charged

ﬂ

R eviewing the deta i ls

fro m o ur

ﬁles we ﬁnd

the fo llo wing:

(a) Our o rder N o

January

2 2 5,

autho riz ed

1 9 13 ,

Catal o gue o f Publicatio ns fo r Englis h and fo reign boo ksellers , private indi viduals , and Sco ttish minis ters in acco rdance with yo ur letter o f Decemb er 1 5 , 1 9 1 2 , to co s t appro ximately £ 7 1 0s (b) Our letter o f January 9 autho riz ed y o u to include the logue fo r Indian univer co s t o f extra co pies o f the cata nd co lleges sities a (c) The charges o n yo ur invo ice o f February 2 4 fo r £ 1 6 1 4s 1 0d are fo r the to ta 1 1d a nd o f July 4 fo r £ 1 l lo gues fo r the Indian univers ities an d charges o n cata co pies o f the

lleges

as per (b) abo ve

A M AN UAL FOR

14 2

(d) Yo ur invo ice plu s £ 4 1 od

1 7s

£ 13

ders tan d , If we are

June

1 1d

4 fo r the

to tal .

WR IT ER S is £ 8

catalo gues

£ 13 9 s 9 d .

credit no

les s

deductio n

o ur

(d)

regarding

te 7 s

T his , witho u t dis co un t, is , we

yo ur to tal charge fo r (a) abo ve

co rrec t

1z s

in the

fo re

feren ce o f appro ximately go in g, y o u wil l n o te that there is a dif £ 6 b etween the es timate in yo ur letter o f Decemb er 1 5 , 1 9 1 2 which was the charged

£7

1 0s

y o u to go made

co s t

an d the actu al amo un t

appreciate the act that the amo un t es timate ; y e t we certainl y d id no t expect

o f co urs e ,

was merely an

that the to tal

bas is o f o ur o rder

wo uld amo un t to

nearl

£ 13

M ay we as k

ver yo ur ﬁgures again an d see ifa mis take has no t been Yo urs very truly

WHI TE per J G

B R OW N ,

III

F OR MA L LE TTER S

Formal letters as distingu ished f rom either private or business letters are (1 ) those add ressed to persons o ccupying high positions to whom it is d esired to Show some mark o f unusu al respect an d (2 ) in vit ations or accept ances o r d eclin ations o f some n ature I The he adin g — In f ormal s o ci al letters the place an d d ate are never given at the to p but at the en d an d o n the le f t ; in other f orm al letters however the place an d date should b e at the right han d near the to p o f the page as in busin ess letters without abbreviation o f the n ame of the mo nth The add res s 2 This is place d at the en d an d on the le f t below the pl ace an d date if the l atter are not at ,

LETTE R

WR ITIN G

145

It as the beginning of the letter (but see pp 1 3 2 well as the place an d date may be arran ged as in the “ examples given in secs 1 an d 2 und er Business Corre spondence but the style should be unif orm f or both In replying to fo rmal invi t ations the add ress o f the F or special f orms see the list at ad dressee is omi tted the en d o f this sub divis ion (pp 1 4 5 — h t h r l r s Custom has estab lished T e s a u a t o a e 3 y p F or avariety of f orms f or diff erent classes of indi vidu als spe cial f orms see the li st at the en d o f thi s subd ivision “ In cas es not covered by this li s t Sir (pp 1 4 5 ii ) may be used where extrem e f ormali ty is intend ed ; in “ “ other cases either Dear Sir or M y d e ar Sir is in per f e ctly good taste — x t t T h e e Specially f ormal so cial letters are 4 o f ten written in the thi rd person but in that case they take n o heading add ress o f the add ressee s alutatory phrase complimentary close or s ign ature (see example below p T he d ate an d the add ress of the wri ter however should always be given on the le f t at the close It an d the date should pre f er ably be spelled in full must not be inf erred however that all f ormal communi In many cases i rd person c ations should be in the th su ch a form o f correspondence would cause grave offense In general it may be s aid to be usual f or formal social invitations acceptances or d eclinations b ut f or other purposes thi s f orm is not in favor in thi s T o express f ormality respe ct etc the gen count ry i ce er al tone an d langu age should s uﬂ .

”

A M AN UAL FOR

1 44

WRITE R S

— m o l i m e n t lose A s not ed in the pre a r c 5 p y cedin g sec tion f orm al le tters writt en in the th i rd person take n o complimentary close The complim entary close in extremely f ormal letters addressed to persons in high ofl i cial positions may be (with m odifications) as f o llows : “ I have the hon or to be Sir yo ur most o b ed ient serv “ an t o r in case o f a lesser d egree o f f o rm ali ty I am Sir yours mo st respe ct fully ; except however in unusu al an d especially f ormal letters the phrase “ Yours very truly is greatly to be pre ferred Except in o fficial corr espon d en ce f rom an of fi cial o f the gov ernment to a private perso n an d som etim es between “ f fi ce o f a o rs the rmy or navy the phr ase Yo ur obe di ent s ervant is passing out o f u s e In re cent years the “ phrase Yo ur obedient servant has been use d in this country by a public of fi cial in writing to a private “ in dividu al to in dicate the relation o f servant o f the which exi sts on the part o f the occupant o f public the pub li c of fi ce But in letters from private persons it is n o longer regarded as am on g the customary co n ven tio n s F or special form s see li st at the en d o f this subdivision (pp 1 4 5 “ — h 6 T e S ign ature See s ec 6 und er Pr ivate or Social Letters (p — h T e e e nvelo Ordin ary cases will be f oun d to be 7 p “ d by the rules in s ec 7 un der Private or Social covere F or comprehensive form s covering Letters (p many special cases see list at the en d o f this subdivision (pp 1 45 fl The

”

LET TER

WR IT IN G

145

F or conveni ence f orm s fo r the name an d add ress the salut a tion the complimentary close an d the envelope required in spe cial cases are grouped in the f ollowing li st E very class o f persons to whom f or an y reason the f oregoing rules are not applicable is enumerate d an d letters to an y person not comi ng withi n an y o f the c lasses enu mer ated in the list should be governed by the In f ormal business letters gener al rules given above to persons covered by the li st below the name an d ad dress o f the ad d ressee should ordinarily be pl ace d at the en d of the letter an d on the le f t h an d sid e the langu age f or the envelope being the s ame as that given for the nam e an d address in the li st below T o place the n ame an d add r ess at the beginnin g however is in perf ectly good taste the choice o f the en d inste ad o f the begin ning f or these details being customarily a mark o f gre ater f ormality ,

Pres id en t ofthe Un ited S tates

Was hin gto n DC fo rmal) Dear M r Presiden t:

N ame an d address : T he Pres iden t, Salutatio n : Sir : Clo se :

(o r

Yo urs v ery

less

trul

Envelo pe : Same as given fo r

me and address

M ember of Cabin et N ame an d address : T he Secretary DC Salutatio n : Dear M r Secretary :

State,

Clo s e :

Yo urs very

tru

Envelo pe : Same as give n fo r

me an d address

Was hingto n

A M AN UAL F OR

146

W R ITER S

A mbas s ad or

N ame an d address : His Excellen cy the

Was hingto n

Salu tatio n :

DC Dear M r Ambas s ado r: .

Yo urs very

Clo s e :

French Ambass ado r

trul

E nvelo pe : Same as given fo r

me an d address

S en ato r

N ame an d address : States Sen ate,

T he Ho n

Was hin gto n

DC .

Yo urs very

trul

United

C ullo m

(o r mo re

Salu tatio n : M y dear Sen ato r : Cullo m : C lo s e :

Shelby M

in timate) Dear M r

E n velo pe : Same as given fo r

an d address

Co n gress man

M an n , United States Ho use o f R epresen tatives , Was hingto n , D C Sal utatio n : Dear Sir: (o r, mo re in timate) Dear M r M ann : T he Ho n

N ame an d address :

Yo urs very

Clo se :

trul

E n v elo pe : Same as giv en fo r

me and address

Go vern or N ame an d addres s : The Ho n E .

s io n ,

Dunne, Executive M an

Sprin gďŹ eld , Ill

Salutatio n :

(o r mo re

Dear Sir :

in timate) Dear Go vern o r

Dunn e :

Yo urs v ery

Clo se :

trul

En velo pe : Same as given fo r

S ecretary

n ame

an d addres s

fState

N ame an d address : T he Secretary

o f State,

Sprin gďŹ eld , Ill

Sal u tatio n : Dear M r Secretary : .

Clo s e :

Yo urs very

trul

E nvelo pe : Same as given fo r

name

an d address

LETT ER

W RIT IN G

14 7

M ayor N ame an d address : T he Ho n C arter H Harriso n , M ayo râ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s i ce, Chicago , Ill Off .

Salutatio n : Dear Sir : (o r, mo re in timate) Dear M r M ayo r : (o r, s till mo re in timate) Dear M r Harris on : Clo se : Yo urs very truly , .

En velo pe : Same as given fo r

an d address

Jud ge N ame an d add ress :

The Ho n

Henry A

Freeman

State

Circuit Co urt B uilding, Chicago , Ill

(o r mo re

Salutatio n : Dear Sir :

man Clo se :

in timate) Dear

Judge Free

Yo urs very

trul

En velo pe : Same as given fo r

me an d addres s

C o ns ul N ame an d addres s : T he

French Co nsul

Chicago , Ill

Salutatio n : Dear M r Co n s ul : .

Clo s e :

Yo urs very

trul

Envelo pe : Same as gi ven fo r

and add

ress

Pres id ent ofa Univers ity N ame and addres s : Pres iden t Harry Pratt s ity o f Chica go , C hicago , Ill

Judso n Un iver ,

Salutatio n : Dear Presiden t

Judso n : (o r

mo re

fo rmal)

dear Sir : C lo s e :

Yo urs very

trul

E nvelo pe : Same as giv en fo r

an d add ress

The P o pe

N ame an d addres s : His Ho lin es s , Po pe Pius R o me

The

Salutatio n :

Yo ur Ho liness : Co mplimen tary clo s e : Sin cerely yo urs E nvelo pe : Same as given fo r

name

in C hris t,

an d address

Vatican

A M AN UAL F OR

1 48

WR ITER S

Cardi n al

William Cardinal O Co n 2 5 Gra nb y Street B o s to n M as s

N ame an d addres s : His E min ence , n ell,

Archbisho p o fBo s to n ,

’

Yo ur Eminence : Co mplimentary clo s e : F aithfully yo ur Eminence s s ervan t o r Sin cerely yo urs ; if the writer is a C atho lic the wo rd s “ in Chris t are us ually add ed Salutatio n :

’

”

E n velo pe : Same as given fo r

me an d address

A rchbis hop

Jo hn

T he M o s t R ev

N ame an d address :

Irelan d, D D .

Archbis ho p o f St Paul, C athedral, St Paul M inn .

Yo ur Grace : o r Sir : Co mplimen tary clo se : Any o f the o rdin ary fo rms s uch as Very truly yo urs o r Yo urs s incerely will b e fo un d to b e

Salu tatio n :

if the writer

in go o d tas te ; ” cerely yo urs in Chris t,

is a Catho lic the wo rds :

Sho uld

En velo pe : Same as given fo r

used

“

Sin

me an d address

B is hop

James

N ame and address : T he R t R ev .

B is ho p

o f T rento n ,

Tren to n , N J

A M cFaul, D D

B is ho p :

Co mplimen tary

b o ve

o r,

R ight R ever

mply , an d perhaps mo re co mmo nly , Sir : clo s e : Same as that given fo r an archb is ho p o r, s i

En velo pe : Same as given fo r n ame an d addres s

Dean

Salutatio n : Right R everen d an d dear B isho p : en d

Archdeacon

N ame an d addres s : ’

Paul s C hurch,

e tc

T he

Very

R ev

Dean R o b inso n , St

Salutatio n : R everen d Sir : Co mplimen tary clo se : Very truly Envelo pe : Same as given fo r

yo urs

n ame

o r,

Sin cerely

and address

yo urs

LETT ER

WR IT IN G

1 49

Pries t 1

A Paris h Pries t :

N ame and addres s :

[The]

Avenue, C hicago , Ill

Jo hn A

R ev

Salutatio n : R everen d an d dear Father : Co mplimentary

Father :

Yo urs

clo se :

B ro wn , 9 00 M ichigan

s inc ere

fo rmal phrases Envelo pe : [The] R ev Jo hn A

Dear R everend

01 ,

any

mo re

the

Church, 2

A Do cto r

etc

Bro wn , R ec to r

o f St

’

o hn s

Divinity

N ame an d addres s : Add the letters indicating the degree to the n ame .

Salutatio n : R everend an d dear Do cto r: Co mplimen tary clo se and en velo pe : Same as fo r a paris h pries t .

Vicar General o r Head o f an

eccles ia s tical

ins titutio n ,

s uch

as a semin ary :

N ame an d addres s : Chicago , Ill

Very

R ev

Francis

Kelley

DD .

Salutatio n :

Very R everend and dear Father :

01 ,

Very R ever

Do cto r : as the case may be Co mplimen tary clo s e : Same as fo r a paris h pries t En velo pe : Same as given fo r n ame an d address end

an d dear

Exampl es

mal letter s

o f fo r

[Invitatio n] M rs G eo rge Charles B ro wn reques ts the pleasure ’ o f M r J o hn Smith s co mpa ny at d inner o n Wed nes ’ day even ing, Septemb er the nin th, at eight o clo ck .

M ICHI GAN AVE NU E September the third

9 00

N ineteen hun dred thirteen

M AN UAL F OR WR ITE RS

1 59

[Acceptan ce]

Jo hn Smith accepts with much pleas ure M rs B ro wn s kind in vitatio n to di ne o n September the n inth As M rs B ro wn failed to name the ho ur M r Smith ho pes he is right in as s uming it to b e half after s even o clo ck Mr

’

SHORE DRIVE Septemb er the third N ineteen hundred thirteen 9 LA KE

9 00

M I CHI GAN

AVEN UE

CHI CAGO, ILL The S ecretary

September 9 ,

19 13

fState

Was hingto n

DC .

D EAR M R SECRETAR Y : .

I b eg to reques t that a pas spo rt fo r to me with all po ss ible d ispatch

travel in Russ iahe is s ued

I am a citiz

en o f the

ry credentials

the n eces sa

Uni ted

States , and I trans mit herewith

I am, Sir,

Yo urs respectfully (o r Yo urs very truly ) ,

G EOR GE C B R OWN .

[or

ins tead

end ;

s ee

o f at

the

beginning place the n ame and address ,

132

THE SECRETAR Y

WASHIN GTON

OF ,

STATE

DC .

at the

C HA PT ER VIII HIN T S ON T HE PREPARATION OF M AN U SC R IPT F OR T HE PR IN TER T he preparation of the manuscript f or the prin ter is a process which usu ally be gins af ter the manus cript is

ompleted While the d egr ee o f preparation necessary “ whi ch com es to the diff ers with e ach work o r j o b printer involving in som e cases actu al e ditin g an d in other cases s carcely more than the notation on the manus cript of the siz e of type in whi ch it is to be set an d the length o f the type line it will be evid ent to anyone that som e te chn ical supervi sion on the part of someone is necess ary bef ore the written pages can be turned over to different printers to set into type Definition s — I In all printing est ablishments the written mate rial which is to be put into type is terme d “ When this is put into type it is Spoken of as copy “ “ “ being set or set up the terms composition “ an d being appli ed to the process and to compositor the printer respe ctively The length o f the type line (which o f course varies f or differen t works d epend ing on the Siz e of the book the siz e o f type an d o f paper to “ be used etc ) is termed measure T his is more fully treate d below (chap xi pp 1 8 9 9 2 to whi ch the read er is ref erre d) It will sufﬁce at thi s point to state the self evident fact that the compositor must be instru cted c

”

— .

15 1

A M AN UAL FOR

15 2

“

WR IT ER S

regarding the measure an d the siz e o f the type to be used before he can begin composition AS to siz es o f type see chap xi pp 1 88— 89 “ The term legen d is applied to the de scriptiv e lan A n illustration printed guage afﬁxed to illustrations material o n the same page as the text with text— “ ﬁgure ; above below or besid e i t) is called a text— a full— page illustration o n spe cial paper d iff ering f rom “ that on which the text is printed is calle d an insert (see p “ T he imprint is the inscriptio n usu ally appearing at the f oot o f the title— page giving the n am e o f the publisher the city an d year o f publication etc (see ”

”

“ — 2 O rd er o f materi al Be fore the copy re aches the printer however there are several things to be d one by the author or by an editor f or him It should be b o rne in mind that it is n o part o f the du ty o f the pub lis her or Of the printer to write an y part o f the copy f or the author Every part o f the book there f ore m ust be written out bef ore it goes to the printer What are “ termed the prelimi nary pages are too o f ten overlooke d by the author but e ach is an in tegral ne cessary part o f the work T he ﬁrst printed page in the book is known as the “ “ — half title som etimes calle d the short title or “ b astar d title It is a page bearing only the main title of the book an d is usu ally blank on its reverse Hal f titles are sometimes inserte d in the bo dy s id e ”

”

PR EPARATION OF M AN U SCRIPT F OR PRIN TER

153

o f the boo k either be fore e ach ch apter or to mark special divisions o f the work T hey should usu ally appe ar be fore an appen dix an d be fore an index unless these are very short T hen f ollows the title page bearing the ti tle an d sub title (if any ) the author s name hi s academi c or other titles (ifd esired) an d in case the book is to be privately “ is not to be ar the imprint o f a publi sher) printed “ “ such imprint as the author may desire su ch as Pub “ lis hed by the A uthor Printed for Private C irculation etc with the year o f publi cation below On the next page should follow the d e claration o f copyright in case the book is to be copyrighte d an d thi s “ should re ad : Copyr ight 1 9 by A ll R ights R eserve d (see chap xii p In case a d edication to the work is planned the page cont aining the d ed icatory l anguage f ollows N ext in ord er should come the Pre face if an y is co n templated Thi s is usu ally placed be f ore the T able o f Contents an d is not enumer ate d in the latter bein g regarde d as not strictly a part o f the text proper F or thi s it is T hen f ollows the T able o f Contents ordin arily enough to list the titles o f the several chapters Sometimes however the sub divisions o f each chapter are summariz ed un der the chapter ti tle but th at is a matter to be governed by the pref erence o f the author an d by questions o f expedien cy space available etc T he preparation o f the T able o f Contents should be attend ed to in the beginni ng or the matter may be over ,

’

”

1 54

M AN UAL F OR WRI TE RS

looked an d the book be printed wi thout it" The actu al bers can be inserted later when the book has page num be en made up into pages T he compilation o f this pre supposes that titles have be en aďŹ&#x201A; i xed to e ach chapt er an d th at e ach has b een numb ered in its proper or d er If a List o f Illustration s is desire d its proper posi tio n is o n the ďŹ rst o dd numbered page f ollowing the T able o f Contents Af ter the prelimin ary matter has been prepared an d put in place the S heets o f the complete d work should b e numbered consecutively Great con f usion an d po s sible expense may ari se fro m negle ct to number every Sheets are e asily transpose d or even page of the copy lost an d if they are set up o ut of their ord er the mis take may be overlooked until too late or may involve an expensive readjustment o f typ e If an In dex is desired one b ased on page numbers canno t o f course be prepare d un til the book has reache d the page proo f stage when the page numbers become available If the re f eren c es are however to be mad e to sec tions or paragraphs instead o f to pages it is obvio us that the Index can be made fro m the manuscript Ih d exes b ased on paging are however more convenient an d customary except in r ar e inst an ces F or hints on making the Index see below s ec 7 this chapter If the book is to cont ain illustr ations a d e ci sion should be re ached as to their ch aracter an d number an d siz e (whether full page o r o therwise) pref erably be fo re the manuscript leaves the author s hands There are ,

â&#x20AC;&#x2122;

PR EPAR ATION OF M AN U SCR IPT F OR PR IN TER

1 55

several ki nds Ofillustrations an d for a f ull defin ition an d description o f these the reader is re f erred to ch ap ix b elo w A n estimate o f the cost o f the book must o f course in clu d e the illustrations an d consequently it is wise to pro cure the photographs or d rawings to be used “ bef ore turning in the copy o f the work C are should “ be exercise d in d etermini ng the language o f the legen d s for the illustrations (see p which should be confine d to one line in length when possible an d should r arely exceed two lines in length “ “ ” — S ty l e In so m e publishing houses the copy 3 “ is first turne d over to a c opy read er who edits it f or oversights errors in phraseology paragr aphing etc He “ notes on it the me asure (see p an d marks the various passages in the text with the siz e of type in which they are to be set prescribes the char acter o f type for the chapter head s subhe ad s side heads etc ; num bers an d marks the f ootnotes ; un derscores or quotes “ titles (see chap v s ec 5 3 ; chap vi s ec casts up an d marks the position t abular matter (see p an d character o f the rul es in tables as a guide to the printer ; an d last but not least read s everything care fully in ord er to apply consi stent m ethod s o f capitali z atio n punctuation an d spelli ng T hese ch aracteristics in the langu age of the printing establishment are termed “ ” style Style is d efin ed by W ebster as the mann er or plan followed in an y particular o flice or case in d ealin g with cert ain d etails o f typo gr aphy prepar ation o f copy d isplay an d the lik e which may be regulate d by ,

”

A M AN UAL FOR

1 56

WRIT ER S

rule an d in regard to which customs may diﬁ er as spelling capitaliz ation an d d ivision punctu ation abbre ,

viatio n s , etc

” .

“

Within certain limi ts therefore the style appli ed to any particular manuscript may be either that pre s cribed by the author o r that ad opted an d en for ce d by the publishi ng house F ar abo ve all questions o f the “ — a cast iron one in all ho o f style the rule i i e s c c hi gh class est abli shm ents—regarding cons is tency Within “ style do es not matter provided only cert ain limi ts that consistency o f treatment is followed T hat is to s ay it is o f comparatively li ttle m omen t whether su ch “ “ “ word s as Christology are St ate presid ent spelle d with a capital or lower case ﬁr st letter ifonly they A ll high cl ass pu b are co n s is ten tly treate d throughout lishi n g hous es h ave their own rules o f style but in the cas e an d other ind epend ent publications su ch o f books are generally willi ng to waive their e st ab lishm ents own rules within re asonable limits in favor o f the author s pref eren ce ifhi s manus cript consistently f oll ows If a manuscrip t an y goo d an d well recogniz e d practice is n o t prepared by the author with due care in this particular ei ther it wil l be edited by the copy re ad er at some co st to the author or later when it is in type the proof reader will point out the in consisten cies ; an d the ne cessary corre ctions which are som etimes very he avy are then charged to the author s alterations (see p “ It shoul d be borne in mind that the copy is usu ally d istribute d among several co mpositors who all work ”

”

’

PR E PARA T ION OF M AN U SC R IPT FOR PRIN TER

157

on it at once If there fore consistency in capitaliz a tion an d other d etails is not brought about in advan ce it is f olly to expe ct consisten cy to result f rom the work o f sever al in dependent compositors none o f whom has auv knowledge of what rules of style are bein g observed by the others “ style are Some rules ind eed un der the he ad o f too technical for the ordinary author to burd en his mind with Yet the subje ct as a whole is one on whi ch every writer should be informed in a gen eral way T hose who wish more detaile d inf ormation th an is given in thi s ch ap ter an d who desire an authori t ative standar d as a guide in all typographi cal matters where rules are need e d are re f erred to the M an ual of S tyle (Chicago : The Un i versity o f Chicago Press 3d — n r t i s T he ordin ary roman type has T e h i c a l a c ce c 4 p “ SMA LL CAPS C A PITAL S (called by printers capital letters usu ally about half the Siz e o f the “ the ordinary un capital an d lower case “ upper case (sometim es T he term s iz ed letters) “ appli e d to caps ) an d lower case cam e into use from “ the fact that the type set by hand is kept in two cases shallow wood en boxes d ivid ed into compartmen ts “ f or each char acter) the upper of which hold s the caps “ lower case an d the lower the “ that caps T o in dicate on the manus crip t “ small are d esired dr aw three li nes an d to in di cate draw two lines un der the letter or word to be caps It is also a f requent practice to express capit aliz e d .

”

1 58

M AN UAL F OR

WRITE RS “

these directions by writing caps s e (small caps) “ or (lower case) o r c an d LG (caps an d lower case) in the margin as a dire ction f or a li ne or pass age “ to be so treated (s ee belo w p Small caps are rarely use d alone fo r an y purpose other th an center heads or legend s f or illustratio ns Except in extremely rare cases they should not be used in the plac e o f italic f or one or more wo rd s in the text o f ordi nary re ading matter T o indicate a redu ction o f a capi tal letter to a lower case letter d raw an o bli que line throu gh it d ownwar d f rom r ight to le f t T o indicate i tali c un d ers core with a straight line F or itali c caps und erscore with three lines an d add the “ word s italic caps in the margin F onts o f itali c type do not contai n small caps T o in dicate b lack f ace or b ol d f ace type un d erscore with a wavy line thus T hi s type is f requently resorte d to f or side h ead s or center he ad s and to secure spe cial emph asi s where f or an y reason ordin ary italic would not accompli sh thi s result “ The G erman practice o f hair spacing word s (some times calle d letter spacing in ord er to express empha s is is one whi ch is r arely resorted to in th is country F or this purpose it alic shou ld invariably be pref erre d “ A hair space is the thinn est space made an d when inserted between the letters o f a wo rd the effec t is to cause the wor d to st an d out prominently f ro m the rest o f the text Its use in this country is practically limite d “

”

PR EPAR ATION OF M AN U SCR IPT FOR PRIN TER

1 59

so far as book work is concerned to transliterati o ns o f som e o f the Semi tic languages an d cun eif orm charac ters Q u o ted matter exceeding ﬁve or s ix lines o f typ e is usually set in type o f a smaller siz e than the bo dy o f the “ text It will s ave trouble to the copy reader an d to the printer an d o f ten avoid inconsistent typogr aphical tre atment if su ch matter is single— space d when written on the typewriter or is otherwise set o ff from the bo dy “ o f the text in the copy (see pp 1 5 1 In case s pe cial fo rms o f spelling dialec t or capi taliz a tion are desired in apassage su ch as matter quoted f rom “ F ollow copy should be another writer the word s wri tten in the margin o f the passage in question If all d irec ti ons to the printer are wri tten in ink o f a f e rent f rom that in which the copy is written color d if con fus ion and error will o f ten be avoid e d C o py should be wri tten on one side o f the Sheet only N o ci rcumstances excuse a d eparture from thi s rule “ — If af ter the copy is written it is 5 In s erti on s desire d to add matter of an y l ength the new matter should be written out on a s eparate sheet which should ” be marked Insert A an d attached to the shee t to whi ch the new matter is to be adde d On the latter the s ame “ wor d s should be written at the point Insert A where the insertion is to be made If several pages of such new matter are to be inserted at one point they shoul d be mark ed with the number borne by the page T hus calling f or the insertion f ollowe d by A B C etc inserts f or page 2 7 shoul d be marked 2 7A 2 7 B etc If ,

”

‘

”

M AN UAL F OR

WRITE R S

out s ay f rom 9 to 2 7 inclusive af ter the pages o f the co py are numbered page 8 shoul d be marked 8— 2 7 to show the omi ssion ; o r at the bottom o f “ the page may be written p 2 8 f ollo ws Wh er e copy is written in lo ngh and the letter u should be unders core d an d a co rresponding li ne should be drawn above the n T hi s prac tice will obviate co n fu sion an d mist akes in proper n am es f oreign word s pages are taken

”

etc

having written a ﬁgure or abbreviation the author desires to have it spelled out the printer will un d erst an d the wish if a ring is d rawn aroun d the ch ar ac ters o r wo rd s to b e so tre ated Pun ctu ation sh o uld b e care f ully in dicated on copy T he period Shoul d always be surroun d e d with a circle thus 0 The hyphen should be distingu ished from the dash by using two short lin es fo r the f ormer thus l; an d care shoul d be taken to make the colon an d the semico lo n e asily distin guish able f rom e ach other 6 F ootnotes —A f o o tnote Shoul d not be placed at the f oot o f the page in the manus cript but should be place d imme diately below the line whi ch carrie s the number o r oth er ref eren ce mark an d set o ff f rom the text by drawing a li ne across the page imme diately above The text should continue below it When an d below it the matter is ﬁrst put into type the f ootnote will be put in this s ame relative position so that when the pages “ made up n o mi stake or con fusion can com e to be ari se as to whi ch f ootnote belongs on the page in question If af ter

”

M AN U SCRIPT FOR PRIN T ER

PR E PAR ATION OF

numbers are used f or footnotes these should be contin uous on the page but not continuous throughout the chapter Thi s prac tice will permit o f later ins ertions of additional f ootnotes without expense for renum bering the entire series N umber in g o f footno tes is pref erable to the use o f asterisks or other symbols If the au thor s n ame is given in the text in connec tion with a reference to or a quotation from his work i t should not be repe ate d in the f ootnote : “ This theo ry is ques tio ned by Herb ert as fo llo ws : I cann o t If ref eren ce

’

admit, ” 1

etc

fthe Ancients , I ,

Laws

1 53

’

[Autho r s

me is o mi tted ]

better to place at the en d of the quotati on rather than be fore it the index ﬁgure or symbol which re fers in the text to the footnote (see illustration above) T he f ollowin g should be the f orm of ref eren ces in f ootnotes : C R Henderso n I ndus tri al I n s urance (2 d cd ; Chicago : The University o f Chicago Pres s p 3 2 1 ; S I Curtis “ 24 8 E The Place o f Sacriﬁce B i blical World XX I It is

”

order o f the details Should be : (I ) author s nam e fo llowed by a comma not a colon ; (2 ) ti tle (if o f a book or periodical und erscored ; if o f an article quoted ) ; (3 ) number of edition if desired ; (4) place o f p ublica tion f ollowe d by a colon ; 5) n ame of publi sher an d date o f publication ; (6) reference to volume an d page In i t is cas e the ref erence in clud es the volume number “ “ better to omit the abbreviations Vol an d p as in the sec ond example above (see chap v s ec ’

The

”

A M AN UAL FOR

1 62

In d e x —T he makin g .

WR ITER S

a good in d ex is far

m ore

technical an d difficult than many autho rs suppo se T he su ccess o f a book may be s aid o f ten to d epend on its Unless in d ex; certainly the pro per us e o f the b o ok d oes the author is f amiliar with the elementary requ irements o f a go od index it is o f ten d esirable if the b o ok is te ch n ical or complicated to h ave the in d e x c ompile d by o n e who mak es a business o f this sort o f work T he pub li sher can always d ire ct the autho r to som eone o f this class T he m echan ical wo rk o f compiling an in d ex Shoul d Pro cure car d s o f b e accompli shed by m eans o f card s a conven ient siz e an d make one entry on e ach car d adding o f course the page number belongin g to the entry T hi s work is d one irrespec tive o fthe alph abetical ord er o f the entries While the car d s are still in the or der in whi ch the work was d one the re f eren ce s should be verifie d It is impo rtant that verification sh o uld be d one at this st age sin ce i t results in a large s avin g o f time an d lab o r an d there is m ore li keli hoo d o f d is covering the loss o f a car d o r re f eren ce at this tim e than later when the card s are arrange d alphabetically When this work is completed the card s are arr anged in their alphabetical “ ord er an d at this stage o f the work those cat ch word s the first o r ind ex word s un der whi ch the s ub divisio ns o f the subje c t are arrange d) whi ch are dupli cate d o n various card s are e rased thus bringin g to gether “ the various sub— subj ects und er the main subjec t or “ wo r d T hese sub subjects are best arr anged with .

”

PRE PAR ATION OF M AN U SCRIPT F OR PRIN TER

I 63

reference to their alphabetical order instead o f the numerical order o f the page re ferences just as the main “ are arr anged T he work o f in dexin g catch word s should begin as soon as the fir st in stalment o f page proo f s (see pp 1 7 6 ii ) arrives from the printer Cross references are a vi tal element o f a good ind ex By this is meant that wherever a catch word can be employed to refer the read er to the treatment o f a sub it should be j ect under some other catch word res orted to F or example if the main subject o f s ay “ “ the M ankind is ind exed und er th at cat ch word “ “ “ R ace People might wi th words Human beings propriety be add ed in their proper alphabetical position “ f ollowed by the word s : S ee M ankin d In li ke man ner if the subje ct Childhood o f M an is to be indexed “ “ C an d when M is it is o f course pl aced un d er “ M an Chi ldhoo d o f re ached the entry should re ad : S ee Child hoo d of M an In indexes o f proper n ames an d other simi lar alpha betical lists the f ollowing rules Shoul d be observe d : M ac or M e St a) N ames beginning wi th M Ste whether the following letter is capi taliz ed or not should be listed as if the prefix were spelled M ac Saint Sai nte thus making it unne cessary for one who consults the index to look in several places to make sure o f fin din g the n ame sou ght : ,

”

’

M achiave lli M acInty re, Hen ry M cIntyre, J ames ’ M In ty re, T ho mas M ack

St Lo uis St Vincen t Sain te B euve Salt Lake City .

A M AN UAL FOR

1 64

W RIT ER S

Compoun d names should be li sted un d er the ﬁrst List the other parts o f the n am es in part of the n ame their respe ctive alphabetical positions an d give a cross re ference to the ﬁrst : b)

C ampb ell B an n erman , Sir Henry Llo yd G eo rge, David Watts Dunto n , Theo do re -

Geo rge , Llo yd

David

S ee Llo yd Geo rge -

the other hand in the case o f hyphenate d n ames gratuitously ad opte d as in the case o f marri e d women adding the maid en n ame to the married n ame the n ame prece ding the hyphen may be disregard ed an d li stin g wi th a S hould be un d er the letter of the true n ame cross ref eren ce un d er the n am e pre ce di n g the hyphen c) N ames with prefixes S hould be li sted un d er the part f ollowing the prefix except (i) in English (see b in F rench when the prefix consists o f or above) ; cont ains the article ; (iii) in I t ali an an d Spani sh when the prefix consists simply of the article ; (iv) in D ut ch the V an T en etc bein g always capit aliz e d (see chap iv sec 5 note) ; (v) when the prefix an d the name are wri tten as one word N aturaliz ed nam es with prefixes should be tre ated accor ding to the rules f or the langu age ad opte d On

Ho ﬂmann ,

J ardin

do s

vo n ; Lima, d e ; Po n te e Ho rto ,

da; San to s Pereira

E n glis h:

De Quin cey ; De M o rgan ; D’Israeli ;

A Becket ;

M acDo nald ; V an B uren

1 65

PREPARATION OF M AN U SCRIPT FOR PRIN T ER

F ren ch: Du M o ncel ; La R o chefo ucaul d ; Le Sage ; Du Pin ; Bo cage ; but : R o sny, d e ; B o uille, de ; Allard , de .

I tali an and Span is h:

La Lumia;

Farina

Farina;

Lo Gatto ;

da; R io , d el ; To rre, d ella Preﬁx compo und ed wi th the n ame: V anderkin de, Zurlauben , Dechamb re, Vanderho eck , Delacro ix but :

the case o f the exceptions above note d the ﬁrst letter of the preﬁx governs the alphabetical position o f the name d) N ames Spelle d wi th the u mlaut a a u should be li sted as if the umlaut were Spelle d out ae o e ue: In

M ii ller, A M ufo la, C M uller, B

h aving two parts or names o f ﬁrms co n “ “ “y nected by an d (Spani sh) 01 et (F rench) “ “ un d (G erman) e (Italian) should be listed accord in g to the ﬁrst letter of the n ame pre ceding the connective : Gomez y Pin eda (under Smi th 81 E vans (und er Duncker un d Loubet et M euni er (un d er Humblo t (und er San d ro ne e Vallardi (un der N ames

)

”

f) p

1 63

the subject of cross— ref eren ces see chap viii .

been said appli es to what may be terme d the mechan ical sid e of index m akin g T hi s is all highly important o f course But o f far greater importan ce is the intelle ctu al side o f the work for unless thi s is d one in a manner whi ch will make the book—an d every part What

has

A M AN UAL FOR

1 66

WRIT ER S

subje ct in it—re adily an d e asily accessible the us e fuln ess— an d consequently the su ccess—o i the book itself will be destro ye d Some books an d o f course some subje cts len d them selves mo re easily to the work o f ind exing than do others In su ch cases the work is co mpar atively simpl e It is in the ind exing o f complex an d involved subje cts that the art of the ind exer is seen at its b est Suppose by way o f example th at the work o r passage to be ind exe d is o n e covering the several processe s o f colo r printing a complex an d intricat e subj ec t If each pro cess is treated separately in the text und er its appropriate title the work of in dexin g will be co mparati vely e asy But if all the various processes are covere d by par a graphs m or e o r less general an d wi thout special segre gatio n of subje c ts an intelli gent pickin g out f or ind ex in g o f e ach pr o cess an d of each word which will express an y phase o f the subje c t is necessary Without su ch discrimin ation a casu al glan ce at the in dex m ay f ail to in dicate to the read er that some particular bran ch o f the subje ct on which he is seeking in f ormation is tre ated at all Superﬁcial in d exing may cause a f ailur e to use the bo o k in the belief that it d oes not cover the sub j ect thou gh all the whi le the inf ormation may be there though un disclose d by the ind ex A n in dex unli ke the book i tself can s car cely be too T he in dex unlike the text is not read prolix or lib eral “ word s actu ally It is referred to an d only those catch— nee ded are re ad at an y one time Hen ce every wor d an d

”

PR EPAR ATION OF M AN U SCR IPT F OR PR IN T ER

which will aid in direc ting the reader to the subje ct he seeks should appear in the index T o d etermi ne what are su ch word s the compiler Shoul d f requently as k him “ self : If I mys elf nee d ed in f ormation on this subject what are the word s or sub subjects und er whi ch I mys elf should be likely to look for it in another man s work T his point o f view will o f ten assist hi m in “ the other man who will use his covering the need s o f work .

’

‘

’

”

C HA PT ER

ILLU ST R ATION S’

tors were better acqu ai nted with modern method s o f illustrating mu ch more adequ ate an d satisf actory results might be o bt ained In considering the subje ct o f illustr ations f or a book the first qu estion to be d ecid e d is whether the figures shall be distribute d in the text (see pp 1 5 2 1 8 2 ) or aggre Sin ce the d e ci sion o f thi s qu estion has gated into pl ates a distin c t bearing on the mechanical mak e u p o f the book it shoul d be mad e only in consul tatio n with the printer “ or publi sh er If a ro ugh eggshell paper is d esirable for the text o n account o f its lightness an d bulking prop erties only the coarsest o f line d rawings can be use d unless the illustrations are pu t in as plates see pp 1 8 2 while the presence o f fin e line d r awin gs an d h alf ton es in the text requ ires the u s e o f a highly finishe d heavy an d non bulking paper A d e cision o f the questions involved in these d etails can there fore be mad e only af ter consultation with an expert T he pro cess o f engraving on wood was the origin al an d costly m etho d o f illustr ating books an d magaz ines Later the inventi on o f lithography o ff ere d a vastly cheaper metho d which was quickly ad opte d T he Fo r the fo llo win g chapter o n “Illus tratio n s the autho rs are ln debted to M r A C M cFarlan d general s up erin tendent o f the Un i vers ity o f Chicago Press If authors an d

edi

”

1 68

1 69

ILLUSTR ATION S

o f having figures close to the text they illus trated was surrend ere d chiefl y on acc oun t o f the financial advantage an d partly be cause better effe c ts could be se cure d by the new process M o dern metho ds however have made possible again the use o f the text cu t at the point where the figure will be o f the most service to the re ader T here are in scientific works however cases in which plates are pre f erable to the text cuts ; e g when a large series o f figures must be be fore the eye at one time or when some figure must be re ferre d to at many points When it has be en determin e d whether text cuts or plates are to be use d the mo de o f repro du c tion must be “ sele cte d for it is ne cess ary to adapt the copy for the illustr atio ns to the f orm o f illustration de cide d upon (see ch ap x p T he f ollowing forms o f illustrations appe ar in bo o ks an d magaz ines : (I ) lithogr aphy (2 ) photolitho gr aphy (3 ) photogravure (4) hal f tone 5 ) z inc an d copper etching (6) wax engraving It is purpose d to state the nature o f e ach o f these its limitations its adaptab ility to special nee ds an d the requ isites for success ful repro duc tion o f illustr ations by e ach pro cess 1 Litho gr aphy —While this pro cess was formerly mu ch used for illustrating s cientific works it has been l argely superseded in sin gle color work by pho to litho g ra It is still the most satis factory m ethod f or phy the reprodu c tion o f obje cts in color although the cost is almost prohib itive F or this re ason i t is being

ad vantage

”

A M AN UAL F OR

1 70

WRIT E R S

replace d by the three co lo r hal f tone pro ce ss later “ describe d un der the subj ec t o f h al f ton e (s e c 4 below) Litho graphs are m ade by drawing on sto ne with c r ayo n o r pen the d esign to b e printe d It requires an expert d raf tsman f amiliar with the subje ct in h and to make su ch dr awings well an d even the best o f draf ts men may make mistakes an d intro du ce interpretati ons foreign to the author s design T he poo rer the o rigin al drawin g the gre ater the ch an ces o f error an d the m o re the litho graph er has to alter it to make it presentable 2 Pho tolithography —B y this pro cess an exac t repro du c tion o f the original dr awing in one co lor is o btain e d enlarge d redu ce d o r o f the sam e siz e as desire d T he pro cess consists o f photogr aphing o n a sensitiz e d pl ate o f z in c the copy to be re ro du ce d T hi s pl ate is then p treated in su ch a way as to make only the lines o f the d esign pervio us to acid an d the pl ate is then very slightly etche d F ro m this as many trans fers as may be desire d are taken to the li tho graphi c stone f rom whi ch the print in g is do ne B e cause o f the very slight etching require d mu ch ﬁner lines an d d ots m ay be repro du ce d than by z in c e tchin g where there is d an ger o f the lo ss o f very ﬁn e de t ail Copy for repro du ction by thi s pro cess should be d rawn with black in dia in k on whi te paper or cardboard an d be made exactly as it i s inten de d to appe ar in its complete d f orm N o wash or ti nts o f an y k in d should be introdu ce d -

”

’

ILLU STRATION S

Photogr avure

—T his process is o f great utility for

the illustration o f s cientific works its advantage bein g that photo graphs an d all kin d s o f d rawings (whether in in k crayon or pen cil in line or tint or wash) can be reprodu ce d with the utmost fid elity wi th an alm ost Owin g to the per f e ct renderin g o f light an d shade rather elaborate me chanical an d photographi c me ans employe d this pro cess is rather expensive an d is use d only for the more important works Copy should be prepared as the finishe d work is intend ed to appe ar but in asmu ch as contrast is always somewh at re du ce d by an y photographi c process Shade d parts o f d rawi ngs should Show a li ttle more contrast than is desire d in the repro du ction — H Hal f tones are printe d from relie f tone a lf 4 pl ates an d hen ce may be use d in the text ; they requi re however a very fin e sur face o n the paper for proper Like photogravures they are ad apted to prin ting photo graphs an d to varie d styles o f d rawing but owing “ to the presen ce o f the s creen resul ts obtaine d f rom half tones do not equal in delicacy an d r ange those f rom photogravu res The printing plate is made by photographing the subje ct throu gh a s creen the result being the bre akin g up o f the picture into lin es an d dots o f varyin g strength representin g the various lights an d S hades o f the or iginal T hese s creens are made with diff erent numbers o f lines to the inch f rom 6 5 f or co arse newspaper work to 400 f or the fin est s cientific work T he s creen must be adapted to the qu ality an d fin ish ,

”

A M AN UAL FOR

1 72

WR ITE R S

o f paper to be used an d the author should n o t there fore attempt to designate on his copy the siz e o f s creen to be use d in the making o f the hal f tone If the copy consists o f photo graphs good cle ar prints should be furni she d an d faili ng these the original negative A lmost an y so rt o fprin t can be repro du ce d but engravers If an y pre f er those made on Solio paper tone d brown alter ations in the photograph are to be m ade su ch as blotting out marks o r toning out und esirable lines e tc dire ctions to this effec t S houl d b e clearly given in writ Paintin g in g attache d not marke d o n the print itsel f out o f portions o r all o f the b ackgroun d can e asily be accomplishe d by the engrav er If wash or pencil d rawings are to b e r eprodu ce d contrast should be gre ater than is d e sir ed in the ﬁn ishe d engraving since the high— lights are o f a light gray inste ad o f whi te be cause o f the h alf— tone screen R e cent d evelopm ents h ave made possible the r epro du ction o f colored subjects by the hal f— tone pro cess By thi s pro cess a set o f thre e plates is made to carry the three primary colors in the sam e proportion as in the original subje ct so that when superimposed in their proper position the result will be a repro d uction o f the copy in i ts original colors A fourth plate is fr e quently added by many engravers carryin g black o r neutral “ tint to give the subject a body which it is sometimes impossible to obtain by the us e o f the primary colors alone A lmost an y colore d subject can be repro duced by this process an d while not so satisfactory artistically ,

”

ILLU STR ATION S

1 75

li thography its fideli ty to det ail as a res ult o f photogr aphy an d its comparative cheapness have brought it into more general use — e t n Zi n d o r c h i n Like half tones z in c e c a c 5 g pp an d copper etchin gs are printed f rom r eli ef plates an d there f ore may be inserted in the text as text figures Unlik e half tones however they do not require so hi ghly fin ishe d a paper f or printing An y drawing or print having black lines or dots on a whi te b ackground wi thout any wash or middle shades may be repro du ce d by this pro ce s s The d rawing or print is photographed on a sensi tiz ed i ch is treated so as to make the z in c or copper plate wh lines of the picture impervious to acid af ter whi ch the ficiently to make them of the height plate is et ched suf requ ire d for prin ting Zin c is ordin arily used f or this purpose but copper bein g o f a d enser h ar der texture The plate gives better resul ts f rom very fin e drawings is then mounted on woo d or metal type high an d may be inse rted in the page o f type at any point d e sire d (see p 1 8 In preparing co py f or etchi ngs care shoul d be t ak en that the ink is a de ad black Win so r N ewton s or Higgins indiaink should be us e d an d always in suffi cient quan tity to avoid gray or brown lin es or dots which are likely ei ther to be lost or to appe ar as ifbroken in etching — n T hi s pro cess is used prin cipally a x r n s W e a v i 6 g g in the reprodu ction of maps an d geometrical figures as is

”

’

[

A M AN UAL FOR

WR ITER S

A copper plate is prepare d by be in g ďŹ rst blackene d an d then coate d with a thin layer o f wax on which the copy is transf erre d either by photography or by d rawi ng d irec tly on the wax T he outlines are go ne o ver with an en grav in g tool which cuts a chann el d o wn to the sur f ace o f the co pper pl ate representin g the lines o f the copy The lettering is pu t in by pressing ordinary type into the wax T hi s wax cov ered plate f orms the matrix f or the molding o f a co pper shell by ele ctrolysis the shell b eing b acked up to the requ ir ed thickness wi th met al Thi s process is superior to etching in the case o f maps an d similar subjec ts sin ce a cle aner sh arper pr int in g Copy should b e prepare d in black plate is possible an d whi te so that it may e asily be phot ographe d on the wax Care however is not so ne cessary in maki ng lin es as they are to appear as it is in d rawings f or etch in g in asmu ch as the engraver can e asily corre ct an y irregul arities o f outli ne in the copy T he essential parts o f the d rawing however shoul d be cle arly repre sente d â&#x20AC;&#x201D; G n s a s t i s e er l u e o n In sen ding dr awin gs an d 7 gg photographs by mail it is advisable th at they be un mounted Ii they are to be arranged in groups which cannot be design ated by s erial nu mbers the outl ines may be roughly trace d on sheets o f paper an d su ch ch arts may be f orward e d with the se ar ate d r awin s p g or photographs In writing on the b acks o f unmounte d photogr aphs care shoul d be use d not to press har d enou gh to Show m arks on the face as su ch marks reprodu ce in ,

ILLU STRATION S

1 75

Etchings an d h alf tones on the s ame photographi ng plate should be avoided if possible Drawings f or any f orm o f photographi c reprodu ction should be made at least half as large again as they are R ed ue intend ed to appear in the fini shed illustration tion by photography permi ts refin ement o f lin e an d fin e shading wi thout exce ssive care in making the origin al Enlargement o f either photographs or d rawings is not ad visable as the camera thereby exaggerates every imperf ec tion an d rou ghness in the origin al -

C HA PTER ST AG ES T HR OU GH

WHICH A BOOK M AKIN G

PASSE S IN T HE

—

Pro o f s an d proo f re ading Wh en all preliminary qu estions h ave been s ettled , su ch as the editing an d 1

o f the manuscript for the printer the siz e o f type to be use d the length o f the type line etc the next stage on which the book enters is the composition or setting up o f the type A s this pro ceed s type is place d “ a lo ng me t al tr ay usu ally about 2 f eet in a gall ey — long an d varying in wid th A s each galley is ﬁlled — i i l a proo f is t aken ul e d s the r nt e r s t e r m an d p p is then given to the proo f reader who corre cts it (s ee “ Proof r eader s M arks p 1 7 9 ) f r o m the copy which i s “ re ad to him by a copyhold er Sin ce this is a process which in m ost cases should b e repeate d b y the autho r him self it may well be explain ed at som e length her e “ T he copyhold er is se ated at the sid e o f the proo f re ader an d on her car eful an d co rr ect r eading o f every wo r d in the copy her clear enunciation an d her accurate in dication o f the presen ce o f i talic o f unusu al capit aliz a tion of paragraphs o f an y d eviatio n from the general stan dard s e tc very mu ch d epend s Copyhold ers an d proof re aders f r equently agree on a series of sign als to t ake the place o f oral statement o f the fact that it alic or caps T hus one tap on the t able are indicate d in the copy pr eparation

”

’

”

’

”

STAGES

IN THE M AKIN G OF A B OOK

1 77

with the pencil coincidently with the utterance of a word may serve to indicate th at su ch wor d is itali ciz e d in the manuscript an d the practice enables the copyholder to continue the reading without a bre ak an d ten d s to dis tract the attention o f the proofread er less than would the necessary statement in wor ds T he proo f bearing the proof read er s marks is taken to a printer who m akes the corrections indicate d an d a “ which together with corre c te d proo f is then pulled the original marke d proof is t aken to a reviser who sees that all the corrections in dicated have been made T his “ T hese pro cee din gs proo f is term ed a revise d proo f are repeate d—some times sever al times if the origin al “ “ or f oul i e contain s very many dirty proo f is “ — until ﬁnally the proo f is cle an i e f ree f rom e rrors errors an d this clean proo f is then sent to the au thor “ accompani ed by the origin al c opy or manuscript T he au thor makes any corre ctio ns an d changes he sees e proo f in d icat ﬁt by marking them in the margin o f th lin e where the corre ction is d esir e d an d in g in the type— returns it to the publisher f or these corre ctions or changes to be mad e The pr actice o f having the copy re ad to “ the author by a copyholder at the time he re ad s the He shoul d re ad the proof is strongly re comm end ed proo f s with the id ea in min d that some of the pe culi arities o f the origin al copy h ave been overlooked or mi s un derstoo d o r th at some passage or sentence has been misplaced misread or even omitte d However cle arly he may think he has his original work in min d the ,

’

”

M AN UAL F OR

WR IT E R S

never be sure that he is saf e in these par ticulars unless he follows thi s plan It is better to corre ct proo f s with in k than with pen cil sin ce pen cil marks of ten b eco m e too blurred in the hand ling which the pro of s und ergo by the time they reach the printer to insure their being corre c tly re ad or If corrections are too nu m erous to be re ad deciphered cle arly an d e asily the whole pass age should b e r ewri tten Correc tions an d alter ations sho uld b e mark ed on the pro o f o nly an d never o n the co py If it is f oun d ne cessary to change or add a word or phrase an eflo rt Should be made to substitute new matter equ al in length to that d eleted or to add matter which will fill o n e o r mor e complete lines T he addi tion o f an extra word in a par agraph so m etime s ne cessitates “ running over the whole paragraph which m e ans a rehand ling o f every word an d a respacing of every lin e in order to get the new wor d in T hus a seemingly trifli ng additio n o f ten proves to be a costly altera tion (s ee s ec requiring an expenditure o f mu ch time on the part o f the printer at the expense o f the author Corrections an d changes m ade in proo f s should be made by me ans of the re cogniz ed marks an d signs used by proofread ers an d und erstoo d by printers On the f ollowing page a facsimile o f the several marks is given an d these should be care fully stu die d be f ore an attempt is mad e to correc t proof s T o in dicate that a le tter or s vllab le Shall be carried from the en d o f a line to the begi nni ng o f the next or author

can

”

STA GE S IN THE M AKIN G OF A BOOK ’

Dele , or delete : take it o ut

i P ut i pace s n Cl® e up—no space

vers ed

—turn

BadV Spac g i spacéi no re evenly ‘ A Wrong f ont : character of wrong s

tyle

siz e or

T rans p®e

ake a new paragraph ndent ; or , put in an em .

EC arry to the left

Ca rry

the right

quad space

Efevate

Ipfperfect

—orre t c

\ \

ent Straighten alignm “

words crossed out Print (ﬁ ii etc ) as a ligature Words are omitted from, or inJ Opy E Query to author : Is this correct" R estore

Put in Put in

M AR K S

PR OOFREAD ER S

Letter

Put in

—

LOWER GAGE

Put in ro man Put in E Put i n b o ld

type type face type .

A M AN UAL F OR

1 80

WR ITER S

that o n e o r m ore word s sh all be tr ansposed f rom o n e po sition in the senten ce to ano th er su ch letter syll able wo r d or word s sho uld be in closed in a rin g an d a line sho uld then b e drawn f rom the ring to the position to which the transposition should be mad e In case a corre ction or chan ge cann ot be design ate d d escribe d with certainty or clearness by any o f the above— m arks o r signs it is b etter to write a brie f directio n to the “ T ranspos e thi s printer o n the margin o f the pro o f : “ Insert par agr aph to the point mark ed A o n gall ey new matter here 2 A lter ation s —It should be b o rne in mi nd th at af t er matter has b een put in type all changes f rom the “ original copy are charged fo r as alterations T he n e ces s ity f or many changes o f th i s so rt may be avoid ed if the author will exer cise a li ttle car e to de cid e in advance what he wishes d o ne an d will mark his copy accordingly Lack o f sufﬁ cient thought at the right tim e i s responsible f or many later changes which would b e avoid e d by a care ful wri ter an d which pr o ve h i ghly expensive A n ad dition al re ason f or care an d d ecision at the right time—m or e potent than that o f expense—is that eleventh hour additions or ch anges are Of ten mad e in su ch a mann er as to be out o f harmony with the context or in c onsistent in matters o f style with the rest o f the wo rk an d when too late arise to plagu e the author the publi sher the proof re ad er an d the r eading publi c A goo d exhortation with which to en d this se ction is : Do not let your manuscript go to the printer until you ,

”

STAGE S IN T HE M AKIN G OF A B OO K

181

h ave wri tten every word just as you wish it in type an d until matters o f capitaliz ation punctu ation paragraph in g etc have been brought into consistency an d uni f ormi ty throughout An d set your face stead fastly against changes in the proof which are not essential to c orre ctness o f st atement or to consistency o f style â&#x20AC;&#x201D; C o r rec t i o n s i n ro f Ii the proo f read er sees o 3 p occasion to question the accuracy o f a statement or suspe cts an error on the part o f the author whi ch it is not his province to correc t or change he will mark a query 3) on the margin o f the li ne in question A uthors too o f ten igno re these queries T hey are meant in good faith to call attention to the wor d or passage indicated an d should be replie d to by the â&#x20AC;&#x153; if no author on the galley proo f being marke d O K or corre cted if an y corre ction is change is d esire d nee ded Do not write a message o n the subje ct but simply your d e cision A ll the proofre ad er wishes to know is whether the word or passage is correct or whether a change is de sired M arks or queries made by the proo f re ad er should never m erely be er ase d by the author If for an y re ason the author does not agre e with the mark he should draw If a li ne through i t substituting his own mark f or it su ch queries or marks are erased the proo f re ad er is likely to repe at them at a later stage or even to make a co rrec tion on his o wn responsibili ty whi ch m ay not be d esired T his can be obviated if the author will pay attention to all su ch ma rks as they are en countere d on the galley pro ofs ,

â&#x20AC;?

A M AN UAL F OR

WR IT E R S

rre ctions made in the margin for pr inters are tr aine d to re gar d su ch a mark as in dicatin g th at the matter so in cl o se d is not to be set up T he galley proof s bearin g the author s changes an d alter atio ns are then returne d to the printer along with the original manuscript an d the type is corre c te d in accor dan ce with these n ew marks If f or an y r easo n the author wishes to see another galley proo f he sho uld “ indorse the ﬁrst set : Send revise — I llust r t i on s A t the time o f returni ng the galley a 4 proof s all proo f s o f illustrations shoul d also be r eturned with their appro priat e legend s written below an d e ach one nu mber ed its appro ximate position in the text b ein g “ marke d in the margin of the galley proof thus : Insert “ c ut N o I here Cuts o r charts whi ch run in with the text i e whi ch do not o ccupy a full page cannot always be placed exac tly wher e in d icat ed since th ere may not be room betw een th at point an d the f oot o f the Some latitud e an d discretion must there f ore page always b e allowed to the printer—in thi s case the “ make up man A failure to indicate as he i s calle d the approximate position on the galley proo f however will o f ten result in an expensive reh and ling o f the paged matter if the position accorde d the cut by the make up man turns out to be un desir able ; an d an author will “ frequently save a charge for alterations by f ollowin g the f oregoing direc tions car efully “ Full page illustrations are known either as text Do not dr aw

a line around

’

”

STAGES IN THE M AKIN G OF “

B OOK

1 83

T ext figures are those illus or as inserts which are printed on the same paper as is the te xt matter (see chap viii p 1 5 2 ) an d these may or may not carry a running he ad an d f olio although the page is o f course counted in the sequen ce just as ifit bore a f olio Inserts are those illustr ations which d o not per mi t o f being printed on the paper used fo r the rest o f the book or whi ch bein g too large f or a page the siz e o f the book require folding T hey are not counted in the page numbering F or text— figures the di rec tions on the galley proo f s should be the s ame as for ordinary figures or cuts : “ Insert ou t N o 1 0 here F or inserts the dire ctions are better given when the page pro o fs are returne d an d they should be indorse d o n “ the proof of the insert itself thus : T o face page F or full details regarding the various kind s o f illus tratio n s see pp 1 6 8— 75 — R n i n un h When the book reaches the stage e a d s 5 g where it is ready to be made up into pages the first step ne cessary is to d etermine the form of what is known as “ the running head s T hese are the li nes which run at “ the to p of the page an d carry the folio or page number at their outer e dge R unn ing he ad s usu ally consist o f the main title o f the work on the le f t han d page (verso) and of the ti tle o f the chapter or o ther subdivi sion on the right (re cto ) This pr actice may o f course be varied to su it difleren t circumstan ces T he preparation o f the runn in g head s is o f ten un d er ”

ﬁgures tratiO nS

”

A M AN UAL F OR

1 84

WR IT ER S

taken by the pub lisher without co nsultatio n wi th the But if for an y reaso n the author wishes to author a n d thi s esp ecially in re re own runn n he s a d i h i a s ( p p g techn ical wo rk is o f ten highly d esirable) previous co n It is o f s ultatio n wi th the publishe r wil l be n ecess ary c ours e axio matic th at only a giv en num ber o f letters an d spaces can be put into a line o f a given length T he questio ns o f what siz e or kind o f type is appropriate to be use d fo r runni ng head s an d o f the maximum nu mber o f letters an d spaces available in each case are f or the Havin g thi s in form ation the autho r publi sher to settle f requ ently ﬁnd s that he is called on to m ake use o f co n s iderable ingenui ty to r ed u ce the l angu age o fa l o ng ti tle to a satis factory par aphrase within the typographical limi ts o f the Space at hi s disposal T hus if su ch a title “ as : Stage Decoration an d the U nity o f Place in F r an ce in the Seventeenth C entury were encountered an d a maximum o f 4 6 letters an d spaces were avail able f or the runn ing h ead it would b e ne cessary to re d u ce the “ matter to : Seventeenth Century St age D ecor ation in F rance thus expressing the s alient points o f the title in a f ew wor d s T o o o f ten this work is not in telli gently o r eﬂectively done an d enough is not expr esse d in the runni ng— he ad to give a clear idea o f the subject tre ate d 6 Drop f o lio —T here is of co urs e the altern ative o f having no runnin g head at all In this case the f olio or page n umber is usually placed at the f oot o f the page in “ the center o f the li n e an d is th en termed d rop f olio .

”

STA GE S IN T HE M AKIN G OF A BOOK

1 85

o f the drop foli o is sometimes varied ; it may be place d at the extrem e right or le f t o f the line bein g then usually pre cede d or followe d by a single bracket thus : 9 6] if at the le f t ; [ 9 7 if at the right — P f s r a e o o All preli mi nary questions having 7 g p “ been settle d the type is next made up in to pages “ an d a page proof is sent to the author accompanied by the marke d galley proof s A t this stage it is danger ous an d expensive to make an y further ch anges or additions T he addi tion or d eletion of a Single line may mean that every f ollowing page may h ave to be made over to the en d of the chapter since every page must be o f exactly the same length as every other page On the other hand the page proo fs should be re ad care fully by the author to see (I ) that the appropriate running head s an d f olios are in position (2 ) th at no li nes are tr ansposed or omitte d espe cially at the to p or at the foot o f pages 3) that f ootnotes are in place on their appropriate pages (4) that alterations in dicated on galley proof s have been corre ctly mad e (5 ) that letters or punctu ation marks have not been d roppe d f rom the end s o f lines Ifno revise d page proo f s are desire d this is ord in arily the last the author see s o f hi s work be f ore it i s printe d “ “ He marks the page proo f s O K or O K with co r re ctions o r O K with alterations as the case may be an d returns them along wi th the galley proofs to the printer 8 In dex —M e anwhi le the author should be preparin g the in dex (see chap viii p F or thi s purpose two The position

”

A M AN UAL F OR

1 86

WR IT E R S

or more sets o f page proo f s are usu ally sent one o f which is to be retained f or in d ex makin g the other bein g returned as above dire cted All m arks corrections or changes mad e on the set returne d to the printer should be mad e also on the set retained f or ind ex making T he in dex should not be m ad e until all ch anges in the pages “ necessi tating a making over have actually been mad e an d aproof showing the changes is in the author s hand s — B n i n di If the author has s een that each page is 9 g properly numbere d in the proofs that all ill ustrati ons are in place or if inserts that the page e ach is to face has been duly indicate d hi s labors are en de d The respo n sib ili ty o f seein g that the page s are printe d in their right sequen ce an d that th ey an d the illustrations are duly bound in their proper o r d er rests on the printer an d the binder Be fore binding actu ally t akes place it is so metimes the custom to show the author an unboun d set o f the sheets “ f olded and placed in their sequen ce with the inserts in their places so th at the bin der m ay be s ure he has made no mi stake in their relative posi tions but except in rare cas es thi s is unne cessary “ “ Publication an d copyrighting (see chap xii pp 2 0 5 10) will follow an d the completed book is then “ on the market -

’

”

C HA PTER

T YPOGRAPHICAL PRACTIC E S AN D TER M S

M ost of the te chnical terms employed by printers which it concerns the author to kn ow are enumerated “ in the chapter Hints on the Preparation o f M anu ” script for the Printer (see p A few d etails remain to be m entioned , a kn owledge o f which is not essential but m ay on o ccasion prove useful “ ” — 1 S iz e o f type s T ype is measure d by points the diff erent siz es o f type containi ng a certain num ber o f “ ” “ ” A poin t is points in their vertical m e asurem ent .

one seventy se con d o f an inch an d type is spoken o f as being I o poin t or 1 2 poin t type me anin g 1 2/7 2 o f an inch in siz e T hi s measurem ent does not apply to “ the face i e to that part o f the type f orming the letter or c haracter whi ch appe ars on the printed page “ but to the bo dy or entire pie ce o f metal or wood on which the face o f the type (the letter or charac ter) is cut “ It o f ten h appens that a 1 2 point face is smaller than “ but in that case the b ase has what is a I o point f ace should er representing the measurem ent by calle d a which the siz e is d esignated The b asis o f type m e asurem ent is the siz e f ormerly T his is atype whose vertical m easure known as pica ment is 1 2 points ; an d for purposes o f m easurement a It is of an in ch in length or pica is 1 2 points squ are -

”

187

A M AN UAL F OR

1 88

WRITER S

bre ad th The length o f a type— line is express ed in T hus on the b asis o f 7 2 po ints to picas by a printer the inch as above stated an d a pica being 1 2 points 0 1 % o f an inch a type line o f 3 in ches in length is spo k en o f by a printer as being 1 8 picas T he len gth o f the “ line is called the measur e by the printe r an d the “ T he m easure is 1 8 picas means the type phr ase : line is 3 in ches in length T hi s who le subje ct is o f interest to the author only in en abling him to sele ct the type f or hi s text matter or to d etermi ne how much matter in a given Siz e o f type will go in a given space B o th o f these subjects are better re f erred to the publi sher who in addition to f urni shi ng an estimate o f space more accurate th an the author hi m self can make will giv e intelli gent advice as to the siz e o f type best adapte d to the boo k in question “ Be f ore the ad option o f the point system the diff er ent siz es o f type were kn o wn by nam es arbitrarily appli e d an d printers still occasion ally use som e o f th ese term s when speaki ng o f the more commonly use d siz es o f type Fo llowing are illustrations o f the var ious siz es o f type in ordinary use in book work with their respec tive new an d o ld names : .

”

S p o in t ty p e . -

y v t typ v ry

PEAR L , meas ures ap p ro xi mately 14 lin es to the inc h

6 po int t pe, o r NONPAR EIL, o f the pica in ertical meas uremen t -

7 po in -

It is

no t

lin es to the inch

It is

ju t s

o ne

hal

M IN ION meas ures appro ximately co mmo n use

e, o r

meas ure s

lines to the inch

8 po in t t pe , o r BR E IER , meas ures 9 lin es to the in ch It is a fa o rite t pe , an d is in mo re co mmo n u s e than an y o f the s maller s iz es -

T YPOGRA PHIC AL PRACTICES AN D TER M S

189

9 po in t type, o r BOU R GEOIS, measures 8 li nes to the inch The name is pro no un ced as if spelled bo orj oy ce -

t type o r LON G PRIM ER me asure s appro xi mately 7 lines to the inch It is a favo rite siz e fo r bo oks in to which it is d esired to co mpress as m uch matter as po s sible within a limited space I o - po in

oint type or SM ALL PI C A measures appro xi mately 6% lines to the inch It is a siz e very frequently use d in book work 1 I-p

in ch

w ork

po in t type, o r PICA, meas ur es 6 lin es to the It is the lar ges t s iz e co mmo n ly used in bo o k

es o f type in most common use in books are 9 point 1 0 point 1 1 point or 1 2 point f or the text ; 6 poin t 7 point or 8 poin t f or f ootn otes ; 8 point 9 po int “ ” or 10 point for poe try or reduced matter (see p an d 6 point 7 point or 8 point f or the in d ex —Table I (p 1 9 0) states the 2 T ype meas urement approxim ate average num ber of word s o f lead ed matter to the average type page in a book whose siz e is known the average siz e o f whose as o ct avo (8 vo ; see p type page is 4% by 7 in ches T able II (p 1 9 1 ) shows the average number o f wor ds to thesquare in ch of type and is useful in d ecidi ng on the siz e of the type page an d the siz e o f type in whi ch to set a man uscript the number o f word s in which is known The siz

A M AN UAL F OR

190

WRITER S

By a resort to either o f these t ables an d by ob serving the f ollowing d et ails an autho r may f orm an id ea o f the nu mber o f pages his book will make in an y given siz e A llowing 2 pages for the half ti tle (see p 1 5 2 ) Of typ e (the revers e Sid e b eing blank) 1 page f or the title page 2 pages f or the d e dication if 1 f or the copyright page an y (the reverse being blank ) 2 (o r a multiple o f two) f or the pre face 2 (or a multiple o f two) for the table o f ,

TABLE I

Siz e o fT pe

ll l ﬁ r L re t Page

il gfgh l :

l Wig t: f

ﬁg fd{l

Lin e

Page

6 po in t

572

480

1 ,0 2 0

648

4 20 3 60

ontents all of whi ch are termed preliminary matter the text may be estimated on the basis of the tables given above but it must be borne in mi n d that the ﬁrst page in each chapter is shorter than the stan dar d page “ since there is wh at is term ed a s ink or blank space F or each chapter— endin g half above e ach chapter title a page should be added as a m e asure o f s af ety Sin ce a If hal f titles (see p I 5 2 ) ch apter rar ely end s a f ull page c

”

TYPOGR APHICAL PR ACT ICES AN D TER M S

19 1

T ABLE II

ER o r

WORDS

THE

SQUARE IN CH

TYPE

T YPE , SOLID'

SQ UARE IN CHES 8 Pt -

I o -Pt

32 1 88

1 28

282

19 2

376 470 5 64 6 58

256

3 20 3 84

75 2 84 6

$12 576

I I - Pt

1 26

10 2 136

1 70

25 2

168

29 4

19 6

27 2

224

3 78 4 20 46 2 50

25 2

3 40 37 40 44 2 47 6

54 5 88

63 0 67 2 71 75

T YPE LE Ao En WITH

112 1 40

210

89 6

7 04 7 68 83 2

SIZE S

1 2 - Pt

5 10 5 44 578 61 2

2 80

33 6 3 64 39 9 420 47 6

5 04

PT LEAE S' .

SQUAR E IN CHES G Pt -

7 Pt -

2 00

13 6

108

3 0°

204

9 00

I IIIIII I

3 6 g4

1 68

112

270

21 0

1 4°

1 10

40 8 47 6

3 24

25 2

1 68

3 78

29 4

5 44

43 2

336 3 78 4 20

19 6

132

61 2

816 8 84

5 4° 5 04

o f the terms

so lid

2 80

3 36 3 64 39 2

42 0

67 2 7 14 7 56

”

and

“

leads , ”

s ee

3 54 17

25 2

$ 04 5 46 5 88

70 2 756 810

“

2 24

462

9 18 972

Fo r the meaning

2 16

9 53

1 26

7 84 O

1 2 -Pt.

1 62

20 '

1 1 -Pt.

£33 O O

1 00

9 Pt 21

l 2

27 2

8 Pt

476 5 04

2 20

24 2

333 3 30 35 2 3 74 396

M AN UAL F OR

19 2

WRITER S

used in the bo dy of the book 2 additional pages f or e ach must be counte d To this tot al must o f course be adde d the illustr ations counted as full or frac tional pages as the case may be The cost o f composition calculated by the page varies in inverse ratio to the siz e o f the type used bu t thi s is o f co urse largely be cause o f the f act th at the smaller the type the more there is o f printe d matter on the page — h i m i M onotype composition is ne o o t i on M a c s c 3 p that whi ch is done on the m onotype machin e nam e d Lan s to n af ter the patentee —a co mposin g machi ne on which by tou chin g a keyb o ar d per forations are m ad e in strips o f paper whi ch the n are tr an s fe rre d to a se cond machine where the matrices to which the per for ations corr e spon d are brou ght in co nt act with molten type met al the type char acters b eing cast separ ately an d “ justiﬁed lines arr anged automatically on a galley in T he advantage o f this machi ne lies in the fac t th at a c orre c tio n can be mad e by c han ging a single letter or word inste ad o f resettin g an entire line as is ne ce ssary “ on the linotype where the line is in a sin gle slug or s o lid pie ce o f met al Lino type co mpositio n is that which is d one on n ame d M ergen thaler af ter its the lin o typ e machin e — inven tor—a co mposing machin e on whi ch by tou chin g a keybo ar d the matrices f rom which the ch ar ac te rs are c ast arr an ge the mselves auto matically in a line in a re ceptacle whi ch is then brou ght in contact on the s ame machin e with molten type met al from which are

—

”

T YPOG R APHICAL PRACTICES AN D TE R M S

19 3

the entire line is then cast in one pie ce or strip termed “ a S lu g T he advantage o f thi s m achine consists in the “ fac t th at the pro cess o f setting an d castin g is conﬁn e d to one o peration on the s ame machin e Co mposition is there fore spee dier than o n the monotype whi ch requires two machines T he disad vant ages may be s aid to be that the s ingle slu g which constitutes the line is liable to co ol unevenly with the result th at so me o f the letters in the line m ay be higher than others T hi s results in the ir presenting a blacker appe aran ce on the printe d page with a co nsequent irregular effect whic h mars the gener al results Or if the matrice s be come “ worn in dividu al letters appe ar out o f alignment th at is above or b elow the level o f the others A nother dis adv ant age lies in the fac t th at in or der to correc t an error the entire slu g has to be reset with the consequent poss ibility o f a new mist ake bein g made again ne cessi tating a resettin g o f the line In most of ﬁ ces all the co mposition on a book will be done on one or the other o f the machines n ame d above e xcept the co mposition o f the h alf ti tle an d the title “ If the use o f some f an cy or job type is desired page f or chapter titles or subhead s an additional expense is in curre d sin ce these have to b e set by h an d an d co n s titute an Oper ation distin c t f ro m the contin uous work o f the operator o f the machine — P l t s Books are prin ted either directly from a e 4 “ T hes e are repro du ctions the type or fro m plates o f the type page in o n e solid sheet o f metal an d are ,

”

A M AN UAL F OR

1 94

WR IT ER S

“

”

kno wn either as ele c tro type s o r as stereotypes Stereotypes are made by po ur in g molten type me t al “ into a mol d cont ainin g the matrix or reverse impres sion o f the type page which re sults in a repro du c tion “ o f the type face o f the page T he matr ix c onsists o f several layers o f thi ck paper presse d to gether an d so f tene d by ste am an d then applie d und er gre at pres “ sure to the typ e matter to be plate d Of co urse the impression o n the matrix is the reverse o f the f ace o f the type but when in turn metal is poure d over the m atrix the r e sult is the reverse o f the matr ix the type f ace repro d uced The ordin ary stereotype will impressions wi thout we ar to pri nt f ro m in g out Sever al plates can o f course be made f ro m the same matr ix E le ctrotypes are produ ce d by depositing by electro ly s is a thin copper shell u pon a wax matr ix o f the type T his Shell is then backe d up with lead to the page requ ired he ight f or printi n g T he copper coverin g o n the face o f the plate add s to its d urabili ty an d hard ness an d consequently to the nu mber o f impressions that can be t aken from it be fore it wears out—usually many m ore than f rom the type metal cast in the type setting machines The ordinary electrotype can be use d impressio ns be f ore we arin g out for more than In addition to the gre ater nu mber o f impressions which can be t aken f ro m the m the chie f advant age o f ele c tro types over stereotypes lies in the f act o f the ir gre ater strength If af ter they have been made an y corree ”

”

TYPO GRA PHI C AL

PR A C T I C E S AN D

TE R M S

19 5

ti ons are f oun d to b e d esir able the p l a tes ca n be c ut a nd c orre c ti ons ca n be sold ere d i n wi thout in m ost ca ses imp airin g the stren g th o f the p la tes C orre e ti ons o f th is so rt so metim es exten d to the substi tuti on o f sever al lin es o f new ma tter whi le they ma y on the o th er h a n d equ all y well be c onfin e d to s in gle word s T hi s p ro c ee di n g is som ewh a t c ostly o r even letters however sin c e in addi ti on to the c ost o f ele c trotypin g the new ma terial an i tem o f fif tee n c ents fo r e ac h c ut i n the p l a te i s the usu a l char ge mad e T he gen er al ad vantage o f p l a tes li es in the fac t th a t it is che ap er be ca use o f the c o mpar a tively s mall c ost o f the m et al use d to store them for future imp ressions an d e di tions of the work th an i t is to store a ll the m et a l which is cont aine d in the origina l typ e C o mpa r a tively f ew books a re now p rinted f rom the type p l a tes being usu all y mad e first A f t er the pl a tes are ca st the m eta l i n the typ e is then m elte d and i s used afresh f or c om p osi ti on on the t yp e settin g machi ne (see p “ — The wor d form as used by p rinters 5 F o rms i s appli e d to the eight six teen or thi rty two pages which a re printed a t one imp ressi on One pag e of typ e if “ locked up a lone f or pr intin g— s uch a s a letter head “ — is a lso sp oken o f as a f orm B oo k f orm s o r ca r d a re alway s mad e up o f a mul tip le o f f our B ooks are “ “ “ “ known as foli o qu a rto o c t avo d uo decim o “ “ “ ré mo et c T hese term s rz mo or 3 2 mo origin a te d i n the fac t tha t when bo oks were fi rst p rin ted the siz e o f pap er used w a s almost o n the h an d p res s ,

—

”

A M AN UAL FO R W RITE R S

19 6

i nvaria bly 2 0 X 2 4 in ches These ter m s then h ad a n “ exac t significanc e a foli o m e anin g a book the s iz e o f whose pag e was the s iz e o f the sheet (2 0 X 2 4 in ) f old ed on c e t hus maki ng the f old e d sheet c onsi st o f two “ le aves o r four pages I n li ke m anner a qu a rto resulte d from folding the shee t tw ic e p ro du ci ng f our le aves or eight pages A third f ol d p ro du c e d a sheet o f “ — F eigh t le aves or six t een pages an o c t a vo — an d s o on “ A book spoken o f a s an oc t avo h ad theref ore a re cogniz ed siz e o f 6 X 1 0 i n ches N ow aday s however wi th the g re a t va ri ety o f p resses i n use a n d the equ a lly gre a t vari ety of siz e in sheets o f pap er these term s h a ve li t t le m e ani ng beyond exp ressin g t he app ro xim a te siz e o f the book The f ollowi ng rep resen t the app roxima te dim ensions o f books und er thi s sy stem o f no m en c l a ture : 3 2 m o 4 X 5 % in ches ; I 8 mo 4% X 6 % i n ches ; 1 6 m o 4% X c rown 8 vo ; X 7 i i n c hes ; 7 % i n ches ; I em o 5 % i n ches ; 8 vo 6 X 9 in ches ; roy a l 8 vo 6% X 9 % in ches ; S p e cia l siz es 4 to I O X 1 2 i n ches ; f oli o 1 3 X I 5 i n ches — such a s small 4 to squ a re 8vo squ a re I om o et c are m o difica tions of the siz es n am ed a bove The figures here gi ven re f er in all ca ses to the e x tern a l m e a sure m ents o f the cover The typ e— page is o f c ourse c onsid er ably sma ller 6 Err ata—Af ter a book i s p l a te d or p rinte d i t som etim es h app ens th a t errors a re f oun d to exi st in the tex t etc I f i t is imp oss i ble or und esir able to c orre c t the p l a tes thi s si tu a tion i s m et by p rinting the li st o f errors on a separ a te sheet—p refer a bly a full pag e siz e .

”

TYPO GRAPHI C AL

PRA C T I C E S AN D

T E RM S

“

a nd i nsertin g i t between the p relimi n a ry ma tter (s ee p 1 5 2 ) an d the ﬁrs t page of the te x t The page “ shoul d be he ad e d E rr a t a and e ach error di sc overe d wi th its app rop ria te c orre c ti on should be i ndica ted i n a sep a r a te li ne thus : “ “ Page 8 1 line three : fo r j udgemen t read judgment “ Page 9 4 line s even : fo r s eems read s eemed Page 9 9 Table III third co lumn fo urt h line fro m bo tto m : ”

”

rea d

for

— m tt i r O rdin ary re adin g d a e 7 “ ma tter is le ade d i e between e ach two lin es of typ e “ i s inserte d a thi n m etal strip usu ally 2 p oints (see “ p 1 8 7 S iz es of Typ es ) i n thi ckness La rge t yp e usu ally any siz e l arger th a n 1 2 p oint typ e—nee d s thicker le ad s ; very small typ e i e f rom 6 poi nt d own may t ake thi nner le ad s usu ally 1 p oi nt in thickness When “ di re c ti ons a re given to a p ri nter to i nser t le ad s he w ill wi thout further i nstru c tions und erst an d 2 p oint le ad s to be m e ant I f i t is d esi red to d etermi ne whether a given typ e page i s le ad e d or not sele c t a c oup le o f lines where the t ai l of a p or a g i n the upp er li ne m eets the he ad or upp er p orti on o f an h o r a n I in the line below I f no app re cia ble whi te spac e remains between “ the t yp e is solid i e wi thout le ad s (The ma tter on th i s page is le ad ed ) “ Thi s word solid is f requently use d by the unin “ run i n in to one itiated i n p l ac e o f the di re c ti on to pa r ag raph ma tter whi ch has been wri tten i n sepa r a t e pa r ag raphs a n d mi sund erst an din gs o f ten result fro m Lead ed

an d

sol

”

A M AN UAL FO R W RI TE R S

198

thi s mi st aken us e o f the term S olid never m e ans any thing but the a bsenc e of le ad s between the lin es Ta bles a re e xp ensi ve to set 8 T ab ular m atter — up in an y event but they are frequently mad e m ore exp ensive th an i s ne c ess ary through the w a n t of f ore t hought o r through ignor an c e on the part o f t he author A t able should a lway s be so c ompi le d a s to fi t t he type page of t he book I f it i s not conveni ent to set i t across “ t he page i t can be set bro ad sid e th a t is w i th the page turned s o tha t t he lon g sid es of the page a re mad e the head and foot resp e c ti vely of the t a ble I f a s fre quently h app ens a t able i s to o l arge to p ermi t o f bein g set u p t o fi t the page in ei ther o f these two w ay s i t is “ ne c ess ary to m ake of i t an in sert th a t is i t is set u p and p rinte d on a l arger sheet an d when the book is “ boun d the insert i s tipp ed in i e fa stene d in between the book pages an d f old e d to fi t the siz e of the book N o t only is thi s awkw ard ne c essi t a tin g un f oldin g before t he t able can be examined but it is exp ensi ve A li ttle care i n c ompi li ng the t able wi ll o f ten result in m a terially re du cing its siz e—ei ther b y con densin g an d c omb in ing sever al c olumn s or if ne cess ary mak ing two or m ore sepa ra te t ables out o f the m a teria l T he p ro cess of d etermini ng the s iz e of typ e i n wh ic h a t a ble should be s et to make i t fi t the pag e in ei ther “ n o f t he man ers d es cribe d i s term e d ca stin g u p from the fac t th a t c onsid er able ca lcul a ti on is nee d e d to a llow “ for the rules le ad s c olumns of figures a n d the ne cess ary spac e on e ac h sid e “

”

TYPO GRAPHI CAL

PR A C T I C E S AN D

TE RMS

A t a ble should h a ve a main he ad c ons istin g ,

199

its

num ber b y wh ic h it i s know n an d ref erre d to in the tex t : TABLE IX followe d by a subhead c onsi stin g of a bri ef exp lan a tion of the p urp ose o f the t able (af ter T he he ading s o f the the or d er o f a ch ap ter ti tle) “ c olum ns in the t a ble a re kn own a s box he ad s whi le the lef t h an d or first c olu mn up on whi c h the re main der o f the t a ble is usu a lly d ep en dent is known as the stub In the ca se o f f ootnotes to t ables i t is better to us e r a ther th an num er als as re f eren c e sym bols I figures (see p S in c e the t a ble i tself usu ally consi sts l a rgely of figures a referen c e figure even when “ sup eri or p l ac ed a bove the line) tend s to co n fusi on which the use o f s ymbols w ill a void ,

”

C HAPTE R X II

MI S C ELLAN EO US IN FO RM AT IO N

a publi s her —An author who h a s to seek a publi sher for hi s work shoul d end e a vor to ex er ci se som e di s crimi n a ti on a nd j udgm ent in the sele c ti on o f t he ho use to which he submi t s his c opy A religi ous work should not be submi tte d to a house w hose m ain business T hi s apparently obvi ous is the p ublica ti on o f novels fac t would if observed i n p r ac tic e s a ve a goo d d e a l o f di s app oi ntment I nd ee d m any rep ut a ble p ubli shers d e cli ne p erfe c tly meri tori ous books be cause no t available f or t heir sp e cial l ine of business I n other word s a ﬁrm engage d in publi shing ed u ca ti on a l works woul d a lm os t certa inly d ecline a novel a lthough i n the h an d s o f som e other p ubli sher the book might sell through sever a l edi tions an d p rove highly su ccessful T he m anus crip t should be acco mpani e d by a let t er containin g a con ci se st a tem en t o f t he s co p e of the w ork t he n a ture o f the p resent a ti on an d the c on c lusi ons re ache d Authors shoul d bewa re o f i n corp or a ting i n su ch letter an y a rgument i n favor of the acce p t anc e o f the work The publi shing house wi ll d e cid e f or i tsel f as to the meri ts of the m a teria l 2 Publication —An au t hor e i ther may p ub li sh a book hi m sel f or arra nge wi th a publi sher to d o so The advant age o f the l a tter c ourse li es in the fac t th a t 1

S ee ki ng

2 00

MI S C ELLAN EO US IN FO R M ATI ON

20 1

“

”

boo k w ill bea r on i ts ti tle page the imp rin t o f the publi shin g firm which a t on c e ten d s to give i t a stand in g an d fur ther in the fac t tha t the exp eri en c e and faci li ti es o f a publi shi n g firm insure m ore or les s o f a m arket f or the book a result whic h the au thor b y hi s f orts can obt ain onl y a t gre a t exp ense T he o wn ef arr angem ents op en to an author f or who m a book is p ubli s he d by a firm o f publi shers are v a rious : (1 ) the publi sher buy s the manus crip t outright f rom the author pay s a ll exp enses o f p ublica ti on an d takes a ll the p ro fits ; (2 ) the author pay s all exp ens e o f p rin tin g adverti sin g et c i n which ca se the publi sher accounts to him f or all c opi es sol d retai nin g a c ommi ssion on the p ro c ee d s of s ales ; (3) the e xp ense is divid e d between the author an d the publi sher to the ex tent o f the author payi ng a ll the cost o f p rintin g bin ding etc but ret aining the copyright in hi s o wn n am e and re c eiving a royalty f or hi s c opy right an d a f ur ther roy a lty f or the use o f hi s p lates (see p of whi ch he ret ains the ownership ; (4) the publis her pay s all exp enses takin g the copy right in hi s own n am e and paying a roy alty on e ach copy sol d The am ount of the roya lty va ri es gre a tly o f c ou rse the char ac ter o f the work the rep u tatio n o f the a u thor a n d va ri ous other c onsid er a ti ons enteri ng i nto the question I t is usu a lly on a p er c ent age b a si s however an d thi s may be ca lcul a te d o n the ” “ li st p ric e o r retai l p ric e o r on the gross o r the net re c eip ts from the s ales E ach ca se d ep end s on i ts own ci rcu m stanc es The roy alty p lan in o n e o r other of i ts the

A M AN UAL FO R W RIT E R S

20 2

f orm s is p erh ap s the m ost usu al a n d i s gener ally the m ost s a ti sfac tory to both pa rti es A ny or a ll of the d et ai ls m enti oned may o f c ourse be var i e d by c ontr ac t an d no a ttemp t is mad e here to give m ore th an a m ere outline of the a rr angem ents which an author m ay m ake in any gi ven ca se Wh a tever t he b a si s o f the c ontr ac t between the author and publi sher i t is a wi se p lan to obtai n f rom the â&#x20AC;&#x153; publi sher an es t ima t e o f the number of pag es whic h the book wi ll m ake Thi s wi ll serve a s a conveni ent che ck on the publi sher ; on the other h and it ten d s to give the author a cle arer i d e a o f the typ og r ap hica l tre a t F requently it i s desi r able th a t m ent th a t is p ro p ose d s pe cim en pages be set u p i n or der to settle di fďŹ cult questions o f arr an gem en t o r minor questi ons o f the ch a r ac ter o f ty p e to be use d T he author wi ll then cle a rly un d erstan d the siz es o f typ e p lanne d f or t he vari ous pa rts o f t he work and a t thi s st age he wi ll be f ree to exp ress hi s p ref erenc es thus avoidin g di s app oi nt m ent o r exp ensi ve c h an g es when the work i s set u p T he rights of tr ansl a ti on an d d r ama tiza tion a re of c ourse a subj ec t f or agreem ent between author a nd publi sher I n the a bsen c e o f an y agreem ent to the c ontr ary the l aw vests t hese rights i n the owner of the c opyright (see pp 2 0 5 O ne of the d et ai ls of p ublica ti on is the p repa ra ti on be a ring the n am e o f a ci r cul a r d es c r ip t i ve o f t he book of the publi sher o f the book and sen t o ut by him to the tr ad e a nd to individu a ls A g re a t d e a l d ep en d s on the ,

â&#x20AC;?

MI S C ELLAN EO US IN FO R M AT ION

20 3

careful p repa r a ti on o f su c h a ci r cul ar I t must avo id m ere bom b a stic p r ai se o f the book I t must app e a l to the p rosp e c tive re ad er o f the book by p oin tin g ou t the f e a tures whic h should c o mm en d the work to the re ad er ; a nd when i t c overs a subj e c t or field on whi c h other books h a ve a lre ady been wri tten i t should bri efly show the rela ti on whic h the work be a rs to those a lre ady on the ma rket and to the subj e c t in genera l Whi le the author may not p ossess the te chnical kn ack of wordi n g s uch a ci r c ul a r i n i ts fini she d f orm it is o f ten o f very gre a t ad vant ag e th a t he furni sh hi s pub li sher to bo il d own rem o d el an d otherwi se adap t to p r ac tica l use the ma teria l o f which p resuma bly the author h a s a better knowle dge th an the p ubli sher The ex tent to which an d the manner in which the book sh a ll be ad verti se d i s of course the subj e c t of a rr angem ent An imm ense v ari ety o f pap er is a vai l a ble 3 P aper f or bookmak in g When an unusually fin e or exp ensi ve pap er is d esir able i t is best to c onsult the p rinti ng house or publi sher I n ca ses i n whic h the a uthor pa y s fo r a c ert ai n nu m ber o f c o pies o f his book a s p e cimen o f the pap er agree d u p on shoul d be a tt ac he d to the c ontr ac t t o a void mi sun d erst an din g O ne thi ng t o be borne in min d by the author i s th a t when hi s book in clu d es i llustr a ti ons o f any c h ar ac ter other th an zin c et chi ngs (line d r awin gs) the y cannot be p ri nted on a rough surfac e and if the te x t— ma tter o f the book is to be p rinte d on rou gh sto ck i llustra ti ons “ w ill be inserts (see pp 1 5 2 1 8 2 .

”

A M AN UAL FO R WR ITE R S

204

—Avai lable

b indin gs are of an infini te va ri ety and a re best sele c ted i n consultati on w i th the p ri nting or publi shin g house A book m ay be boun d in (1 ) pap er of an y thi ckness u p to car d bo a r d ; (2 ) pap er bo a rd s— usu ally str awbo ard s wi th a pap er c overin g pa sted on such a s is f req uently used f or s choolbooks ; (3) bu ck r am a co arse c otton or li nen s tifiened wi th g lue ; cloth of whi ch there is a wid e v ari et y of qu ali ti es ; (5) ro an mad e f rom sheep skin ; (6) calf the cus to mary b in di n g f or l aw book s ; (7) russia a s m oo th o d orous calf le a ther c onsid ere d p roo f against mold and inse c ts ; (8) m oro cc o mad e f rom go a tskin ; (9 ) pa r ch m ent ; (1 0) vellum The ch ar ac ter of the b in din g the c olor o f i t the style o f typ e used on the c over shoul d a ll be t aken in to acc ount an d shoul d be a r som e rel a ti on to the charac ter o f the book A work on buria l c ustom s f or inst an c e woul d be i n app rop ria tely bound in a bright re d The author shoul d i n every ca se avai l hi m self of the advi c e which exp eri en c e an d un d erst an din g o f the condi ti ons en able the p ublis her to gi ve Poor j udgm ent on the xp eri en c ed author wi ll som et im es be f oun d p art o f a n ine to be a subtle cause for a book s l ack o f su cc ess A book shoul d never be hurri e d through the bin d ery an d no e ag erness on the pa rt o f the author to s ee hi s fini shed work shoul d be a llowe d to interf ere wi th the “ rip eni ng of the b in ding p ro c ess I f a book is rushe d “ n through the b in di g st age i t c om es out green i e li kely to w arp an d fad e in a short tim e A f ew day s o f 4 Bin din g .

‘

”

’

”

MI S C ELLANEO US IN FO RM AT ION

20 5

ex tr a t im e a llowe d to the bin d er will add mu c h to the lif e an d app e ar a nc e o f the book “ T he te rm b ackbone is appli e d to the b ack of the book i e th a t part which i s e xp ose d when the book stan d s on the shelf The b ac kbone usu ally be ars the ti tle f ollowed by the author s n am e an d a t the foot the n am e o f t he p ubli sher O r in the ca se o f a thin book nothi n g may be p rinte d o n the b ackbone and the ti tle wi th the author s n am e below i t may be p rinte d on the c over O n bin ding s o f the gr ad e o f cloth an d up w ard the stampin g or printing i s usu ally d one with letters cu t in bra ss an d he a ted a t the t im e the stamp ing is d one O r din a ry t yp e would give w ay un d er the pressure ne cess ary — m t i W h t a b e c r h e d The followin g li st a o 5 y py g s p e ciﬁes the cl a sses o f works capable o f be in g co py righte d and in dica tes the bl ank f orm ne cess a ry in e ach case T hese f orm s can be obt ai ne d on applica ti on to the R egi ster of C opyrights Wa shi ng ton D C .

”

’

)

prin t ed fro m ty p e o r fro m plat es made in the Uni ted S tates fro m ty p e s et within the limit s o f the Unit ed S t ates : (a) written by a citizen o r res id ent o f the Uni t ed S t at es (Fo rm A ) ; (b) writt en by a citizen o f a fo reign co un try but prin t ed in the Uni t ed S tat es (Fo rm A Fo reign ) ; (c) a new edi t io n o f a b o o k by a cit iz en o r res iden t o f the Uni t ed S t at es (Fo rm “ N ew (d) the American editio n o f a bo o k in the Eng lis h language o n which ad in terim co py right has previo us ly b een s ecured (Fo rm A“) by a fo reign autho r in a fo reign lan guage (Fo rm A3) ; published ab ro ad in the E nglis h lan guage (ad interim co py right ) (Fo rm A4)

B o o ks

A M AN UAL FO R W RIT E R S

206

gle co n tribu t io n s to newspap ers o r j o urnals o n e co mple t e issue o f s uch p erio dical (Fo rm (Fo rm AS) ; (c) several (future) issues und er o ne co py right (Fo rm B ) Oral works : lectures sermo ns o r addres s es (Fo rm C ) Dramas : (a) publis hed dramatical co mp o s it io n s (Fo rm D ) (c) pub (b) un publis hed dramatical co mpo s itio n s (Fo rm lis hed dramatico mus ical co mp o s it io n s (Fo rm D ) M ns ic: (a) publis hed mus ical co mp o s it io ns (F o rm (b) unpublis hed mus ical co mpo s it io ns (Fo rm E ) M aps : published maps (Fo rm F) Works of art: (a) pain t ings drawin gs s culp ture mo dels o r d es igns fo r a wo rk o f art (Fo rm G ) ; (b) repro ductio ns o f wo rks o f art n o t a litho graph o r pho to engraving (Fo rm H) Drawin g o r plas tic wo rk: o f a t echnical charact er as dis tin guished fro m a wo rk o f art (Fo rm I) Pho tographs : (a) published fo r s ale (Fo rm (b) no t to b e published (Fo rm J ) P rin ts or pi ctori al illus trati on s : prin t ed p ictures co mplete in themselves an d having artis tic quality (Fo rm K)

b) Peri odicals :

(a)

s in

) d) 6

)

Ari

exi s t i ng c opy right may be renewe d f or a term of 2 8 y e a rs on w orks origin a lly entere d fo r c o p y rig ht si n c e an d a n exi stin g r enew a l ter m July 1 1 88 1 (F orm of 1 4 y e a rs may be ex ten d ed to 2 8 y e ars on works alre ady renewe d und er the ol d l aw sin c e July 1 1 8 9 5 (F or m 6 H o w copyright is o btai n e d — Appl ica ti on is made to the R egi ster o f C opy rights C opy right Ofﬁ c e of the Li bra ry o f C on gress Wa shi n g ton D C settin g f orth : (1 ) the da te ; (2 ) the n ame an d add ress of the c lai man t wi th the lega l n am e an d resid en c e o f the p erson or c om pany i n whose n am e the regi str a ti on i s t o be mad e (no p seu d onym o r ﬁc ti ti ous n am e may be gi ven) ; (3) the ,

M ISCELLAN B O US

IN FO RM AT ION

20 7

n am e o f the author or authors ; (4) the ti tle o f the book ; 5 ) the nu mber o f volu mes (if the work c onsi sts of m ore th an o n e an d if m ore th an one is d ep osi te d a t the s am e tim e) ; (6) the ac tu a l da te o f p ublicati on—the da te the book is p l ac e d o n s ale sol d or public ly di s i ce add ress o f the tri bute d ; (7 ) the n am e and p ost o fl p erson to whom the c ertifica te o f c opyright is to b e mai le d (8) A se par a te app lica ti on an d a separ a te f ee of o n e d oll a r must be sent f or every work f or which c opy right re gi str a ti on is d esi re d but sever a l volu m es o f one work may be entered und er one app lica ti on and one f ee (9 ) E ach app lica ti on must b e acc ompani e d by an affi davi t ex e cuted b y the p erson c laimin g c opy right o r “ by hi s d uly authoriz e d ag ent or by the printer who h a s p ri nte d the work sta ti ng tha t the t yp e settin g print ing an d bi nding h ave been done wi thi n the Uni te d S t a tes (1 0 ) T wo c opi es of the best e di tion of the work a re sent wi th the app lica ti on an d are d ep osi te d in the c op yright offic e of the Li bra ry of C ongress T he fore goin g regul a ti ons app ly to all works which may b e c opy righted (s ee “ a bove se c which a re p ubli shed f or s a le In ca se c opyright is d esired o n ma tter not publi she d f or s a le an app lica ti on is mad e acc ompani e d by a f ee of one d oll ar an d by : a) I n the ca se o f le c tures or other or a l add resses one comp lete o r of d r ama tic or m usica l c o mp os i ti ons manus crip t or typ ewri tten c opy of the w ork b) I n the ca se o f p hoto gr ap hs not i nten d e d f or gener al ci r cul a ti on one photogr ap hic p rint ,

—

”

A M AN UAL FOR W RITE R S

20 8

) In t he ca se of works of art (paint ing s d r awin g s sc ulp ture) or of d r awin gs or p l a stic works o f a s ci entiﬁc or te chnical ch ar ac ter one photograp h or other id en ti fyin g re p ro d u c tion o f the work There a re 2 3 different form s o f app lica tion for c op y right and it would be a n undue en c ro ac hm ent on space to rep ro du c e t hem here T he app rop ria te bl ank may b e obtaine d b y app lica tion to t he R e gi ster o f C o py rights Wa shi ng ton D C I n t he se c ti on a bove on “ the d esign a ti on Wha t M ay B e C opy righte d (s ec o f the p ro p er f o rm is gi ven i n pa rentheses f ollowi n g the enum era tion R eferenc e t o thi s li st will en able the re ad er to make a request for the app ropria te bl ank — f i r i t D u a o c h r on o g A co py right c overs a 7 py t p erio d o f 2 8 y e a rs and ma y be renewe d fo r a further p erio d o f 2 8 y e a rs (see p 8 Dramatization an d tran s lati on T he e xc lusive right o f d rama tiz a ti on and tr ansl a t ion o f an y c opy “ righte d m a tter is by law veste d in the authors a nd their a ssigns (see p — t i l In rn a on o t e a c h t F ore ign authors may r i 9 py g obt ain c o pyright i n the Un i te d S ta tes on the s ame term s as n a tive authors e xc e p t th a t t he fee is d oub le d p rovided th a t the author i s a ci tiz en or sub j e c t o f a n a tion whic h p ermi ts to ci tizens o f the Uni te d S t a tes c o pyr ight p rivi le ges o n subs t antially the s am e term s a s t hose p res c ribe d i n the Uni te d S t a tes I n ca ses o f doubt app lica tio n fo r in format ion shoul d b e made to the R e gi s t er o f C o py rights c

”

MI S C ELLANEO US IN FORMAT ION N o ti ce

2 09

—O

ever y c o p yrighte d work a notic e must app e a r statin g the fac t o f co py right a n d gi vin g the da te (ye ar) an d the n am e o f the pro T he l aw requ ires th a t in ca se prieto r o f the c o p y right o fbooks thi s not ic e s h a ll be e i ther o n the t i tle page o r o n the b ac k o f the ti tle page (see ch ap viii p In the ca se o f map s p hoto grap hs works o f art pic tor ial “ i llustr a ti ons et c thi s must app e a r o n some access i ble p ortion the margin b ack p ermanent b as e or p e dest a l o r the subst a n c e on whic h su c h c o pi es sh all b e m ounte d 11 The question o f wh a t What i s infringemen t — c onsti tutes i nfrin ge m ent in a ny given ca se i s usu ally one fo r the c ourts to d e cid e the intent the e x tent a n d the “ questi on o f inj ury o r damage bein g elem ents o f the “ ques ti on A ny m ere c olor able alter a ti on o f the c opyrighte d ma tter will not serve to avoid liab i l i ty for in fri ngem ent T he l anguage o f pa rt o f the c opy righ t l aw on thi s subj e c t makes o f any o f the followi ng an ac t o f i n f rin gem ent : in the ca se o f a book : p ri nti n g p ub lishin g d rama tizin g tr ansl a tin g importin g or e xp os in g for s ale ; i n the ca se o fmap s ch a rts d rama tic or musica l c omp osi tions p rints c uts engr avin gs p hoto graphs c hrom os and works o f a r t : engr avin g etchi ng worki ng c opyin g p rintin g p ubli shi ng d r ama tizi ng tr ansl a ting imp orti n g or e xp osi ng for s ale E xp resse d i n un techn i cal l an gu age in fri ngem ent may b e des cribe d a s c opyi ng i n whole or i n par t the c op yrighte d work o f a nother wi th intent to evad e the l a w And thi s applies not 10

co pyright

”

A M AN UAL FO R WRIT E R S

2 10

only to the comp lete work but to any part o f it—j ust ho w l a rge o r ho w sm a ll a p orti on h a s never y et been d efined wi th any s a ti s fac tory exac tness There fore not even a p oem from a copyrighte d book o f poetry may be p ri nte d wi thout the lic ense of the c o pyright owner ; a nd thi s i s t rue o f a ny thin g other than the bri e fest quota tion I t ca n there fore be rega r de d as the well settled rule tha t if a ny c onsiderable pa ss age o f a c op yrighte d work is to b e m ade us e o f i n a n ew w ork the c onsent o f the own er o f the c o py right m ust fi rst be obtaine d in every ca se The p enalties for i nfringe ment are numerous and va ry wi th the char ac ter o f the work inf rin ge d u pon an d the n a ture and ex tent o f the i nfringement E num era ti on o f t hem ca n h a r d ly b e c onsid ere d as o f m u c h m om ent i n a work o f thi s ch a rac ter F o r sp ecific informa tion t he re ader is re ferre d to the R evi sed S t a tutes of the Un i te d S ta tes (C opy right Law o f ,

IN DEX

f n

pag

are to

ere ces

va i u w d a d ph a t at d un d Pit fall in Di ti n (pp 44 6 5 ) a t li t d in th Ind x T h w d th m lv a a an g d alphab ti ally a d a y w d d i d may b f un d by a f n t th li t m xp d iti u l y than b y th un d ab o ut m th d f a f n t th Ind x ﬁ t T he

ro s

s e

”

“

and

or s

re ere ce

mp nd f (n g ativ p ti l Wi th 8 3 Abb viati n diﬁ tiat d f m t a ti n 7 5 ; in lit a y f n 7 8 ; f bo k f f a ad mi d 76; th Bi bl a d t Ap ypha 7 7 ; f C mpany B th a d a d — f f l t ical valu 7 8 79 ; 76; f nam f f m f add 7 6; tat a d Unit d Stat p in f Sai t f titl fh n 76 ; 75 ; p t 7 6 ; f titl f publi a a d ti n i n f th Bi bl 7 7 ; fv ; f w ig ht a d m a u 7 8 ; ul es f Ab t a t id a apitalized wh n 89 A ad mic d g abb viati n f 76; apit alizat i n f 8 8 A nt tenti n f in f ign w d in p at d i nt Eng l i h 4 A tiv ptivity 8 A t ju idi al apitalizati n f 9 6 dd f m f t b p ll d ut wh n 7 3 7 6 ; t b abb viat d wh n in di t t b apitaliz d 7 6 ; titl 88 ; nv l p 34 44 E Addr titl f p in ipal w d in t b apitali d 9 8 Adj tiv apitalizati n f in titles f publi ati n 9 8 ; mp und 8 ; p p mi i n f apit alizati n f 87 ; mma b tw n m ; ad v b bling 3 8 ; with pulativ v b 3 6 A dmini trativ b di apitalizati n f nam f 9 A dv bial clau h w pun tuat d Adv b apitalizati n i in titl f nding ly t ub li ati n 9 8; p a yph at d Wi th adj tiv t pl 8 ; n gativ mb ing 38 ; pa at d by mma adj tiv 3 8; wh n 8 ; with pulativ v b 3 6 ’

r c

n “

res

e rece r

c s,

ress :

z e

e c

es :

es o

ses ,

er s :

er s

1 10

rese .

es ,

er s ,

er,

ss o

es ,

1 10

“

es ,

or s

e e

e c

ic1

esses ,

or s

es , 1

e o

rec

on e

o r,

o re

s , re

res ,

e s

s o

e rees :

co r o r

ers o

o sses s o

es o

e s, c

”

s r c

cce

s , 102

“

es ,

”

ress

ers ,

e ec r

oc r

“

”

co n

re ere ces ,

ees ,

er r

eren

“

rese

er s ,

“

ho w diﬁ erentiated, 7 2 ou ar c e) , co

”

an ,

r s es

es re

“

or s

”

o re e

wh n u d a ligatu 7 A ft lau mma u d b f 8 Ag his t ri al lin gui ti g l i al api t alizat i n f 9 5 ; t b p ll ut 74 Ag m nt f ubj t a d p di at 7 3 Alg b aic na titi l tt d ignating t b i d 7 Allian p liti al apitalizati n f n am f 9 3 A lt ati n d fin d 8 ; t b av id d u 8 a dan g M t ug b m lau mma us ed b f g Am ba ad f m in l tt t 45 A mbiguity in th infi itiv 3 4 ; da g f in mp un d nt n f 4 ; p n un 7 Anal gy u f 4 An d wh n abb viat d 7 6 ; mmau d b f wh n 7 8 Ant mpo und with 83 Anti mp un d with 83 A ntith ti al lau int du d by t A poc ypha lk t fabb viati n f 7 7 Ap t ph ul f u f 7 3 4 t f m plu al f num al t 4; f mp iv 7 ; t in di at mis i n f l tt figu of 3; u in nt a ti n 7 5 A pp iti nal lau h w pun tuated A h bi h p f m in l tt t 48 A h d a n f m in l tt t 48 A ti l d finite f m f’ wh n t t tc b u d b f t t b t ated a pa t f ti tl e 7 6; f m f f p ri dical 9 8 ; in d fi n t b f h l ng u u n e ad a, a, “

2 13

”

s es , co

es :

re,

ree 0

e o re , 10

es ,

eo o

e s

e e

e r

eiz e

ces ,

es o

ers

ero

s, 1

1 0

s es , co

e o re,

o r, :

r c

res

o r,

2, 1 1

e o

se o

ers o r

s es ,

e co

e o re

o ne,

”

c e:

e o re

s e,

o ss ess

s o

o s ro

1 10

n er

e ces ,

o, 1

1 10

e o re ,

se o

s, 2

o, 1

7 2 ; us e

s, o

i e “

o f the , 2 9

”

A M AN UAL FOR WR IT E R S

2 14

A ti l apitalizati n in ti tl f 9 8 A ti lati n inn A ti ti h l n am r

c es

es o

r cu

r s

p in ipal w d r

or s

”

" “

”

er,

“

pitaliz d

es o f, ca

c sc o o s ,

As ”

“

s es , co

”

1 00

co o

”

i Ciz

o r, 1 2

“

e o re

e o re , 1 0

s ro

“

re e

re s

e o re ,

o n

ers o

o r,

es o

es ,

s ce

o r,

e c

e, c

ee s

e o re,

1 00

er o c

oc r

”

r eo s ,

or c

es , r

cer

ce:

es o

o o

o r,

1 00

r c es :

ses , 1 2 0 ro

“

“ “

e, 1 1

er,

”

rs ,

ren

121

se o

”

se o

e ces ,

o s, 1

re c

”

es o

e o re , 1 0

er o

s es , co

”

s , ca

lau mma u d b f 8 A f ll w impli d by a l n wh n 4 A t n mical t m apital izati n f ta l mg ul f ; 7 Ba k b n d fi n d 5 ; h w tamp d 5 B a ta d titl S Half titl B C hun d d t b ( b f p at d with 9 mma u d b f B ginning in mp iti n 7 Bi mp u d with 83 Bibl bo k f abb viati n f 7 7 ; apital izati n f nam f 89 ; ti tl f b k f t b apit aliz d 8 9 ; v i n f abb viati n f 7 7 ; t b apitaliz d 9 Bi bli al b k abb eviati ns f 7 7 ; b k n am f apital izati n f 8 9 ; pa abl nam f api talizati n f 9 ; mi llan u t m api tal izati n f i 9 Bill l gi lativ apitalizati n f 9 6 Bindin g f ld d h t h wn auth 86 ; bf ugg ti n n ning f 4 ; va i t i 4 Bi l gi al t m apital izati n f ; ital iz d wh n 7 Bi h p f m in l tt t 48 Bla k fa h w in di at d 5 8 ; wh n u d 58 B k f Ap ypha abb viati n f f Bi bl abb viat i n f 77 ; 77; titl ul f apitalizati n f 9 8 B tanical t m apitalizati n f ; itali w d wh n 7 B u g i d fin d 88 B a k t di t ui h d f m p— a th ul u f ; ; with d p f li 4s B ak in nt n u f da h t indi at 7 B vi d fin d 88 B ad id d fin d 9 8 B th mp und with 8 B the a pa t f fi m nam h w t at d 7 6 “

pitalizati n f nam f 9 5 lau mma u d b f 8 But By mp un d with1 8 Cabin t m mb f f m in l tt t 45 Capitalizati n d fin d 86 ; f adj tiv d ignati g g g aphi al a d n un gi n 9 4 ; f adj tiv n un a d p n u u d t d ignat th Sup m B ing a y m m b f th T inity 87 ; f a t n mi al n am f ; b k f th Bi bl a d th a d b k 89 ; f hu h wh n 9 ; f pith t u d a ub titut f p p nam af fi x d t a nam 87 ; f , ivil a d milita y titl 88 ; f fath a d f m wh n 9 ; f fi t w d aft a l n wh n 97 ; f fi t w d f ll wing Wh a a d R lv d 9 7 ; i fi t w d in ti n fa num ati n 9 7 ; f fi t w d fa it d p h 9 6; f i t m f mi g pa t f g g ap i al nam f g n i t m f p li ti al 9 3; d vi i n 9 f g g a hi al d ig na ti n a d nam 9 4 ; mi llan u t m 9 ; f nam a d pith t f p pl a a d t i b 88 ; f n am f th Bi bl a d th a d b k 89 ; f n am f b ib li al pa abl 9 ; f nam f ivi h liday a l ia ti al fa t a d f a t day f 95; nam f nv nti n ng a d xp iti n d ad f n am f 9 ; n f i n f faith 9 ; f nam f p h 9 5 ; f n am f imp tant v nt 9 5 ; f nam f l gi lativ j udi i a y a d admini t ativ b d i f nam d ad f m n a ti 9 ; th i m m b 9 ; f n am f phil phi al lit a y a d a ti ti h l a d th i ad h nt 9 ; f nam f t f n am p liti al allian f 3; p liti al pa ti 9 ; nam f r li t 9 ; f g u d n minati n nam f p i in b tani al t g l gical fil gi al a d pal t l gi al matt f n am f ; th ug hfa pa k q ua bl k buil di g t 9 5 ; f n am f t ati a t l aw b ill t 9 6 ; f N atu a d ab t a t i a wh n p nifi d 89 ; f n am f ll w d by a num al f num b d liti al divi i n 9 9 6; f O a d p 9 6; f d a d ignatin g i n f C ng nam f gim nt Egyptian dyn a ti t f ganizati n a d in tituti n 9 ; f pa ti l in F n h G man 9 ; a d Dut h n am 88 ; f p in ipal B uilding

“

eec

es , r ces ,

c es

e e

, er

ers ,

er r

e o

o ro

n s, e c

c sc

oo s ,

s ec s ,

res , “

oc s ,

es .

erso

s o

or in

s ess o

ress ,

s o

c es

es , e c

re c

es ,

”

eo n o

es o

es ,

o r ers

e c

ere

”

e s,

“

s r c

r s,

s r

e c

10 0

res ,

es o

er,

cree s

ec es ,

z o

resses .

ec o

ere

r es ,

c s,

ces , e c

eo o

e r

cre

es o

er s

e s

es ,

s ce

es s o

es o

sec

ener c

“

”

ers

es ,

’

e er c

s o

ere s

cre

‘

es ,

“

co o

”

ers

re o r

”

100

es ,

er o

es ,

e s

s ro

s, ,

INDEX w rd in English titl f ubliceti f pro per n un a adj ctiv es 9 8; 87 ; f ferenoep t parts o f a s peci fi w k 9 6 ; o f ti tle f a ci nt manu pt f ho nor a d o f t i tl f pect o f v rs i n a d editi n th B i bl f ules fo r 86 ; ea n 9 ; ul f 8 7 100 Capi tal ho w in dicat d 5 reductio n f t l we case h w t d 58 ; ul f us e f 8 7 Caps S Capitals C a dinal f ms in l tter t 4 7 Ca d u o f 13 S al Ind x Ca f p nouns 2 7 Centigrad abbreviati n f 7 8 C ntu i num bers f t be s pell d ut 74 Chapt titles o f: pri cipal wo rd in t b apit alized 9 8 ; t be put in 5 q u tat i n m ark Ch mi al symbo ls h w t at d C h i tia n ames t b p ll d out 73 Chu h when capitalize d 9 Chu h fathers wh apitalis ed 9 C i ula preparati n f descriptiv f b k t be capitaliz d Ci l a d military titl gé Clau lative exc iv u e o f 29 mpo unds wi th 83 C Co ll tiv n uns 3 6 Co l aft salute ph a at beginning wh n s; fl tt 3 8 ; betw plac f publi ati n a d publis h nam 5 ; af t r s alutat y phra e f a pa at two clau e s peak 5 : to th wi e in d p nd nt whi h are in a nten epa at a sing l 4; t g ammatically ompl te fro m lau it illu t ation o amplifi atio n 94 ; al tat men t li t t int duce a f m ext a t 4 ; d fin i ti n q uo tat n u d f u 104 ; a d i llu t atio n b tw n hapte a d v in set: tu al n pla d utsi e f 1 r f 5 ; f llo wed b y q u tation mar s fo llo w cap tal wh n 9 7 t imply a ; 1 4: to fo in ta im 1 4; t imply am 4 C mma d fini tion a d illu tratio ns f mitt d b tw n tw adj u 7; ti va wh n 1 1 ; mi tt d after sig na alutat ry ph tu ft 3 ; us ed a ra in ocial l tters 1 3 ; u d after di git in d ating thous an wh 3 ; o m tt d o

o r,

r s,

o, 1

o r,

“

e s

e e

ses , re

r se

een

ers

er, 1 0

r c

s r

s e,

e rs e

e ere ces ,

‘

“

se r

nce,

”

er s

re, 1 1

een

n o

: 12;

ti e pages ,

res

“

o re

n ce,

c ”

on,

een co

een

and ear, 1 3 se n ren ca l , adver ial, o r apposi ti o ns l clauses , us ed to s et o ﬁ direct uo ta ti o ns and axims , 1 1 2 ; used etween claus es endi ng in prepos i ti o ns , In ; used to mdicate an o missio n, I ra; used to separate identical or similar wo rds , n o ; us ed to separate two num used to separate pro per ers , r rr; nouns r rr ; rules fo r use o f, ray r3 ; o tatx on ma r s , : 13 ; placed mai de used with a da when, n o Co n mercial rms , ho w to treat names o f, °

b m

ﬁ

Compan , when to be a reviated, 7 6 Co mparatives , 3 0 clauses , use o f das h es Complementar with, : 1 8 Co mpo nent elements , o miss io n o f. in co mpo und wo rds , 8 4 ” Co mpo sitio n , de n ed, Co mpositio n , details of, s o ” Composito r, deﬁned, : 5 1 name s , h ow Co m o und : ad ectives , in exe d, r64 6 5 ; sen tences , dangers o i , gr ; su j ects , 3 0 S ee als o o mpo un d u

ﬁ

mg Co mpo unding : .

ﬁ

de n ed. So ; general rules fo r, 80- 8 lis t o f unclassi ed wo rds e s, rac tio nal nu oi 85 ; of r ti o n , n o j ective no uns co mb ined in a 80 ; o f two o r mo re no uns co m ined in e o re a pro per an ad ecti al sense o f two o r mo re wo rds no un po m ecedmg a bined into o ne ad ecti e no un, of ari o us wo r s, pre xe etc , 8 1- 8 5 ; o f er a l no uns en di ng in ing" united with a prepo s i tio n , s r ; co mpo nen t element common to two o r

ﬁ

b m b b v bf j v g ﬁ v v b

se ,

n o

een

“

s r

s s,

s e,

ce,

e se

e e

er s

e, 1 0

’

on :

es s

es ,

“

202 .

o title.

en c

10 1 - 2

”

s, 1 1

ers , e

r es ,

betw adj tival ; u d b etw parti ipial f in ; us d bef w th ide or p iti mitt d betw nsecu m th 3 ; u d b tw theti 3 u d betwee pa

c nnecti o n

s e, o

1oo

mi tted

;

phrases , phrases ,

1 09

s o

: 07 ;

members when

o f two

sen es .o i three o r mo re mem ers , when used , 1 07 ; used’ efo re 108 ; used e ore co un ctio ns , when “ ’‘ 1 08 , 1 09 ; o i tted efo re rather,

res

scri

serie s iinn a a

o ns ,

es o

2 15

en , 1 1

C f i n f faith apitalizati n f nam f 9 f n am C ngr apitalizati n f h u f 9 ; f sio f 9 ; nam t api tali ed wh n 8 9 f m me s f o

on ess o s es o

ess : o ses o e

ses

o ns o ‘

M AN UAL F OR

2 16

Co ngres sman , o rms in letter to , 1 4 6 Co ngresses , names o f, to b e capitaliz ed, o r Co n unctio ns : 40 ; us e o f co m a with,

1 3 0 , 13 7 ;

: 09

—

Co nsi s tenc o f s t le , r5 6 5 7 Co ns ul, orms in letter to , 1 4 7 Co ntents ta le o f, pos itio n o f, rss ; what it sho uld co ntam, 1 5 3 ; when prepared ,

f m by a

Co ntractio ns : diﬁeren tiated iaticus , s ; no t o llo wed

use 0 apos tro phe in , 7 5

75 ;

v v

entio ns , n ames o f,

Co n Co n

ers atio n :

v v b v b y ﬁ

c apita liz ed ,

Co rrelati es , 4o Creeds . capitaliz atio n o fnames o f 9 1 .

See Illus tratio ns Cuts “ ” Cz ar, when capitaliz ed, 88 .

c apitaliz

ni tio n

and illus tratio n o f use o f, use o f, at end o f wo rd o r phras e implied e o re each o f succeeding para us ed fo r emphas is , r1 8 ; gra wit references o llo wing uo tatio n , use o f with o ther n o; , punctuatio n , ra o; preceding a s ummari z ing clause , : 18 ; rea , s to p , o r used to deno te transiti o n rr7 us ed afte r sideheads , “ ” : 1 8 ; us e in p a c e o f to , co nn ecting two wo rds o r num ers , : 1 9

b k

Date: hundreds

when 1 1 9 ; o f o llo win g o lume num ers ,

repeated ,

o ut,

Deco ratio n s , capitaliz atio n o fnames o f, 88 Dedicatio n, o f oo , po s itio n o f, 1 5 3 De n itio n o ftechnical terms , rs r, r 5 7

b k

capitali

o f,

mic : abbreviatio n

zatig n

7 6;

“

Demi co mpo un ds with, 83 Den o mination s , religio us , capitaliz atio n o f n ames o f, 9 0 D epartmen ts , go ernmental, capit ti o n o f n ames o f, 9 2 Deri ati es : rules fo r spelling , 66 6 8 ; .

v v

ﬁc

mes

En glis h, o f scien ti iz ed , 1 0 0

7 no t capi ta l

Details

o f co

mpo sitio n ,

20.

De elo pment, co nditio ns o fintellectual, 8 Diagrams letters re erring to , italiciz ed

1 27 .

Dictio n :

pit alls in , 44 65 S ee Ligature

22;

Digraphs Do cto r o fDivin i t , Do cumen ts , titles .

ms in letter to ,

o f:

atio n o f italiciz ed,

ﬁ

capitali z

pri nci pal wo rds in , 9 8 ; to be i 2s Do u le n egati es , 3 8 Dramatiz atio n , rig hts o f, 2 0 2 , 2 08 .

b k

Dro p olio , ” de n ed, : 84 ; us e o f rac et Wi th, 1 84 r amo (duo decimo ) de ned : , 9 5 ; no t to be treated as a re iatio n , ro r Dl tch n ames capitaliz ing o f “ Van ’ in , -

bb v ,

pu licatio ns ,

ﬁ

Deal er ” co mp o un ds with, 8 2 Dean , o rms in letter to , 1 48 Decad es , re erences to , to b e spelled

“

pu li cati ons,

r1 3

when to be capitaliz ed , 88

1 64 ;

Das h: de

to b e o mitted in letter use o f co mma to sepa rate

7 4,

preparati o n o f, etc Co py right: co ndi tio ns of, 2 0 7 ; duratio n 0f 2 08 ; dramatiz ati o n rig hts , 20 8 ; ho w and where o rms necess ar 20 6 ; ro cured , 20 o w o tain ed, 2 0 6 2 0 9 ; in tern atio n al, 2 0 8 ; ringemen t o no tice o f, where to appear, 1 5 3 , 2 0 9 ; ren ewa l o f, 206 ; trans latio n rights , 2 0 8 ; what may be co p ri ghted, 20 5 , 20 7 ; when to ta e place, : 8 6

o f,

mitted with

Daug hter, ” co mpo unds with, 8 1 ‘1 De ” : rules fo r treatment o f, in indexing ,

tio n

Degres

ers us

Danish titles

ne er

ﬁ

training,

abbre

Co pula: the, 3 5 ; predicate with the 3 6 Co pulati e er s : ad ec ti es with, 3 6 ad er s with, 3 6 " " Co p : de ned , : 5 1 ; co rrectio ns no t to be trans erred to , in pro o reading 1 7 8 ; to be written o n o ne s ide o f s heet o n l 1 59 S ee also M anus cript, hin ts o n the

th,

Co nnectio ns , etween paragraphs , 2 0 Co nnecti e particles , us e o f co mma wi th,

rd, nd ,

writing , 1 30 ; time di is i o n s ,

16r;

1 08 , 1 0 9

WR ITER S

és

ﬁ

na s ties ,

mes o f

Eg p tian, 92

capita liz

letter to ,

Eccles ias tical ins ti tutio n, head in

atio n

o f,

Educ atio nal ins titutio ns and o rganiz a ti ons , cap i taliz ati o n o f names o f, o r 8 po int t pe, illus tratio n o f, 1 8 8 _

E lec t, ”

mpo unds with, 8 2

Electrical alues , o f. 7 8 7 9 -

s tandard

bb eviati

o ns

IN DEX

Electro t pes : ad antage descri ed , n um er o f i 1 9 4; pressi o ns ro m, 1 9 4 ; patchi ng and cutting fo r alteratio ns in 5

Fath

t pe , illus tratio n o f, 1 89

capitaliz ed ,

rules Ellips is : in s peech and writing, fo r use o f, 1 2 2 ; to be treate as part of quo tatio n , : 2 2 ; use o f, to in di cate

mis sio n , 1 2 2 Emo tio nal li e, 1 1 Emphasis : in the o

res

in the paragraph, 2 1 : use o f das hfo r, : 1 7 ; us e o f exclamatio n po in t f o r , 1 03 ; us e o f italic fo r, : 2 3 ; us e o f lac k ace fo r, 1 58 s entﬁ i ce ,

;

— f

End , the, in co mpo s itio n , 1 9 nglis h: e ui alen t o f o rei g n wo rd o r hras e to be no ted , r1 5 ; ti tles o f pub icatio ns to e c apitali z ed , 9 8 ; to be italiciz ed, 1 2 5 En umeratio ns , to be s pelled o ut, when, 7 3 mes , to en us ed as pro per n a pithets , wh be capi taliz ed, 8 7 , 88 po chs , his to rical, linguis tic, literar , and geo lo gi cal, to b e capi tali z ed , 9 5 E uipment, intellectual, 7 Errata: fo r an d read to be italiciz ed in lis t o f, 1 2 6 , 1 7 ; ho w in di cated, 1 9 6 ; rules 9 fo r prepari n g lis t o f, r9 7 Ess a s , titles o f: principal wo rds in , to be capi taliz e d, 9 8 ; to be i taliciz e d, 1 2 5 Es timate, o f pages in a o o k , 2 0 2 Etc : use o f co mma e o re , 1 08 ; treated as part o f uo tati o n , when , : 1 6 “ e o re , eu o rm o f in de n ite article

”

on o

Fo r, ” when italiciz

o f, r6 1

ed, 1 2 6 , 1 9 7

in s titutio ns

o rei n

capi taliz

o rgani z

and

mes

o f na

ati o n

o f,

atio ns ,

q v

Eng lis h e ui a l ent, to be uo te u s ; lis t o f wo rds ado pted into Englis h ro m, 1 2 4 ; titles of pu li ho w capitaliz ed, 9 8 , 9 9 ; catio ns in , wo rds ro m, when italiciz ed, 1 2 3

o re gn

uages :

‘4

8‘ ‘

F F

; ho w placed o rder o f materia l in , 1 6 1 ;

60 ; 9

mple

exa

o ns

e ne

F o r ins tance,

by a

implied

co lo n ,

when ,

F m d ﬁ d 95 F mat f b k ( 4t 8v t t b t at d a ab at F t t b p ll d t 7 5 F a ti fhyph i 84 F h th pa ti l i wh a itali

I‘

”

’1

renc

r c

e s

e e

o n s , use o :

c es

i o n , ro r

reVi

impo rtant, capitaliz atio n

en c

urther

”

“

an d

tiated , 7 r

mes

1 03

with, 8 2

fa th r

er,

ho w differen

Experience as so urce o f Explan atio n ,

es ,

b ack r

materials

e ts used

1 0.

o f,

capitaliz

atio n

93, 94 o f,

Geo metri cal

matter italiciz ing in na mes with umlaut in d

r2 1

o f,

German 1 65 ; titles tio n o f, 9 9

127

pu licatio ns ,

us e o f,

ce ,

”

ﬁ

n ed , :

capi

”

en tiated ,

“

o r,

er,

”

o i,

Gerun d, the, 3 5 Gi en n ames S ec Chris tian names ” Go d, co mpo un ds with, 8 2 Go ernmen tal departments , capitaliz a tio n o f names o f, 9 2 Go erno r, o rms in letter to , : 46

Fah h it abb viati f Fa th a d fu th ren e

95,

ﬂ

o f,

fo r, when ,

Expo s itio ns , capitaliz atio n o fnames Expres sio n , 1 9

ﬁ

” Galle , de ned , 1 7 6 H General, co mpo unds Geo graphical n ames ,

G eo lo gical terrn s , capitaliz atio n mo ; i tali ciz ing o f, 1 2 7

Expleti

z ed ,

o fn a

co mpo unds

88 ; in in dexing, : 64 ; titles 0 pu lica tio ns , us e o f capitals in , 9 8 ; use o f lig atures a, (z in , 7 2

o r us e o f, 1 0 3 ; s f Exclamatio n po in t: rule uo tatio n mark s , when , placed i ns i de

on o

on, 1

to ta les ,

i on s

en ts ,

o f.

“

b bf ﬁ

ers

s r

erc

s r

n co

”

o n

in co

o ns

F optn o tes :

on o

q v

s r

oc s ,

when

with, 8 x;

Figu (illu t ati ) i t xt l tt f g t 7 S al Illu t at Fi w iti g 5 Fi m am f mm ial abb via ti f 7 6 ; apitali ati fp illu t ati f 88 s p i t typ F u i mp iti 6 7 F ld mbi ati with 8 F li d ﬁ d 9 5 ne

mpo un ds

re erri n

r r- po in t

217

ho w diﬁ er '

v v

A M AN UAL FOR

2 18

bb v bb v

Grain , a re iatio n fo r, 7 8 Grain , a re iatio n fo r, 7 8 Grammatic al no tes , 2 5 “ ” Great, co mpo un ds with, 8 1

ﬁ

Inde

e o re,

nite

article

Hair s pacing 1 5 8 ” “ co mpo unds with 8 2 Hal Hal title (s ho rt title) what it is -

152;

93 Ho lida s , capitali z atio n .

fn ames

o f,

bb v

y wh Hyph Hyph

us ed,

—

wo rds , lis t o f, 8 5 en atin g : rul es fo r, 80 8 5 ; reso rte d to , to in d icate a pre x o r s u z as a particle o r s lla le , n o t co mplete in itsel , 8 5 S ec o mpo un di n g

ﬁ

y b C

ﬁ

“

”

claus es , us e o f c o

mma with

mpo un ds with 8 3 ,

10 8

ﬁ

Imperati

the, 3 3

ﬁ

Imprint, de

ers o r s ectio n

mpo und

mes ho w

ﬁ

—

ﬁ —

n itio n o f , 1 5 2 , 1 5 3 , 20 1 .

In dus trial o rgan iz atio n s an d in s titutio n s , capitaliz ati o n o f n ames o f, 9 1 .

Inﬁn iti In

u -

fa r

ing” 80

am igui t

the, 3 3 ;

mpo un ds with 83

in , 3 5 ; when

no un s

the, 3 4

mpo und ed

In ner articulatio n ,

ﬁ

In sert, de

co p

preparati o n

Ins titutio n s , 91

n ed , 1 5 2 , 1 8 2 , 1 8 3

Ins ertio ns in on

S ee M an us crip t, hints

o f, etc

capitaliz

mes

atio n

o f na

v l pm

p age

ers , 1 5 4 ;

Illus tratio ns : character o f, depen den t o n 1 68 ; drawings an d oo k , p aper o f l s ugges pho to graphs fo r, 1 5 5 ; gen era i n serts , 1 5 2 , tio ns co ncerni ng , 1 7 4 ; o r , 1 5 5 , 1 8 2 ; le tters re 1 8 2 ; legen ds f ts o f, italiczi ed , 1 2 7 ; lis t erring to par c ed , 1 5 4 ; po s itio n o f, to b e o f, where pla “ text indicated o n pro o , 1 8 2 83 ; ” 1 5 2 , 1 69 , 1 8 2 ; ario us k in ds s u re , g ~ o f, i 68 7 s ; when to b e dec ided o n , 1 5 4 ; hal to ne : descri ed , 1 7 1 co p fo r, ho w to b e repared , 1 7 2 ; co lo red s u ects in , itho graphy : des cri ed , 1 6 9 ; pro 172; cess o f, 1 6 5 ; pho to graphs an d drawmgs fo r, r 5 ; pho to gra ure: des cri ed , 1 7 1 ; o r, ho w to b e prepared , 1 7 1 ; pho co p to litho graphy : des cri ed, n o ; co p fo r, ho w to be prepared , 1 7 o ; wax eng rav ing : des cri ed , 1 73 ; co p fo r, ho w to b e p repared , 1 7 4 ; z mc and co pper etching descri ed , 1 7 3 ; co py fo r, ho w to b e pre pared , 1 7 3 “ co mpo un ds with, 83 Im .

s ed o n

Ideas : a s tract, capitaliz e d when pers o ni re elli o n o f, 1 7 ; ﬁed , 8 s acri ce o f, 1 5 ; s e eeti o n o f, 1 5 “

“

enated

p ro no un s ,

Ho no r, titles o f capitaliz atio n o f, 88 “ Ho rs e po wer ” a re iatio n fo r 7 8 , 7 9 1 60 ; H phen : ho w indicated o n co p ,

with, 8 3

lis ted , 1 64 ; ﬁrm n ames , ho w lis ted , 1 64 ; ca rd s , use o f, 1 6 2 ; cro s s re er ences , im o t tan t, 1 63 ; dis criminatio n , mec an ical wo rk , ho w clo n e, 1 6 2 ; 1 66 ; ’ n ames b e inn ing with M , M c , M ac , St , Ste , o w li s ted , 1 6 4 ; n ames wi th p re xes , ho w lis ted , 1 6 4 ; n ames with umlaut, ho w lis ted , 1 6 5 ; page pro o s urn is hed autho r fo r mak ing o f, 1 8 5 ; k ing , 1 6 2 6 5 ; S ee and S ee rules fo r ma als o , itali ciz ed 1 2 6 ; treatment o f pre xes an d particles , with pro per n o uns , 1 63 65 In direc t ues tio n , punctuatio n o f, 4 2 , 1 03 .

where placed , 1 5 2 5 3 , 1 9 0 epo chs , ca His to rical : of pitaliz atio n n ames o f, 9 5 ; even ts , capita liz atio n o f n ames o f, 9 5 ; terms o f s pecial s igniﬁ~ c an ce ,

nu .

co mpo unds

nite

Index:

ﬁ

inde

7’

h (s o un ded ) ,

WRIT ER S

In tellectual de 8

co n ditio ns

en t,

e o

f ,

e uipmen t,

Intellectual “

In ter

co mpo un ds

In terpo latio n s , In terpretatio n s

us e

with, 83 o f rack ets fo r .

o f li e, 1 1

121

In terro gatio n po in t : placed in s ide uo ta ti o n mark s , when , 1 0 4 ; us e o f 1 0 3 ; used Wi th das h, 1 20 ,

mpo un ds with

erted o rder o f s en tence ,

In tra

In -

is e ” an d Wi th, 7 0

iz e, ” lis ts

wo rds

s pelled

Italian pu li catio ns , titles ti o n o f, 9 8

o f, capitaliz

Italic : fo r as tro no mic al n ames , 1 2 8 ; fo r letters des ign ating alg e raic uan tities , geo metrical lines , etc , 1 2 7 ; fo r letters re errin g to parts o f illus tratio n s , 1 2 7 ; fo r n ames o f gen eraand species , 1 2 7 ; fo r in itial wo rd R es olved 1 2 8 ; fo r names o f plan ets , co nstellatio ns , an d s tars , 1 2 7 ; fo r s m o ls in dicating s u divis io ns , 1 2 6 ; fo r titles o r po s itio ns after s ig natures

y b

IN DEX

fo r titles o f o o ks an d o ther wo rk s , 1 2 5 ; fo r wo rds S ee and S ee also in cro s s re erences in indexing , 1 26 ; fo r wo rds for and read in lis ts o f errata, 1 26 ; fo r wo rds an d phras es to be emphas iz ed, 1 2 3 ; fo r wo rds an d phra s es ro m o reign lan gua ges , 1 2 3 , 1 2 4, 1 2 5 ; ho w indicated 1 2 3 , 1 5 8 ; no t us ed in i lio graphical lis ts , when , 1 2 6 ; us e o f, 1 23 1 26 ;

f f bb

S ee Perio dicals

o f,

Juridical

o f n ames

bill

acts , laws ,

capitali z

“

La, ”

rules

fo r indexing ,

1‘

1 64 .

fo r ind exi ng , 1 64 “ ” Leaded matter, de n ed , 1 9 7 ” “ Leads , de ned , 1 9 7 Lectures , titles o f: capitaliz atio n o f, 9 8 ; to b e ro man uo ted , 1 1 5 ” Legend , de ned , 1 5 2 , 1 8 2 S ec als o Illus tratio n s Legislative o dies , capitaliz atio n o fnames 0f 9 2 Letters : in text o r le en ds re erring to 1 27 ; re erences i llus trati o n s , i talici e z to pa r ti cular, i ta li ciz ed, r2 7 Letter writing : classed as (1 ) pri ate o r soc ia l , (2 ) us iness , (3 ) o rmal, 1 3 0 ; c o nsecuti e pa ges to b e us ed , 1 3 0 ; date no t to b e o mitted , 1 3 0 ; gen eral rules fo r 1 2 9 ; ho w o lded , 1 3 0 ; margin no t to be written in , 1 3 0 ; o s tscripts , to b e o r, 1 2 9 - 5 0 ; to a o ided , 1 3 0 , 1 3 1 es f co n e ideas to ano ther, 1 2 9 io rms fo r n ame an d ad dress , s alutatio n , c o mplimentar clo se, and en elo pe : am as s ad o r, 1 46 ; arch is ho p, 1 48 ; 1 48 ; c a in et, arc hdeaco n , 1 48 ; isho mem er o f, 1 45 ; c ar in al i 48 ; co n gres s man , 1 46 ; c o ns ul, r4 7 ; dean 1 48 ; Do c to r o f Di i ni t , I 4O3 eccles ias tical institutio n , head o f, 1 49 ; go erno r; r46 ; udge . I 4 7 : ma o r. 1 47 ; the Le ,

rules

ﬁ

q ﬁ

’

v y

l‘

mpo un ds with 8 2

mo tio n al

Lik e , ” as

a, us e

suﬁ x,

of ,

o n, 1 9 2

o f, 1 1

bb viati

Lino t pe

mpo s mo n

Lin guis tic perio ds : a capita liz atio n o f, 9 5 co

in terpretatio n

11;

fo r,

o ns

—

102

;

19 2

;

described

Literar references z a reviatio ns in , 7 6 7 8 ; names o f perio ds and epochs , when list o f phras es and ca ita li z ed , 9 5 ab reviati o ns used i n, 1 2 5 Lit rar scho o ls , capitaliz atio n o f n ames .

g y e9

ﬁ

mpo unds with 8 2

Lig ature,

”

—

Lieuten an t

‘

13 5 .

S ee M o n o t pe Latin : 1 ature a: an d (2 , no t us ed in , 7 2 ; titles 0 pu li catio ns , capi tals i n , 9 8 Laws , uridical, capitaliz atio n o f n ames , o f, 9 6 Lans to n

Kais er when capitaliz ed 8 8 Kno wledge, special, 1 5

ﬁ

—v

atio n

v —

J udge, fo rms in letter to 1 4 7 J udiciar bo dies capitaliz atio n o f,

y y

J o urnals

Po pe, : 4 7 ; Pres ident o f the Un ited State s , 1 45 ; pries t, 1 49 : secretar o f s tate , 1 4 6 ; s enato r, 1 4 6 ; un i ers it , res iden t o f a, 1 4 7 ; icar gen eral, 1 49 us ines s letters : ho w ramed , 1 3 6 s tatio n er , 1 3 7 ; heading , 1 7 ; no ter min atio ns to dates , 1 3 7 ; a dress , 1 3 7 s alutato r phra s e, 1 3 8 ; text, 1 3 8 ; co m plimen tary clo s e, 1 3 9 ; signature, 1 4o en elo pe , 1 40 ; e xamples o f, 1 40 4 2 o rmal letters : de n ed 1 4 2 ; heading, 1 42 ; addres s , 1 42 ; s alutato r p hras e , 1 43 ; text, 1 43 ; co mplimentar clo se 1 44 ; en elo pe , 1 44 si g n ature, 1 44 ; examples o f, 1 49 5 0 pri ate o r s oc ial letters : ho w ramed 1 30 ; to be written with pen an d ink 13 1 ; heading , r3 2 ; addres s , 1 3 2 ; s alu tato ry phras e, 1 3 3 ; text, 1 3 3 ; co mpli mentar clo s e , 1 33 ; s ign ature, r3 4 s ign ature o fwo men , 1 3 4 ; en elo pe , 1 3 4 ; s tamp , ho w pla ced , 1 3 5 ; example o f,

2 19

Lo ng primer, de ned, 1 88 u Lo wer c as e, ” ho w indicated , ing and o ri gin o fwo rd, 1 5 7 U

”

mean

1 58;

v b

ly , ” ad er s po un ded , 8 1

ending

in ,

no t

to be co m

M agaz in es S ee Perio dicals " M a er " co mpo unds with 8 2 M ak e up S ee Page pro o “ M an us cript ” a re iatio n fo r 9 9 , 1 0 2 M anusc ript, hin ts o n the preparatio n o f .

bb v f bla k fa b ld fa p i t h w i di 8; h w i di at d ap 5 a d mi l at d 57; a i ma k i 6 ; y py ti t p i t w d ﬁ d 5 ; w itt di ti f 59 ; f t t ,

r n er:

c re

en , 1

1 60- 6 1 ;

co o n

e ne r

o n co ee

o ns

o o no es ,

“

co o n ,

o ns

hyphen ho w indicated ,

”

r n er,

rec

ce ,

o r,

1 6o

;

M ANUAL

2 20

—

in dex, directio ns fo r, 1 6 2 6 5 ; ins ertio n s in co p , 1 5 9 ; italic , ho w in d icated , 1 5 8 ; o rder o f material o f, 1 5 2 ; perio d, ho w uo ted matter, ho w to indicated , 1 60 ; treat, 1 5 9 ; reductio n o f capital letter to ” " r c e ho w in dicated , 1 5 8 ; w e o a s l , ho w in d icated , 1 5 7 5 8 ; s mall caps , s pecial o rms o f s pellin g , cap italiz atio n , “ ” ho w directio n is etc , 1 5 9 ; s pell o ut, “ ” what it is , an d in dicated 1 60 ; s t le, what it in o l es , 1 5 5 ; ta les , ho w to ’ ’ repare f i4 s an d n s , o r prin ter, 1 9 8 ; o w mark ed , 1 5 9 ; co p to be wri tten o n o ne s ide o f s heet o n l , 1 5 9

—

v v

y y

M an us cripts 99 “ M as ter, ”

titles

o f,

mpo un ds with, 8 2

o f,

atio n

1 63

y f

M a o r o rms in letter to , 1 4 6 “ M eas ure, ” de n ed , 1 5 1 1 8 9 9 2 M easuremen t a reviatio n o f s m ,

ﬁ bb

y b

o ls o f,

M eas ures metric ho w des ign ated 7 8 M edical terms : capitaliz atio n o f 100 ; ,

italiciz

ed , 1 2 7

y b y y

no t

ﬁ

bb v

ﬁ

o f,

19 2

y um f wh i ﬁg yp d ﬁ d 9 ; mp

M o ne M o no t

s o

ures ,

o s itio n o n ,

M o n ths

mes o f, when to be spelled o ut,

7 4~ “

M o ther co mpo unds with, 8 1 M o tto es , princ ipal wo rds in capitaliz e d , ”

“

M o un t ” to be s pelled o ut, 7 5 M o emen t, in co mpo s itio n 1 6 , 1 8 M ultiples , n um er o f, in co mpo sitio n “

N amel

N ames :

bb v

N ew T es tamen t o o k s , lis t o f a re ia tio ns fo r, 7 7 9 po in t t pe, illus trated , 1 89 N o ilit , c apitaliz atio n o f titles o f, 88 “ co mpo un ds with, 83 No n -

ﬁ

”

N o n pareil, de n ed , 1 8 8 co mma placed thetical clauses , 1 3 4

in an ti

e o re

N o tes , m etho d o f tak ing , 1 3 o uns : c ap ita liz atio n o f, in titles , 9 8 ; co llec ti e , 2 6 ; co m in atio n o f, in o h j ective relatio n to e"ach o ther , h phen in g ated , 8 0 ; in 3 5 ; to des ig n ate Supreme Being, capitaliz ed , 8 7 ; fo l lo wed n umeral , to b e capitaliz ed , 9 6 ; er al, 3 5 pro p er, to b e c apitaliz ed , 8 7 ; um ered po litical di is io ns , n ames o f, to b e c ap i tali z e d , 9 3 egin nin g a s en tence, to be N um ers : s p elled o ut, 7 ; co n s ecuti e treatmen t 3 o f, 1 1 3 , 1 1 9 ; i n co n n ected gro ups , ho w treated , 7 3 ; ro un d , treatment o f, 7 3 ; d igits repres en ting tho us an ds re uire a co mma, 1 1 3 ; us e o f das h in co nnecting c o n s ecuti e , 1 1 9 N um er o f multiples , 2 7

b b

v b

N umerals , R o man , tak e “

perio d,

10 2

“

” Oh : capitaliz atio n o f, 9 6 ; ho w di eren tiated , 7 1 ; when o llo wed co mma, when n o t, 5 8 , 7 2 , 1 0 3 , 1 1 2 8vo (o cta o ) , de ned, 1 9 5 ; no t to b e treated as a re i ati o n , 1 0 1

”

an d

ﬁ bb v

ect, s ha

Oﬁ cers , titles i ces , names Oﬂ 2

112

when c apitaliz ed , 8 8 , 89 o f, when capitaliz ed , 88 , 8 9 , o f,

b k f ﬁ gu oo

bb viati i umb f i di at d b y ap f p i d aft R ma

fo r, 7 7 res Omiss io n : o letters in wo rds , tro phe, 7 5 , 1 1 3 ; o .

Old T es tamen t

a, when used as ligature, 7 2 “ ” Of, co mma us ed e o re, when ,

a co lo n , when , 1 0 4 implied Chris tian, to be s pelled o ut, 7 3 . ”

125

do u le , 3 8 N ewspapers , titles o f: article no t to b e treated as part o f, 9 9 ; c api taliz ati o n o f pri nci p al wo rd s i n , 9 8 ; to b e i tali ciz ed , es ,

N egati

M ergen thaler S ec Lino t pe M etho d o f tak in g no tes 1 3 M etric s m o ls ho w to treat 7 8 , 1 0 1 10 2 M etric s s tem, a re iatio n s fo r 7 8 M ilitar titles capitaliz atio n o f 88 “ M inio n , ” de n ed, 1 88 M is cellaneo us terms c apital iz atio n o f 9 0 “ M lle ” ho w treated , 7 6 “ M me ” ho w treated 7 6 M o di ers po s itio n o f 4 2 M o nas tic o rders c apitaliz atio n o f n ames .

ﬁ

N ature, pers o ni ed , c apitaliz atio n o f, 8 9 “ “ “ ia il un N egative p articles “ “ co mpo un ds Wi th, 8 3 an d a im

“

—

app ied to p r ticu ar pers o ns , to be capi taliz ed , 88 ; i n dexmg o f, 1 6 3 6 5 ; pro per, to be capi taliz ed , 8 7 r,

b y

M aterials , experien ce as so urce o f 10 “ M ac ” “ M c ” rules fo r in d exin g ,

familia

c apitaliz

WR IT E R S

F OR

lis t o fa n

er o

ers ,

o ns

or o

IN DEX merals ,

in dates , 7 4 , 1 3 0 , 1 37 ; o f s u ect, 3 1 ; o f wo rd o r rack wo rds i ndicated co mma, 1 1 2 ; ets , to s uppl , 1 2 1 ; ellips is , to ind icate ,

o f s t, nd , rd , (1 ,

10 2

122

“

o rm o f in de

Once , ” 72

ﬁ

n ite

article

22 1

Parties , po litical, 0i 9 0

capitaliz

o f n ames

atio n

Paus e,

us e o fda s h to

”

Pearl,

ﬁ

in dicate,

ned , 1 88

117

Peo ples , races , an d tri es , capitaliz atio n o f n ames an d e pithets fo r 8 8

e o re

ﬁ

o rm o fin de n ite

”

One, Order:

article

e o re ,

4 1 ; o fto pics ,

erted ,

o fsen ten ce, in

(deco ratio ns ) ,

mes o f, 88 Orders , mo nas tic , na

capita liz

atio n

ho w in dicated o n co p , 1 60 ; within parenthes is , when , 1 0 2 ; o mitted a ter a re iatio ns fo r ling uis tic epo chs , etc , 1 0 2 ; a ter ini tials o f titles o f pu li catio ns , 102 ; a ter M S, 1 0 2 ; a ter rs t element in h phen ated a re i a tio n s , 7 9 ; use o f, a ter a reviatio n s , 101 ; at end o f declarati e s en tence , 1 0 2 ; placed ins ide o f uo tatio n mark s 1 0 2 ; rules f o r us e o f, 1 0 1 3

o f,

91 Ordin als , when

o f n ames

capitaliz ed , co

mpo s itio n ,

capitaliz

Organiz atio n s ,

mes

o f na

atio n

91 “ Over, ” co mpo unds with, 8 4

o f,

Page pro o -

agai n s t, autho r in

190

n arde d

ﬁ

uty

Paleo nto lo gical terms , capitaliz atio n 1 00 ; italiciz ed , when , 1 2 7

o f,

Pamphlets titles o f: to be capitaliz ed , 9 8 ; to b e italici z ed , 1 2 5 Pa er: cho ice o f, le t to pu lis her, 20 3 ; 20 3 S ee on illus trati o n s , epends Illus tratio ns Papers , titles o f: to be capitaliz ed , 9 8 to be put i n uo tati o n mark s , 1 1 5 i lical n ames o r titles o f, to be Para les c apitaliz ed , 9 0 co nnectio ns b e Paragraph"the, 20 , tween , 2 0 ; emphas i s in the , 2 1 Parallelis m o f phras ing, 43

Paren t,

mpo unds with 8 1 dis tinguis hed ro m

f —b

rack ets , Paren thes es : 1 2 0 ; rules fo r us e o f, 1 20 2 1 ; us e o f, fo r paren thetical claus es , 1 2 1 ; with gures o r letters indicating s u di isio n s ,

ﬁ

b v

o f co mmas in ,

Parenthetical claus es : us e o f paren thes es , 1 10 ; o f da s hes , 1 1 7 ; 1 21 .

Parks , capitaliz atio n o f n am es o f, 9 5 Participial phras es , us e o f co mma with, .

ﬁ

mis s io n

o rig in al

o r retentio n

wo rd , 68 ,

17 1

c apitali z

atio n

us e o f co m

Phras in g , parallelis m o f, 43 ” Pica, de ned , 1 8 7 , 1 89

ﬁ

—

Pit alls in d ictio n , 44 6 5 Planning, 1 4, 1 7 .

Plates , des cri

bd e

19 3

— 95

Pla s, titles o f: capitaliz atio n be i taliciz e d , 1 2 5

o f,

9 8;

Plurals :

bb viat h w f m d a

27;

matio n

o f,

in li terar e , o f arti 78: ho w o rmed , 1 1 4

io n s

co in ages ,

ﬁ

mark s

H‘

Po in t,

“

cial

115

”

Po in t s

n o un

1 14 ;

re erences ,

Po ems : c apitaliz ation o f titles when italiciz ed , 1 2 5 ; when in

o f,

98;

uo tatio n

ﬁ

ned , 1 8 7

ytm s e

) 1

ﬁ

ned , 1 8 7

Po li tica l : capitaliz atio n o f n ames alli ances , 9 3 ; o f di i s i o n s , 9 2 , 9 3 ; o rga ni z ati o ns , 9 1 ; o f pa rti es , 9 0

f of o

Po pe,

o rms

Po pe, H

Po rt,

”

in letter to ,

when

147

capita liz ed,

to b e spelled o ut, 7 5

”

rench, German , an d Dutch Particles in na mes : capi taliz ati o n o f, 8 8 ; ho w in dexed, 1 64 ; redundant, 3 4 .

o f,

Participle : nal e in

val

ecti

v b

1 2 0.

1 10

atio n

a with, 1 1 1 ; ad er ia l, 1 1 0 ; appo s itio nal, 1 1 0 ; co n un c tio n al, 1 0 8 ; paren thetical, 1 10 , made, 2 3 ; repe 1 1 7 , 1 20 , 1 2 1 ; read titio n o f, 4 3

Phrases :

”

c apitaliz

Philo so phic al s cho o ls , n ames o f, 9 0

v q—

Pers o niﬁcatio ns ,

bb v

alteratio ns in , to be de ned , 1 8 5 ; co nnec ti o n with, 1 8 5

ﬁ

mber o f wo rds in the

b f

Perio dicals , titles o f: capitaliz atio n o f, 9 8 ; de n i te a rti cle n o t treated as part o f, 9 9 ; to b e i tali ciz ed , 1 2 5

Page,

ﬁ

Organ iz atio n , in

bb v f

atio n

Perio d :

c apitali z

73 ;

res ,

Orders

ﬁgu

Per cen t : to be express ed in do es n o t tak e a peri o d, 1 0 1

co mma us ed

Po s itio n : _

co nnecti o n

Po sses si

Wi th,

e cas e,

112;

ho w

e o re

o f,

o f mo d iﬁ ers ,

med

72,

1 13

M AN UAL F OR

222

Pos sessives , 2 6 “ Po st co mpo unds with, 8 3 Po stscript, to be avo ided , i 3 a “ Pre co mpo unds with, 8 3 Predicate : agree ment o f s u ect and, 2 7 , 3 0 ; with the co pula, 3 6 Pre ace, po si tio n o f, 1 5 3 Pre xes , when h phenated , 83 , 84 “ ” Prelimin ar pages , 1 5 2 Prepos itions , 3 9 Presiden t o fun i ers it , o rms in letter to , .

ﬁ

1 47

Qua tity xp i f 7 mp u d with 8 Quan t t b 95; 4t (q a t ) d ﬁ d t at d a abb v at Qua i mp u d with 84 Qu y i di at d by i t gati po i t 3 Qu ti i di t pu t ati f 4 3 Qu ti ma k S I t gati p i t Qu tati ma k p iti f l with n

“

Pries t,

when

”

ca pitaliz e d ,

ms in letter to

bli hm

Printi ng

es ta

1 48

o f: capi to be i taliciz ed, 1 2 5 .

ﬁ

deﬁn ed , “

1 7o

revis ed , _

;

”

ho w to be mar 177;

“

ed ,

o n, n

rec

mma,

o f co

on o

r s:

o n

po mt, 1 03 ; po in t, 1 04 ; o f peri o d, .

co on

o f elli s is ,

1 13 ;

m atio n of excla

2, 10

on o

ee n e rro

nc u

122;

mterro ga 1 0 2 ; o fsemi of

— —

fo r us e o f, 1 1 4 1 7 ; use o fdo u le and smgle 1 1 6 1 7 uo tatio n s : ro m diﬁeren t autho rs , o llo w ing each o ther, ho w treated , 1 1 4 ; o f ro m a n autho r in his o wn pass ages wo rds 1 1 4 ; set in reduced t pe, when , co lo n

rules

1 06;

b f f

“

— y

ﬁ

o ns :

perio d o

used o r ti les i tali ciz e 9 8;

mitted after initials

ti tles o f, ca italiz e d, f t 12 5 ; ti tles 0 to be s pelled o ut, wh en , 7 5 Pu lisher: cho ice o f, in s u mitting manu scri pt, 200 Punctuatio n : o f indirect ues tio n , 4 2 , 1 03 ; rules fo r, 10 1 22 1 02 ;

”

Read, when italiciz ed, R eading , 9 R ecepti it “

1 26

ﬁ

R ecto , ” de

y mad

acti

n ed , 1 83 .

b lli

phrases

o n o f idea s, 1 7

ed ,

R egiments ,

capitaliz

R egions

liz a parts o f the wo rld, capita

ti o n o f names

R elatio ns

R elati

o f,

atio n 94

mes o f,

o fna

o f to pics , 1 8 .

e claus es , excess i e us e o f, 2 9

R eligio us : deno minatio ns , capitaliz atio n o f na mes o f, 9 0 ; o fo rgan iz atio ns , 9 1 .

R epetitio n

o f wo rds o r

b gg Publi ati

“

”

Pro per name s , c a ita liz atio n o f, 8 7 ; po ss ess i e o f, ho w o rmed, 7 2 Pro per no uns : capitaliz atio n o f, 87 , 9 4 Pro po rtio ns o f to pics , 1 8 Pu lication: de n ed , 200 ; terms o n which a omplis hcd, 201 ; when takes place,

atio n

R ailro ad an d R ailwa , to be s pelled o ut, 7 5 “ Re co mpo un ds with, 83

R edun dant particles , 3 9 “ ” R e ormer, when capitaliz

cap ita liz

ﬁ

R aces , tri es , and peo ples , o f names o f, 88

R ead

Proo reading : co py hplder, duties o f, 1 7 6 ; de ned , 1 7 6 ; queries , ho w to be treated , 1 8 1 ; trans po si tio n , ho w in dicated , 1 7 9 ; be made, 1 7 7 7 8 ; changes, ho w to correcti ons no t o be made on co p , t 1 7 8 ; mar s us ed in , 1 7 9

n erro

pag e-pro o to b e guarded

alterati o ns t, 1 8 5 ; d ut of author in co nnec as Proo re ading with, 1 8 5 ed , 1 8 5 ;

ti o n

1 05 ;

in use in ,

Pro no uns : ambiguit o f, 2 7 ; capitaliz a tion of, in ti tle s , 9 8 ; cap italiz atio n o f refem ng to Dei t , 8 7 ; erro rs in “ to case o f, 2 8 it is me In, ” 2 8 ; “ “ who ” and W c m” in tercha d 28 ; “ ” “ an d which, than who m, 2 8 ; an d “ ” " 28 ; who , us a ter 28 ; inde ni te, 2 9 :

n s

1 , i on, 10 1

re i

1 59

Pro ceedings (o f ta liz ati o n o f, 9 8 ;

e ne

o n s

”

1 5 1.

Pro o

en ts , terms

u r o

“

res s o ns o

tio n

President,

”

President o f the United States , letter to , 1 45

WR ITER S

R es idence ,

co nnecti o n

used

Wi th, 1 1 2

R es o lutio n s : “

mma

phras es , 43 e o re

“

o f,

”

the wo rds ”

“

ereas ,

”

an d the 1 28

R es o l ed to be ca italiz ed , 9 wo rd “ R es o l ed ” to e italiciz e , when used with “ the , ” 7 6 , 1 48 49 ; when Wi tho ut, 7 6 R e ised pro o , 1 7 7 R evisio n o fwo rk , 2 4

R o man t0 2

merals

missio n o fperio d after

IN DEX

ﬁ

R o man t p e, de n ed , 1 3 7 “ R un in , ” de n ed , 1 9 7

ﬁ

“

ﬁ

aratio n

p pv re

erso ,

”

er ,

”

1 78

o f,

Sacri ce o fideas , 1 5 “ Saint, ” when to be a reviated, 7 6 Salutato ry phras e : in so cial letters , : 3 3 ; in bus mess letters , r3 8 ; in o rmal letters , : 43 ; s peci al o rms o f, rgs 49 Sample pages S ee Specimen page s Scandina ian titles o f pu licatio ns , ho w capi taliz ed , 9 8 literar , and Scho o ls , philo s ophical, artis tic, capitali z atio n o f n ames o f, 9 0 Scien ti c ter s : when capitaliz ed , t o o ; when i tali ciz ed, 1 2 7 2 8 Scripture ass a es : names o f oo ks o f Bi le, w en a breVi ated, 7 7 ; punctua tio n o f, : 0 5 Sec retar o f s tate, o rms in letter to , 1 46 Sects , religio us , capitaliz atio n o fnames o f,

—

See and S ee also , when italic iz ed , 1 4 6 Selectio n o fideas , 1 5 ” Sel , co mpo unds with, 8 2 co mpo un ds with, 8 3 Semi Semico lo n : markin g di is io n o f s entence , : 0 6 ; po s itio n with uo tatio n marks , r0 6 ; rules fo r use o f, 1 0 6 ; to separate items in en umeratio ns , : 0 6 Sen ato r, o rms in letter to , I 46 Sentence, the, 2 1 Sentences : co mpo und , dangers o f, 4 1 ; i n erted o rde r o f, 4 1 Se uen ceo f tens es , Serial titles , to be uo ted , u s Sermo ns , titles o f, to be uo ted , u 5 “ ” ” Set, s et up , de ned , 7 po int t pe, illustrated , 1 8 8 r6 mo (se xdecimo ) : de ned , 1 9 5 ; no t to be treated as a re i ati o n , ro x “ ” ” Shall and will, 3 6 .

bj ubj

Sham

Ships ,

bb v

S ham

ﬁ

ec t,

ect,

mes o f ,

to b e

qu t d o e

: 16

ﬁ

15 7.

ﬁ

Small pica, de ned , So cial o rganiz atio n s , names o f, ”

capitaliz

So lar s s tem, capitaliz atio n o di es o f, 1 00

atio n

mes

o f na

ﬁ

So lid ” de ned , : 7 ; term o ten mis us ed ” 9‘ fo r direc tio n to run in , 1 9 7 “ H ” ” o meo ne and s o me o ne, di eren tin ted , 7 0 U ” and so me times , di er So metimes enti ated , 7 o Spa is h titles o f pu licatio ns , capitaliz ed , (I

k no wledg e

Special

Special trainin g

nec ess ar

Species n scientiﬁc i oo ; i tali ciz e d,

mes

Specimen pages , '

o u co

127

20 2

capitaliz ed ,

ad ance o fwo r

set up in

mpo s i ti o n

o f:

ﬁ

when added to o rm po ss ess i e, 7 2 Sa red o o ks , capitaliz atio n o f names

R unn ing

ﬁ

—

f b f

S ee Hal title Sideheads : de ned, lac k ace t pe in , 1 5 8 ; us e o fda s h a ter, : 1 8 Signatures to letters : o miss io n o f co mma a ter, i s 4 ; o f perio d , 1 3 4 " Since claus es , co mma us ed e o re, 1 08 6 po int t pe , illus trated , : 88 ’ Sis ter, co mpo un ds with, 8 1 (l ” Slug de ned, : 9 3 Small c aps : de ned , 1 5 7 ; ho w indicated Sho rt title

R unning heads : de ned , : 83 ; “ ” o f, r83 8 4 ; rec to an( de ned , : 83 -

223

Spelled o ut, dates , names , num ers , time , ti tles , wo rds , when , 7 3 7 5 Spellin i a a, :2 when used as lig ature , 7 2 ; do u ng o f nal co ns o nant in termi n atio n o i deri ati es , 6 7 ; k added to termin atio n o f wo rds endin g in c, in o rming deri ati es when , 66 lis t o rm o i, 69 ; o f wo rds with appro ed reviating , rules fo r a rules fo r, 7 5 7 9 ; rules o r co mpo unding , 80 8 5 rules fo r s pelling de ri ati es , 6 6 6 8 termin atio n o f s ilent e, when retained i o rming deri ati es, 6 7 r; termin a n tio n y changed to 4 in arming deri a tives , when , 68 ; termin atio ns vis e an d ho w dis tinguis hed in prac tice , 0 ; ho w c is terminatio n s "s i o n an d tinguis hed in prac tice, 68 S uares , capitaliz atio n o f names o f, 9 5 -

ﬁ

v v v v

—

v f ,

— —

v v

{

indexing o f n ames with, : 63 Sta tes an d United States po sses s io n s lis t o f a re i ati o ns fo r, 7 6 ; n ames o fgro ups o f, to b e c api taliz ed, 9 4 Statio ner , us ines s , 1 3 7 .

bb v y b

A M AN UAL F OR

224 Stereoty

b f m Stub scri

“

: :

”

o f,

ned, :

o f i mpres si o ns _

S atio n

o f, etc.

prepar

the

b v bj bj

Su Su

qu tat o

io ns , n

ect o f sen tence:

(o f ho no r and res pect) : to be to be s pelled capi taliz ed when 8 8 o i t, when , 7 3 7 6 ; a bre i ated, when , .

“

the, 3 3

o e

y b

“

T ext ﬁg ure, -

“

”

T he, when 7 6 . hi s so

ﬁ

de ned, : 5 2 , 1 8 2 used with Ho n , R ev .

T ri

etc

treated as

Tho ro ug hares : capitaliz ati o n o f names o f, 9 5 ; n um ers o f, to b e s pelled o ut, 7 4 Tho us an ds , use o f co mma a ter dig its indicating , : 1 3 T ime, to be s pelled o ut, when , 7 4 with indicatio ns : T ime punctuated co lo n , 7 4 , m s ; s pelled o ut, when , 7 4 “ S ee Illimtratio ns T ip, ” de ned, : 9 8 “ ” in co n T itle, co m a used e o re o f, necti o n Wi th, : 1 2 T itle page, what it s ho uld co ntain , 1 5 3

ﬁ

ers atio n

18 ;

special,

as , 4 ;

mpo unds with, 83

es , races ,

yC b i t typ b dy

an d peo ples ,

capita liz

atio n

y y T yp T yp Typ

illus trated , r89 o o f, explained , : 8 1 ; names o f eren t siz es o f, a nd illustratio ns , 1 88

Trin it , hris tian , capitaliz atio n of names o f mem ers o f, 8 7 n

no t to

pro po rtio ns o f,

1 8.

o f n ames o f,

ﬁ

3 2 mo : de ned , r9 5 ; abbrevmti o n , ro r

to nig ht

T rans itio n in sentence, use o f dash to i n di cate , rr7 T ranslatio n , rights o f, 20 2 , 208 T reaties , capitaliz atio n o f names o f, 9 6

rs r.

“

o f, 1 7 ;

co n .

9 8;

o f,

Technical practices , 1 5 7 ro po int t pe, illustrated , 1 8 9 T ens es : use o f, 3 2 ; co ntaminated o rms , 3 2 ; se uence o f, 3 2 T erms in us e in prin ting es ta lis hmen ts ,

7 o , 84

un co n s cio us , 2

ﬁ

atio n

to mo rro w,

en ,

T rainin g :

To pics : o rder relatio ns o f,

ho w to T a les : b o x heads , de n ed , “ ” u r r i n t er 1 8 c a s t in r r e a e f o , , 9 ; g p p p p 19 8; o o tno tes to , 1 9 9 ; s m o ls in , 1 9 9 -

“

”

capitaliz

qu t d T day hyph

T o as ts :

j v y b

co mpo unds with, 8 3 Super Superlati es , 3 0 ” “ Supra, co mpo unds with, 84 Supreme Being, capitaliz atio n o f no uns ad ec ti es , and pro no uns fo r, 8 7 S m o ls , treatmen t o f: chemical, ro e ; metri c, 7 8 meas urement, 7 8 ; what, to

b k

use i n ta es , : 9 9

b k

Sultan , ” when capitaliz ed, 8 8 Sumi i ariz ing clauses , us e o f das hes in , u

(o f

capita liz at o n p u licatio n s ) o r ca i tali z ing in Eng lis , o f, 9 8 ; rules f p Latin , re nc h, Itali an, Span ish Sc andi n a ian , German, Danis h, Dutc , when to be italic iz ed , 1 2 5 ; when to ddress es , u s : o f uo ted , 1 1 4 1 5 ; o f a articles , u s ; o f o o s , 1 2 5 ; of chap ters , u s ; o f c cles o f po ems , 1 2 5 ; o f divis io n s o f o o s , : 1 5 ; of do cuments , 1 25 : o f ess a s , : 2 5 ; o f lectures , u s , lets , 1 2 5 ; o f news papers , : 2 5 ; o f pamph o f peri o di cals : 2 5 ; of o f papers , 1 1 5 ; pla s , 1 2 5 ; o f poems , 1 2 5 0 proceed 0 seri es , u s ; i ngs o i mo ieties o f tracts , 1 2 5 ; o treatis es , 1 2 5

agree o miss i o n o f, 30 ;

27,

b v

7‘ Titles

limi tatio n o f, re co mpo un d , 3 0 ; an d

predicate, agreemen t o f, ment of co pula with, 3 1 ; sham, 3 1

Su uncti

T itles

cho ice o f, 1 2 :

ect:

co mpo un ds with, 8 3 Sub Su di is io ns : letters used to in dicate, to be italiciz ed , 1 2 6 ; o f titlis , to be put in

e xceptio ns ,

M anuscript hints

bb v

Titles : ac ademic , a re iated , 89 ; ci il. militar and religio us , when capi tal iz e d, 88 ; to be spelled o ut, when , 7 3 ;

19 4;

mber

9 4;

ﬁ

”

St le

ad antage

es :

WR IT ER S

T pe setting machines , o i - 9 3 T pe meas uremen t, ho w to ma -

e- page ,

e siz es

“

meas ure ” o f rs r in co mmo n use 1 89 ,

o graphica l

99 u

1 89 - 9 2

prac tices and terms ,

r8 7

(lo ng ) 72

e, 1 89

ﬁ

m o f inde

nite

article

e o re,

Ultra co mpo unds with, 84 Umlaut, indexing o f German names with, 1 65 S ee In dex .

IN DE X “

mpo unds with, 83

bulary

Vo ca

Un co n scio us training, 2 ” “ Under co mpo unds with, 84 “ United States ” when spelled o ut, 7 4 “ Upper case,” ho w indicated, : 5 7 ; mean ing an d o rigin o f word, : 5 7 io latio ns of, : 5 Us a ge: 2 2 ;

“

ho w to treat, 7 3 , 88 , m 4

”

and meas ures , me tric : ho w designated , 7 8 ; to be s pelled o ut when , ,

‘

When clauses co mma used before : 08 “ Wli ereaWc laus es co mma us ed be fo re “

”

I c’ s

‘(

’9

VM 1 04

capitaliz ed ,

88 ;

ho w indexed ,

b b

n o uns ,

Vers io ns

capita liz

co pulati

o f Bi

ﬁ

“

atio n

o f,

in titles , 9 8 ;

Vice

Will

and

”

Words

“

s ha ll,

mber

nu _

repeti tio n o f,

W it

”

o f,

bbr viati ns f

o r,

mpo unds with. 8 2

t pe page,

190;

ﬁne, 5 ; a cra t an d an art 6 ; cra t c an be learned, and t nk can be ta ug t, r '

3: r;

e o re, r0 8

Vers o , ” de ned, : 83 Vicar general, o rms in letter to , “

co mma us ed “

Ver al Ver

Vo n,

W ight

225

: 49

Z oo lo gical terms , itali ciz ed , when ,

liz capita : 27

atio n

o f, ro e

;